Brother PR1050X Embroidery Machine User Manual

Product Code: 884-T13

Operation Manual

Embroidery Machine

Be sure to read this document before using the machine.

We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.

This product includes open-source software.

To see the open source licensing remarks, please go to the manual download section on your model's

home page of Brother Solutions Center at “ http://support.brother.com ”.

Trademarks

IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.

All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the

explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.

Open Source Licensing Remarks

Thank you for purchasing this embroidery machine. Before using this machine, carefully read the

“IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the

various functions.

In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for

future reference.

Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.

DANGER - To reduce the risk of electric shock:

1Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, when making any

user servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.

WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock, or injury to persons:

2Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when lubricating it or when making any other user

servicing adjustments mentioned in the operation manual.

• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull

it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.

• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.

• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.

3Electrical Hazards:

• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not

connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a

qualified electrician.

• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.

4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been dropped

or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized Brother dealer or

service center for examination, repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.

• To avoid electric shock or fire; do not use a damaged power supply plug or loose electrical outlet, and ensure

that the power supply plug is fully inserted and secure.

•

While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or

deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.

• When transporting the machine, be sure to lift it from the bottom positions. Lifting the machine by any other part

may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.

• When lifting the machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may injure

your back or knees.

• While the machine is being transported, be careful not to touch the operation panel, thread guides or any other

part, otherwise injuries may result.

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

5Always keep your work area clear:

• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine free from

the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.

• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.

• Never drop or insert any object into any opening.

• Keep fingers out of all machine openings, such as near the carriage, otherwise injuries may result.

• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.

• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or

garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.

• Do not use this machine near an open flame; the movement of the embroidery frame could cause the garment

being sewn to catch fire.

• Do not place this machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the machine

may fall, resulting in injuries.

• While attaching or detaching an embroidery frame or other included accessory or while maintaining the

machine, be careful not to hit the machine with your body or any other part of it.

6Special care is required when sewing:

• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.

• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.

• While the machine is in operation, keep your hands away from the needle bar case and all moving parts near the

needle bar case, otherwise injuries may result.

• Switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle area,

such as changing the needle.

• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.

7This machine is not a toy:

• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.

• This machine is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.

• Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with this machine.

• Do not use the included scissors or seam ripper in any other way than how they are intended. In addition, when

opening a hole with the seam ripper, do not place your hands or fingers in the cutting path, otherwise injuries

may result if the seam ripper slips.

• The plastic bag that this machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed of.

Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.

• Do not use outdoors.

8For a longer service life:

• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine

near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.

• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the

case and machine, and should never be used.

• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, needle, or other parts to

assure correct installation.

9For repair or adjustment:

• Do not try to disassemble, repair or alter this machine in any way, otherwise a fire, electric shock or injuries may

result.

• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized Brother dealer.

• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of

the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your

local authorized Brother dealer.

Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.

Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.

Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.

Use only a mouse designed specifically for this machine.

The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.brother.com

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This machine is intended for household use.

FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES EXCEPT EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced

physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless

they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a

person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do

not play with the appliance.

FOR USERS IN EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons with

reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and knowledge if

they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance in a safe

way and understand the hazards involved. Children shall not play with the appliance.

Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by children without supervision.

FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA

AND CYPRUS ONLY

IMPORTANT

• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,

rating as marked on plug.

• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.

• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your

authorized Brother dealer to obtain the correct lead.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity

(For USA Only)

declares that the product

complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant

to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can

be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B

digital device.

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Corporation could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation

200 Crossing Boulevard

P.O. Box 6911

Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

TEL : (908) 704-1700

Product Name: Brother Embroidery Machine

Model Number: PR1050X

The enclosed machine includes data, software and/or documentation (collectively “CONTENT”) that are

proprietary products of Brother Industries, Ltd. (“BROTHER”). BY USING THE CONTENT, THE

CUSTOMER ACCEPTS THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. BROTHER retains

ownership of all rights to CONTENT and to the copies of the CONTENT included in this package. The

CONTENT are licensed (not sold) to you (“CUSTOMER”) under the terms and conditions of this

Agreement.

CUSTOMER is licensed to:

• Use the CONTENT in combination with an embroidery machine to create embroidery.

• Use the CONTENT in combination with an embroidery machine that CUSTOMER owns or uses, provided that

the CONTENT is not used on more than one embroidery machine at a time.

Except as otherwise provided herein, CUSTOMER may not:

• Allow more than one copy of the CONTENT to be available for use at any one time.

• Reproduce, modify, publish, distribute, sell, rent, sublicense or otherwise make available to others CONTENT.

• Distribute, rent, sublicense, lease, sell, transfer or assign the media card or CONTENT.

• Decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the CONTENT or assist others to do the same.

• Alter, translate, modify or adapt the CONTENT or any part thereof for business, commercial or industrial

purposes.

• Sell or otherwise distribute the EMBROIDERY created by use of the CONTENT, WHICH ORIGINALLY BEARS

CERTAIN COPYRIGHT NOTICE UNDER THE NAME OF ANY THIRD PARTIES OTHER THAN BROTHER (e.g.

“©DISNEY”).

BROTHER retains all rights not expressly granted to CUSTOMER herein.

Nothing in this agreement constitutes a waiver of the rights of BROTHER under any law. This agreement

shall be governed by the laws of Japan.

Please direct all inquiries concerning this Agreement in writing by regular mail, to Brother Industries, Ltd.,

1-1-1 Kawagishi, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8562, Japan, Attention: P&H company Sales and Marketing

Dept.

License Agreement

The following warning labels are on the machine.

Be sure to observe the precautions described in the labels.

Warning Labels

Label locations

Please put a drop of oil onto the hook

once a day before use.

Ten-needle machine

embroidering

Your machine has ten needles, each threaded with

a different color of thread. It can sew embroidery

patterns that contain several colors by

automatically selecting the appropriate needle for

each color.

The mechanism that moves the needles up and

down is called the needle bar, and the needle bars

are in the needle bar case. The needle bars are

named from right to left: needle bar 1, needle bar

2, needle bar 3, needle bar 4, needle bar 5, needle

bar 6, needle bar 7, needle bar 8, needle bar 9 and

needle bar 10.

1 Needle bar 1

2 Needle 1

3 Needle bar case

The machine automatically assigns a thread color

to each needle. There are two methods for

assigning the thread colors. With the automatic

method (default method when the machine is

purchased), needles that are already threaded with

a color that will be used in the next pattern are

assigned to the same thread color based on the

needle bar assignments from the previous pattern

in order to reduce the number of thread spool

changes.

For more professional embroidering, using a

manual color sequence allows the needle bar

assignments to easily be specified manually.

Thread color and needle bar combinations can be

selected manually to create a menu so that the

needle bar assignments can be based on the thread

color numbers. (Refer to “Selecting/Managing

Thread Colors for Each Needle Bar (Manual Color

Sequence)” on page 132.)

The thread colors assigned to the needle bars are

listed on the screen. Thread the needle bars as

indicated.

1 The threads threaded on the needle bars are

indicated as shown here.

The spool pins, thread tension knobs, thread take-

up levers and thread paths, mentioned when

threading the upper thread, are different according

to their corresponding needle bar number.

Not all ten needles can be used to sew at the same

time. Only one needle is moved to the

embroidering position at a time. According to the

sewing order, the needle bar case is moved to the

left and right so that the needle bar and needle

thread with the required color can be moved to

the embroidering position.

Machine Structure and Features

Memo

• Sewing is not necessarily performed in the

order of the needle bar numbers.

1 Needle at the embroidering position

The needle is positioned over the hole in the

needle plate 2.

When starting the machine, the presser foot is

automatically lowered. The embroidery is sewn

and thread is pulled away from the material when

thread trimming and when changing thread colors

(moving to the different needles to be sewn within

the embroidery). When sewing is finished, the

machine stops. If the pattern uses eleven or more

thread colors, the machine will stop when it is

necessary for the thread spools to be changed, and

the corresponding instructions appear on the LCD.

(However, when “Manual needle bar sequences”

is set to “ON”, the machine does not automatically

stop when a thread spool must be changed. For

details, refer to “Selecting/Managing Thread Colors

for Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence)” on

page 132.)

Differences from single-needle

machines

■ Can sew embroidery patterns using

ten or less colors without the need

to replace the thread spools

With single-needle machines, the thread spool must

be changed and the machine must be threaded each

time a different thread color is used. With this

machine, it is not necessary to change the thread

spool or rethread the machine with embroidery

patterns containing ten or less colors. If total colors

are less than ten colors, and if total color change is

more than eleven times, machine will come back to

the needle that the machine is already used and sew

the same color again automatically.

■ Automatic sewing reduces sewing

time

Except to change the thread spools with patterns

containing eleven or more colors, once the machine

is started, it continues to operate automatically, from

lowering the presser foot to performing the specified

operations at the starting and end positions in

addition to changing the thread colors. Since the

machine can change threads and finish stitching,

sewing time is reduced.

■ Automatically pulls and holds the

thread tails to the under side of

fabric at the beginning and end of

stitching

Since the machine automatically pulls the upper

thread under the fabric at the beginning of a color,

and pulls the upper thread from the fabric at the

time of thread trimming, you don’t need to deal with

the upper thread tail at all.

■ Automatically moves the embroidery

frame to the embroidering position

With a single-needle machine, in most cases, the

embroidery pattern is centered in the frame and the

fabric must be correctly positioned within the

embroidery frame with the center of the desired

embroidering position aligned with the center of the

embroidery frame. However, with 10 needle

embroidery machine, the embroidery frame is

moved to determine the embroidering position,

making it easier to sew the pattern at any place in

the frame. In addition, the embroidering position

can be freely determined manually as well as with

the camera positioning function after the fabric is

hooped and the embroidery frame is attached to the

machine, regardless of how the fabric is positioned

in the embroidery frame.

Other features

■ Quickly combine patterns using the

large LCD screen

The machine is equipped with a large 10.1-inch

LCD screen, the same as on many tablets.

The selected embroidery pattern is displayed on the

large LCD screen with the actual needle drop

position image. This function allows you to align the

patterns easier than before.

■ Link function – for your embroidery

business –

You can send embroidery patterns edited in

embroidery editing software provided with the Link

function, such as PE-DESIGN NEXT /10 or later,

from a computer to an embroidery machine. You

can connect up to 4 machines to a single computer

at a same time. (Refer to “Sending Embroidery

Patterns From a Computer to the Machine (Link

Function)” on page 169.)

■ Embroider while replacing the

thread spool a minimal number of

times

Before starting to embroider, touch the thread color

sorting key ( ) to rearrange the embroidery order

and sort it by thread colors. For example, when

embroidering after simply arranging the same

pattern to be repeated side-by-side, you will need to

replace the thread spool multiple times with each

pattern. However, by using the thread color sorting

function, the thread color order will be rearranged

allowing you to embroider the same color at one

time, while replacing the thread spool a minimal

number of times.

The thread color sorting function cannot be used

with overlapping patterns.

■ Create more original designs with

advanced character input

More types of character patterns are available, and

the input method has been improved. New

characters can be added in the middle of the text,

which was not possible until now, and the smoother

and more intuitive operation ensures that there are

no longer any obstacles to your imagination.

■ Embroidering progress bar

Since numbers for the time and stitches do not

always provide the clearest image of the remaining

embroidery time, the new embroidering progress

bar shows the progress of the entire embroidery at a

glance.

■ Safety mechanism

The machine is equipped with a locking mechanism

that helps prevent injuries from accidental

operation. The machine can only be started after the

machine is unlocked. The color of the start/stop

button changes to inform you of whether or not the

machine is locked.

■ Wide selection of built-in thread

color information

The thread color information for manufacturers’

threads is available, making it easy to choose the

appropriate thread color.

■ Expanded thread color display

feature enables colors to be

displayed as realistic true color

The colors and thread color numbers are stored in

the machine’s memory. From this thread color

library, you can select colors to create your own

color thread table. If the pattern colors are changed

using this table, the pattern can be displayed with

only the thread colors that you have. In addition, the

embroidery pattern can be displayed as it would

appear after it is embroidered.

Lit in red Flashing in green

The machine is locked.

The machine can be

started.

■ Automatic needle-threading

mechanism

Using the automatic needle-threading mechanism,

threads each needle easily.

In addition, you can specify that automatic needle

threading be canceled for specific needle bars.

■ USB port available as standard

equipment

By connecting a computer to the machine using the

included USB cable, embroidery patterns can be

transferred to/from the computer. (Refer to “Saving

embroidery patterns in the computer” on page 161.)

If the machine is positioned at a distance that

prevents the USB cable from reaching the computer,

embroidery patterns can be transferred from the

computer by temporarily saving them on USB media

or an SD card, which is then inserted into the

machine. (Refer to “Saving embroidery patterns to

USB media/SD card” on page 161.)

■ Moving or threading a selected

needle bar at any time

When selecting, editing or embroidering a pattern,

any one of the needle bars can be selected at any

time to be threaded or moved to the embroidering

position.

Touch to open the needle move screen, then

select the needle bar number that you want to move

or thread. (Refer to “Moving and threading a

selected needle bar” on page 62.)

Available features

Designs with a maximum size of 200 mm (H) ×

360 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

can be embroidered.

■ Manual color sequence - More

professional use of this machine

If you specify the thread colors used with this

machine, or if you use DST files frequently, it would

be convenient to use the manual color sequence.

(Refer to “Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for

Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence)” on

page 132.)

■ Various built-in patterns

Many built-in character patterns, embroidery

patterns and frame patterns enable you to start

embroidering right after purchasing this machine.

■ Embroidery pattern editing

Lettering and embroidery patterns can be combined

or a text arrangement can be specified to arrange the

patterns.

The machine can also be set to repeatedly sew the

same pattern.

This manual is constructed as described below. Before using the machine, check the procedures

described with the numbered titles in the title list on the first page of chapter 2. This shows the sequence

of these basic operations.

Read before use

Chapter 1: Getting Ready

The setup of the embroidery machine and the

various preparations required before starting to

sew are described in this chapter.

Chapter 2: Embroidering Tutorial

This chapter describes the basic embroidering

operations in order—from turning on the machine

and sewing a pattern to finishing sewing. Follow

the steps of the tutorial to embroider a pattern and

master the operation of this embroidery machine.

Chapter 3: Other Basic Procedures

This chapter provides explanations on operations

other than those described in chapter 2, such as

sewing a pattern with eleven or more colors, and

other necessary operations, for example, changing

the needle.

Read when additional

information is required

Chapter 4: Embroidering Settings

This chapter contains descriptions on the various

embroidering settings, which make editing

patterns simple.

Chapter 5: Selecting/Editing/Saving Patterns

This chapter provides details on selecting, editing

and saving embroidery patterns.

Chapter 6: Basic Settings and Help Feature

This chapter contains descriptions on the use of

the settings key and the machine operations key.

Details on changing the basic embroidery

machine settings and viewing operations on the

LCD will be provided.

Chapter 7: Appendix

This chapter provides descriptions of techniques

for various embroidering operations, pointers for

creating beautiful embroidery, and details on

maintenance procedures and corrective measures

that should be taken when a problem occurs.

Searching for information

■ Searching the manual

By title

Check the descriptions at the left for the contents of

each chapter, and then check the table of contents.

By keyword

Search the index at the end of this manual. Look for

the desired keyword, and then refer to the page that

is indicated.

By screen

Descriptions of the keys and other information that

appear in the main LCD screens are provided in the

tables on pages 70 to 79. For details, refer to the

page that is indicated.

By condition

Various possible conditions and the corresponding

operations are described on page 80. For details,

refer to the page that is indicated.

■ Searching the machine

This machine is equipped with a help feature.

Learning how to perform an operation

Touch the machine operations guide key, and then

check for the desired information. (Refer to “Using

the Machine Operations Guide Key” on page 235.)

Manual Structure

Introduction ......................................................... 1

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 1

License Agreement ............................................... 5

Warning Labels..................................................... 6

Machine Structure and Features........................... 7

Ten-needle machine embroidering......................................... 7

Differences from single-needle machines ............................... 8

Other features ........................................................................ 9

Available features................................................................. 12

Manual Structure................................................ 13

Read before use.................................................................... 13

Read when additional information is required...................... 13

Searching for information ..................................................... 13

Chapter1 GETTING READY 17

Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions..... 18

Front view ............................................................................ 18

Right-side/rear view.............................................................. 19

Operation panel ................................................................... 19

Accessories......................................................... 20

Included accessories ............................................................ 20

Accessories that are included in some countries or regions

.... 21

Optional Accessories.......................................... 22

Setting Up the Machine ...................................... 24

Setup and transporting precautions....................................... 24

Setup location ...................................................................... 25

Setting up the machine......................................................... 26

Remove the fixing plates ...................................................... 27

Adjusting the operation panel position ................................. 27

Preparing the thread guide assembly .................................... 28

Preparing the spool stand ..................................................... 29

Attaching the embroidery frame holder ................................ 30

Chapter2 EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL 31

Operating Precautions........................................ 32

Power supply precautions .................................................... 32

Needle precautions .............................................................. 33

Checking the needle............................................................. 33

Bobbin precautions .............................................................. 33

Upper thread recommendations........................................... 34

Fabric recommendations ...................................................... 34

Display recommendations.................................................... 34

Basic Procedures ................................................ 35

1. Installing the Bobbin....................................... 36

Removing the bobbin case ................................................... 36

Installing the bobbin............................................................. 36

Installing the bobbin case..................................................... 37

2. Turning ON the Machine................................ 38

Setting your machine for the first time .................................. 39

Understanding the screens ................................................... 40

Screen overview................................................................... 41

3. Selecting an Embroidery Pattern..................... 43

Selecting an embroidery pattern ........................................... 44

4. Editing the Embroidery Pattern....................... 45

5. Previewing the Image ..................................... 46

Checking a preview image ................................................... 46

6. Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame. 48

Hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame......................... 48

Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine

.... 50

Attaching the embroidery frame ........................................... 50

Continuing to the embroidering settings screen .................... 52

8. Specifying Embroidering Setting ..................... 53

9. Checking the Embroidery Area ....................... 54

Temporarily stopping to check the area................................ 54

Continuing to the embroidering screen ................................ 54

10. Upper Threading.......................................... 55

Checking the needle bars and thread colors......................... 55

Upper threading .................................................................. 57

Threading the needle........................................................... 61

11. Sewing the Embroidery ................................ 64

Starting embroidering .......................................................... 64

Stopping embroidering ........................................................ 66

12.

Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric

.... 68

Removing the embroidery frame.......................................... 68

Removing the fabric............................................................. 68

13. Turning OFF the Machine ............................ 69

Screen Quick Reference Guide .......................... 70

Key displays......................................................................... 70

Understanding the pattern type selection screen .................. 71

Understanding the pattern list screen ................................... 72

Understanding the pattern editing screen............................. 73

Understanding the embroidering settings screen .................. 75

Understanding the embroidering screen .............................. 78

When You Have a Question, This May Help You

.... 80

Technical terms: .................................................................. 80

Patterns:............................................................................... 80

Embroidering: ...................................................................... 80

Useful external connection functions................................... 81

USB mouse operation .......................................................... 83

Chapter3 OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES 85

Changing the Needle.......................................... 86

Replacing the needle ........................................................... 86

Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames ............ 88

Embroidery frame holders.................................................... 88

When difficult to replace the embroidery frame................... 88

Types of embroidery frames/frame holders and their applications

... 89

Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric

.... 92

Hooping the Fabric ............................................ 93

Hooping the fabric in the extra-large and large embroidery

frames.................................................................................. 93

Using the embroidery sheet ................................................. 94

Large/small pieces of fabric.................................................. 95

Embroidery Frame Position and Movement ....... 96

Changing the Embroidering Position .................. 98

Adjusting the angle .............................................................. 99

Aligning the Embroidering Position.................. 102

Displaying the fabric while aligning

the embroidery position..................................................... 102

Using the built-in camera .................................................. 105

Using the included embroidery positioning sticker ............ 108

Switching the Thread Colors on the Screen ..... 110

Embroidering a Pattern Containing Eleven or

More Colors ..................................................... 112

Checking if thread spool changes are necessary................. 113

Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of

Eleven or More Colors ..................................... 114

Change thread spools message and spool thread indicators

.... 114

Easily changing the thread spools ...................................... 115

If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread

Runs Out While Embroidering ......................... 116

If the upper thread breaks .................................................. 116

If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out .............................. 118

Embroidering From the Beginning or

Middle of the Pattern ....................................... 119

Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the

Machine ........................................................... 122

Contents

Adjusting the Thread Tension of both

the Bobbin and Upper Thread .......................... 124

Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread......................... 124

Adjusting the tension of the upper thread ........................... 125

Chapter4 EMBROIDERING SETTINGS 127

Basting Embroidery .......................................... 128

Creating an Appliqué Piece .............................. 129

Creating an appliqué piece ................................................ 129

Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for

Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence) ...... 132

Convenience of the manual color sequence....................... 132

Specifying the manual color sequence ............................... 132

Using the manual color sequence ...................................... 133

Precautions on the manual color sequence ........................ 133

Automatic Lock Stitch Setting .......................... 134

Starting/Ending Position Settings ...................... 135

Repeatedly sewing a pattern along a diagonal.................... 136

Embroidering linked characters.......................................... 137

Maximum Sewing Speed Setting....................... 139

Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes

.... 140

Stopping the machine at the next color change .................. 140

Specifying pause locations before embroidering ................ 140

Temporary Needle Bar Setting ......................... 142

Uninterrupted embroidering (monochrome)....................... 142

Reserved Needle Bar and

Sewing Speed Settings ...................................... 143

Chapter5 SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING

PATTERNS 147

Using the Memory Function ............................. 148

Embroidery data precautions.............................................. 148

Concerning USB media...................................................... 149

Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ...................... 150

General pattern selection ................................................... 150

Embroidery patterns ........................................................... 151

Frame patterns ................................................................... 152

Monogram and frame designs ............................................ 153

Alphabet patterns............................................................... 155

Decorative alphabet patterns ............................................. 158

Saving embroidery patterns in the machine’s memory........ 160

Saving embroidery patterns to USB media/SD card ............ 161

Saving embroidery patterns in the computer ...................... 161

Connecting the USB using the included USB cord clamps

... 163

Retrieving patterns from the machine’s memory................. 164

Recalling from USB media/SD card.................................... 165

Recalling from the computer.............................................. 166

Saving embroidery patterns from any memory source

to another memory ............................................................ 168

Sending Embroidery Patterns From a Computer

to the Machine (Link Function) ........................ 169

Operations available with the Link function....................... 169

Embroidering using the Link function................................. 170

Disabling the Link function ................................................ 173

Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing

Screen) ............................................................. 174

Enlarge the pattern image on the screen............................. 174

Combining patterns............................................................ 174

Selecting the pattern to be edited ....................................... 175

Grouping multiple selected patterns................................... 176

Moving a pattern................................................................ 176

Flipping a pattern horizontally ........................................... 177

Changing the size of a pattern (Normal resizing mode) ...... 178

Changing the pattern size while maintaining the desired

thread density (stitch recalculator)...................................... 179

Rotating a pattern............................................................... 180

Changing the text arrangement of a character .................... 181

Changing the character spacing ......................................... 181

Separating combined character patterns............................. 182

Trimming the threads between characters .......................... 183

Combining the separated character patterns ....................... 183

Specifying multi-color text.................................................. 184

Changing the character font ............................................... 184

Changing the font and size of individual characters............ 184

Changing the thread density (only for selected character

and frame patterns)............................................................. 185

Changing the colors of the pattern...................................... 185

Find new color schemes with the color shuffling function

.... 187

Thread color sorting ........................................................... 190

Designing repeated patterns ............................................... 190

Creating a custom thread table ........................................... 195

Choosing a color from the custom thread table .................. 197

Saving and recalling the custom thread table

using USB media................................................................ 198

Duplicating a pattern.......................................................... 199

Deleting a pattern............................................................... 200

Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering

Settings Screen)................................................ 201

Rotating the entire pattern .................................................. 201

Editing a Combined Pattern ............................. 202

Using the Camera to Connect Patterns ............ 206

Connecting three patterns................................................... 206

Changing the position of a sticker....................................... 212

Connecting rotated patterns................................................ 214

Connecting patterns to be joined along an edge ................. 216

Resume feature................................................................... 218

Chapter6 BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP

FEATURE 219

Using the Settings Key...................................... 220

Understanding the settings screen ...................................... 220

Changing the display guides............................................... 223

Changing the thread color information ............................... 225

Selecting the thread color information

for “PES” format data.......................................................... 226

Changing the background colors of

the embroidery patterns or thumbnails ............................... 227

Specifying jumpstitch trimming /

“DST” jump codes for trimming ......................................... 227

Deleting short stitches ........................................................ 228

Specifying the remaining length of thread........................... 228

Changing the embroidery basting distance ......................... 229

Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”......... 229

Changing the screen saver settings ..................................... 229

Setting the opening screen.................................................. 231

Specifying the spool stand LED setting................................ 231

Adjusting the brightness of the sewing light ........................ 232

Changing the speaker volume ............................................ 232

Specifying thread sensor..................................................... 233

Changing the pointer shape when a USB mouse is used..... 233

Changing the units of measurements .................................. 234

Adjusting the brightness of the screen display..................... 234

Changing the language....................................................... 234

Using the Machine Operations Guide Key....... 235

Viewing the operation guides ............................................. 235

Playing a tutorial video....................................................... 236

Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) videos............................................ 237

Chapter7 APPENDIX 239

Appliqué Sewing .............................................. 240

Sewing appliqué patterns ................................................... 240

Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (1)...................... 241

Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (2)...................... 242

Sewing Large-size (Split) Embroidery Patterns

.... 244

Helpful Tips for the Operation of the Machine

.... 247

Checking the thread tension of built-in patterns.................. 247

Sewing a pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric ............ 248

Color thread table .............................................................. 250

Colors of Tajima (.dst) embroidery data .............................. 250

Creating Beautiful Embroidery......................... 251

Threads .............................................................................. 251

Stabilizers (backing) ........................................................... 251

Hooping techniques ........................................................... 253

Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart.................................... 254

Installing the Included Table ............................ 255

Removing the table ............................................................ 257

Embroidery Patterns for the Optional

Jumbo Frame .................................................... 258

Using the Optional Cap Frame ......................... 262

Cap frame and its accessories............................................. 262

Types of caps ..................................................................... 263

Fabric precautions.............................................................. 264

Preparing to use the cap frame ........................................... 265

Attaching the cap frame ..................................................... 269

Installing the embroidery frame holder ............................... 276

Additional digitizing information........................................ 277

Using the Optional Bobbin Winder .................. 279

Precautions ........................................................................ 279

Optional bobbin winder and its accessories ....................... 279

Setting up the optional bobbin winder................................ 280

Connecting the AC adapter ................................................ 280

Winding the bobbin ........................................................... 281

Maintenance..................................................... 284

Cleaning the LCD............................................................... 284

Cleaning the machine surface ............................................ 284

Cleaning the hook .............................................................. 284

Cleaning around the needle plate....................................... 285

Cleaning the bobbin case ................................................... 286

Cleaning the thread paths of the upper threads................... 287

Oiling the machine ............................................................ 288

About the maintenance message ........................................ 289

Troubleshooting................................................ 290

On-screen troubleshooting ................................................. 290

Troubleshooting ................................................................. 291

Error messages.................................................................... 299

If the machine does not respond when a key is pressed ...... 307

Specifications ................................................... 308

Embroidery machine specifications .................................... 308

Upgrading Your Machine’s Software ................ 309

Upgrade procedure using USB media................................. 309

Upgrade procedure using computer ................................... 310

Index ................................................................ 311

Chapter 1

GETTING READY

After unpacking the machine, first refer to “Accessories” on page 20, and check that all listed

accessories are included. After checking that all accessories are included, the embroidery

machine can be set up.

The setup of the machine and the various preparations required before starting to sew are

described in this chapter.

Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions ......... 18

Front view.................................................................................18

Right-side/rear view..................................................................19

Operation panel........................................................................19

Accessories.............................................................. 20

Included accessories .................................................................20

Accessories that are included in some countries or regions ......21

Optional Accessories............................................... 22

Setting Up the Machine........................................... 24

Setup and transporting precautions ..........................................24

Setup location ...........................................................................25

Setting up the machine .............................................................26

Remove the fixing plates ...........................................................27

Adjusting the operation panel position .....................................27

Preparing the thread guide assembly ........................................28

Preparing the spool stand..........................................................29

Attaching the embroidery frame holder ....................................30

The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before

using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.

Front view

1 Thread tension knobs

Adjust the tension of the thread.

2 Needle bar case

Moves to the left and right to move the needle to the

embroidering position.

3 Lower thread guide

4 Carriage

Attach the embroidery frame to the carriage. When the

machine is turned on or when the machine is embroidering, the

carriage moves forward, backward, left and right.

5 Hook cover/Hook

Open the hook cover, and then insert the bobbin case into the

hook.

6 Thread guide A

7 Thread guide B

8 Thread guide C

9 Thread guide D

0 Spool stand

Put 10 thread spools to embroider.

A Operation panel

B Built-in camera

C Embroidery frame holder

D Sewing light

The brightness of the sewing light can be adjusted in the

settings screen.

E Table brackets

F Upper thread guide

G Thread guide pins

H Middle thread guide

I Feet

Use the feet to adjust the height of the legs.

Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions

GETTING READY

Right-side/rear view

1 Touch pen holder

Use the touch pen holder to hold the touch pen when not in

use.

2 SD card slot

Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in order to import/export

embroidery pattern data.

3 USB port for media

In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB

media directly into the USB port.

4 USB port for computer

In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the

machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port.

5 Handwheel

Rotate the handwheel to move the needle up and down. Be

sure to rotate the handwheel toward the LCD panel

(counterclockwise).

6 Power supply plug

Insert the plug on the power supply cord into the power supply

plug.

7 Main power switch

Use the main power switch to turn the machine ON (I) and OFF

(

{).

Do not turn the power on soon after turning the power off. It is

recommended that you wait 5 seconds before turning the

power back on.

8 Ventilation slots

Operation panel

1 Start/Stop button

Press the start/stop button to start or stop the machine. The

lighting status and color of the button changes depending on

the operation condition of the machine.

2 Thread trimming button

Press the thread trimming button to trim both the upper and

the bobbin threads.

3 Automatic needle-threading button

Press the automatic needle threading button to thread the

needle.

4 Speaker

5 LCD (touch panel)

Touch the keys that appear on the touch panel to select and

edit patterns and confirm various information.

Bottom

Lit in red : When the machine cannot start

sewing

Flashing in green : When the machine can start

sewing

Lit in green : While the machine is sewing

Flashing in orange : When the machine can cut the

thread

Off : When the machine is turned off

The accessories listed below are included with this machine. Make sure to use the accessories designed

for this machine.

Included accessories

After opening the box, check that the following accessories are included. If any item is missing or

damaged, contact your authorized Brother dealer.

Accessories

Part Name

Part Code

Accessory case

XC6482-051

Needle set × 2

XC6469-001

Prewound bobbin × 6

XC6368-051

Spool net × 10

S34455-000

Seam ripper

XF4967-001

Scissors

XF2052-001

Tweezers

XC6542-051

Touch pen

XA9940-051

Threader

XE8362-001

10.

Needle changing tool

XF0793-001

11.

Needle plate spacer

XC6499-151

12.

Spacer (on machine)

XF1978-001

13.

Phillips screwdriver

XC6543-051

14.

Standard screwdriver

X55468-051

15.

Allen screwdriver

XC5159-051

16.

Offset screwdriver

XC6545-051

17.

Disc-shaped screwdriver

XC1074-051

18.

Wrench 13 mm × 10 mm

XC6159-051

19.

Oiler

XZ0206-051

XG3677-001 (for Europe and Turkey)

20.

Cleaning brush

X59476-051

21.

Weight (L)

XC5974-151

22.

USB cord clamp × 2

XE8396-002

23.

Spool mat × 10

XC7134-051

24.

Spool cap × 10

130012-054

Part Name

Part Code

GETTING READY

Accessories that are included in

some countries or regions

25.

USB cable

XD1851-051

26. Embroidery frame (extra-large)

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

PRPH360 (Americas)

PRPH360:XE8421-001 (Other area)

27. Embroidery frame (large)

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) (5-1/8 inches (H)

× 7-1/8 inches (W))

PRH180 (Americas)

PRH180: XC6285-052 (Other area)

28. Embroidery frame (medium)

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

PRH100 (Americas)

PRH100: XC6286-052 (Other area)

29. Embroidery frame (small)

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W) (1-1/2 inches (H) ×

2-3/8 inches (W))

PRH60 (Americas)

PRH60: XC6287-052 (Other area)

30. Embroidery sheet (extra large)

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H)

× 14 inches (W))

XE7158-101

31. Embroidery sheet (large)

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) (5-1/8 inches (H)

× 7-1/8 inches (W))

XC5721-051

32. Embroidery sheet (medium)

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

XC5759-051

33. Embroidery sheet (small)

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W) (1-1/2 inches (H) ×

2-3/8 inches (W))

XC5761-051

34.

Embroidery positioning sticker sheets

SAEPS2 (Americas)

EPS2: XF0763-001 (Other area)

35.

Embroidery frame holder A

(with white corner cover)

XE7374-001

36.

Embroidery frame holder B

(with light gray corner cover)

XE7376-001

37.

Operation Manual

This manual

38.

Quick reference guide

XG5986-001

Part Name

Part Code

39.

Embroidery Design Guide

XG5991-001

40.

Table

PRWT1 (Americas)

PRWT1: XE8417-101 (Other area)

41.

Power cord

Visit your authorized Brother dealer.

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the included power cord for this

machine. Using any other power cord may

result in damage.

Memo

• The included touch pen can be stored in the

touch pen holder on the back of the

operation panel. Refer to page 19.

Part Name

Part Code

Scan frame

XG5300-001 (Americas)

Magnet × 6

XF9325-001 (Americas)

Needle Spacer (additional)

XC6499-151 (Americas)

Scan frame set

Embroidery Design Guide

XG5993-001

Bobbin winder set

(Refer to page 279.)

PRBW1

Part Name

Part Code

PRSCANFKIT1(Europe)

The following are available as optional accessories to be purchased separately.

Optional Accessories

Part Name

Part Code

Wide cap frame set (Refer to

page 262.)

PRPCF1 (Americas)

PRPCF1:

XE8408-201 (Other area)

2. Wide cap frame

60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

PRPCFH4 (Americas)

PRPCFH4:

XE8424-001 (Other area)

Advanced cap frame 2 set

PRCF3 (Americas)

PRCF3:

XE2158-201 (Other area)

4. Advanced cap frame 2

60 mm (H) × 130 mm (W) (2-3/8

inches (H) × 5-1/8 inches (W))

PRCFH3 (Americas)

PRCFH3:

XE2162-001 (Other area)

5. Advanced cap frame

50 mm (H) × 130 mm (W) (2 inches

(H) × 5-1/8 inches (W))

PRCFH2 (Americas)

PRCFH2:

XC7610-052 (Other area)

Mounting jig

PRCFJ2 (Americas)

PRCFJ2:

XC7611-052 (Other area)

Cylinder frame set

PRCL1 (Americas)

PRCL1:

XE2166-001 (Other area)

8. Cylinder frame

80 mm (H) × 90 mm (W) (3 inches

(H) × 3-1/2 inches (W))

PRCLH1 (Americas)

PRCLH1:

XE2170-001 (Other area)

9. Quilt frame

200 mm × 200 mm

(7-7/8 inches × 7-7/8 inches)

PRPQF200 (Americas)

PRPQF200:

XE8411-001 (Other area)

10. Border frame

100 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))

PRPBF1 (Americas)

PRPBF1:

XE8414-001 (Other area)

11. Jumbo frame

360 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(14 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

PRPJF360 (Americas)

PRPJF360:

XE8405-301 (Other area)

12.

Round frame set

PRPRFK1 (Americas)

PRPRFK1:

XE8402-001 (Other area)

13.

Round frame

(∅100 mm (4 inches))

PRPRF100 (Americas)

PRPRF100:

XE8427-001 (Other area)

14.

Round frame

(∅130 mm (5 inches))

PRPRF130 (Americas)

PRPRF130:

XE8430-001 (Other area)

15.

Round frame

(∅160 mm) (6 inches))

PRPRF160 (Americas)

PRPRF160:

XE8433-001 (Other area)

16.

Embroidery frame holder C (with

dark gray corner covers)

PRPARMC (Americas)

PRPARMC:

XE8436-001 (Other area)

17. Flat frame

200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches

(W))

PRF300 (Americas)

PRF300:

XE2086-001 (Other area)

18. Embroidery frame (extra-large) 200

mm (H) × 300 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches

(H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))

PRH300 (Americas)

PRH300:

XC6284-052 (Other area)

19. Clamp frame S straight set

24 mm (H) × 45 mm (W)

(7/8 inch (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

PRCLP45B (Americas)

PRCLP45B: XF2251-001 (Europe)

PRCLP45B: XF2252-001 (Other area)

Part Name

Part Code

GETTING READY

20. Clamp frames S L & R

24 mm (H) × 45 mm (W)

(7/8 inch (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

PRCLP45LR (Americas)

PRCLP45LR: XF2255-001 (Europe)

PRCLP45LR: XF2256-001 (Other area)

21. Clamp frame S straight

24 mm (H) × 45 mm (W)

(7/8 inch (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

PRCLP45S (Americas)

PRCLP45S: XF2269-001 (Europe)

PRCLP45S: XF2268-001 (Other area)

22. Clamp frames S L & R set

24 mm (H) × 45 mm (W)

(7/8 inch (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

PRCLP45LRD (Americas)

PRCLP45LRD: XF2270-001 (Europe)

PRCLP45LRD: XF2272-001 (Other area)

23. Clamp frame M set

100mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

PRCLPM1 (Americas)

PRCLP100B: 115D02E000B (Europe)

PRCLPM1AP: 115D02E700B (Other area)

24. Compact frame set

70: 41 mm (H) × 70 mm (W)

(1-5/8 inches (H) × 2-3/4 inches (W))

50: 50 mm (H) × 50 mm (W)

(2 inches (H) × 2 inches (W))

44: 38 mm (H) × 44 mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

Portrait orientation:

33 mm (H) × 75 mm (W)

(1-5/16 inches (H) × 2-15/16 inches

(W))

PRHCK1 (Americas)

PRSFK1: 115D02E000A (Europe)

PRHCK1AP: 115D02E700A (Other area)

25. Sleeve frame

200 mm (H) × 70 mm (W) (7-7/8

inches (H) × 2-3/4 inches (W))

PRHSL200 (Americas)

PRHSL200: 115D02E000C (Europe)

PRHSL200AP: 115D02E700C (Other area)

26.

Embroidery Stand

PRNSTD2 (Americas)

VRPRNSTD: 115Z05E0005 (Europe)

VRPRNSTD: 115Z05E7005 (Other area)

27.

Metal bobbin

100376-051

28.

Weight (S)

XC6631-051

Part Name

Part Code

29.

USB mouse

XE5334-101

30.

Embroidery positioning sticker sheets

SAEPS2 (Americas)

EPS2:XF0763-001 (Other area)

Note

• Visit your nearest authorized Brother dealer

for a complete listing of optional

accessories and embroidery cards available

for your machine.

Memo

• Always use accessories recommended for

this machine.

• All specifications are correct at the time of

printing. Please be aware that some

specifications may change without notice.

Part Name

Part Code

The procedures for setting up the machine are described below. If the machine is not set up correctly, it

may shake or produce loud noises and the embroidery will not be sewn correctly. An optional

embroidery stand is also available.

Setup and transporting precautions

Setting Up the Machine

CAUTION

• The temperature of the operating environment should be between 5 °C (40 °F) and 40 °C

(104 °F). If the machine is operated in an environment that is either too cold or too hot, the machine may

malfunction.

• Do not use the machine in a location where it will be exposed to direct sunlight, otherwise the machine

may malfunction.

• Set up the machine with it’s four adjustable feet completely in contact with the desk or table, so that the

machine is level.

• Do not put anything under the embroidery machine that could block the ventilation slots found on the

rear underside of the machine, in order to avoid the possibility of the machine’s motor overheating,

resulting in a fire or in damage to the machine.

• The machine weight is approximately 42.5 kg (94 lb). The transporting or setting up of the embroidery

machine should be performed by two people.

• When transporting the machine, be sure to have two people lift the machine from the bottom at the

indicated slots (1). Lifting the machine from any other area may damage the machine or result in the

machine falling, which could cause injuries.

• When lightning occurs, turn off the machine and unplug the power supply cord. Lightning may cause the

machine to malfunction.

• Do not plug in the power supply cord until setup of the machine is completed, otherwise injuries may

result if the start/stop button is accidentally pressed and the machine starts sewing.

• When lubricating the machine, wear protective eyeglasses and gloves to prevent the oil or grease from

getting into your eyes or on your skin. Do not put the oil or grease into your mouth. Keep the oil and

grease out of the reach of children.

• While attaching or detaching an embroidery frame or other included accessory or while maintaining the

machine, be careful not to hit the machine with your body or any other part of it.

GETTING READY

Setup location

Set up the machine in a location that meets the following requirements.

• Position the machine a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) away from the wall

• Allow sufficient space around the machine

• Place no objects within the moving range of the embroidery frame

• Set-up machine near an electrical outlet

• Use a level and stable surface, such as a desk or stand.

• Use a surface that can support the weight of the machine (about 42.5 kg (94 lb))

• Allow open space around the ventilation slots found on the rear underside of the machine

785 mm

(31 inches)

Minimum of

50 mm

(2 inches)

589 mm

(23-1/4 inches)

More than

350 mm

(13-3/4 inches)

More than

210 mm

(8-1/4 inches)

560 mm

(22 inches)

More than

220 mm

(8-3/4 inches)

CAUTION

• In order to prevent malfunctions or damage, do not set up the machine in a location exposed to the

following conditions.

Liquids, such as water Extreme dust

Direct sunlight

Insufficient space Blocked ventilation slots

Objects within the moving range of the

embroidery frame An unstable surface

Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures. The operating environment

should be between

5 °C (40 °F) and 40 °C (104°F).

Connection to extension cords or

multiple adapters

Note

• For your safety: Since the machine weighs approximately 42.5 kg (94 lb), do not set it up on an

unstable table or desk.

Setting up the machine

When setting up the machine, adjust the legs so

that the machine is steady.

Make sure that all packing tape affixed to

the machine is peeled off and that all

packing material is removed.

Set up the machine while making sure that

there is sufficient space around it.

Adjust the legs so that the machine is

steady.

Use the included wrench to loosen the lock nut on the

leg that you wish to adjust.

1 Lock nut

2 Adjustable foot nut

→ The foot can be turned.

Use the included wrench to turn the

adjustable foot nut on the foot.

Turning the nut in direction 1 lengthens the leg;

turning the nut in direction 2 shortens the leg.

1 Adjustable foot nut

• Adjust all four legs so that they securely contact the

desk or table, and the machine is level.

After adjusting the legs to the desired

length, use the included wrench to tighten

the nuts.

1 Lock nut

Press down on each corner of the

embroidery machine to check that it is

stable.

If it is still unstable, perform steps c through e

again to adjust the legs.

Minimum of

50 mm

(2 inches)

589 mm

(23-1/4 inches)

More than

350 mm

(13-3/4 inches)

More than

210 mm

(8-1/4 inches)

560 mm

(22 inches)

More than

220 mm

(8-3/4 inches)

GETTING READY

Remove the fixing plates

Using the included Phillips screwdriver,

remove each of screws on the fixing plates.

1 Screws

2 Fixing plates

Adjusting the operation panel

position

Adjust the orientation and angle of the operation

panel so it can easily be operated.

Loosen 2 thumb screws to bring the

operation panel forward.

1 Thumb screws

Adjust the operation panel to an easy-to-

operate position, and then tighten the

thumb screws.

Adjust the orientation of the operation

panel.

Loosen the thumb screw, adjust the operation panel to

an easy-to-view orientation, and then tighten the

thumb screw.

1 Thumb screw

CAUTION

• Remove the fixing plates before turning on the

machine, otherwise the machine may

malfunction.

Memo

• After removing the fixing plates, be sure to

keep them to be used again. Before

transporting the machine, consult your

authorized Brother dealer.

Adjust the angle of the operation panel.

Loosen the 2 thumb screws behind the operation

panel, adjust the operation panel to an easy-to-view

angle, and then tighten the thumb screws.

1 Thumb screws

Preparing the thread guide

assembly

Raise the thread guide assembly.

Loosen the two thumb screws on top of the

thread guide assembly support.

1 Turn the screw counterclockwise three or four

times to loosen it.

Grab the grips on the thread guide assembly

support and push toward the middle.

(Side view) (Top view)

Note

• Using the disc-shaped screwdriver

included, loosen and firmly tighten the five

thumb screws.

CAUTION

• When setting up the thread guide assembly, set

it up with the needle bar 6 position selected,

otherwise the machine may malfunction.

(Refer to “Moving and threading a selected

needle bar” on page 62 for moving the needle

bar.)

GETTING READY

After the thread guide assembly support is

extended and the thread guide assembly is

raised to its highest position, tighten the

two thumb screws to secure the thread

guide assembly in place.

1 Thread guide assembly

2 Tighten screw.

3 Thread guide assembly support

Preparing the spool stand

Secure the spool stand in place for embroidering.

Use the included disc-shaped screwdriver.

Loosen the thumb screw two or three turns,

and then fold out the spool stand.

Rear view

1 Thumb screw

2 Spool stand

After the spool stand is fully opened up,

tighten the thumb screw.

Rear view

→ Secure the spool stand in the opened position.

Note

• If the thumb screws are not loosened

enough, it may not be easy to move the

thread guide assembly support. Do not

apply extreme force when moving the

thread guide assembly support. Be sure

that the thumb screws are loosened well

enough before moving the part.

• Be sure to tighten each thumb screw well

enough that the thread guide assembly

support is secured.

Attaching the embroidery frame

holder

Attach the embroidery frame holder to the

carriage.

Use the embroidery frame holder

appropriate for the embroidery frame that

you are using. (Refer to page 88 to 91.)

Remove the two thumb screws of the

embroidery frame holder.

1 Thumb screws

2 Corner covers

Align the holes in the embroidery frame

holder with the pins on the frame-mounting

plate of the carriage.

1 Pins on the frame-mounting plate

2 Corner covers

3 Holes in the embroidery frame holder

Secure the embroidery frame holder with

the two thumb screws removed in step

b .

1 Thumb screws

This completes the preparation of the machine.

Note

• Each embroidery frame holder has different

color of corner cover.

Holder A: White corner covers

Holder B: Light gray corner covers

Holder C: Dark gray corner covers

(Optional)

Note

• Using the disc-shaped screwdriver

included, firmly tighten the thumb screws.

• Two types of embroidery frame holders are

included with this machine. Embroidery

frame holder A is used with the four

included embroidery frames. (Refer to

“Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames”

on page 88 for the details.)

Chapter 2

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

This chapter describes the basic embroidering operations in order—from turning on the

machine and sewing a pattern to finishing sewing. Follow the steps of the tutorial to embroider a

pattern and master the operation of this embroidery machine.

Operating Precautions............................................. 32

Power supply precautions .........................................................32

Needle precautions ...................................................................33

Checking the needle..................................................................33

Bobbin precautions ...................................................................33

Upper thread recommendations ...............................................34

Fabric recommendations...........................................................34

Display recommendations.........................................................34

Basic Procedures ..................................................... 35

1. Installing the Bobbin ........................................... 36

Removing the bobbin case ........................................................36

Installing the bobbin .................................................................36

Installing the bobbin case .........................................................37

2. Turning ON the Machine .................................... 38

Setting your machine for the first time......................................39

Understanding the screens........................................................40

Screen overview........................................................................41

3. Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ......................... 43

Selecting an embroidery pattern ...............................................44

4. Editing the Embroidery Pattern............................ 45

5. Previewing the Image.......................................... 46

Checking a preview image ........................................................46

6. Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame...... 48

Hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame.............................48

Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine

.... 50

Attaching the embroidery frame ...............................................50

Continuing to the embroidering settings screen ........................52

8. Specifying Embroidering Setting.......................... 53

9. Checking the Embroidery Area............................ 54

Temporarily stopping to check the area....................................54

Continuing to the embroidering screen.....................................54

10. Upper Threading ............................................... 55

Checking the needle bars and thread colors .............................55

Upper threading........................................................................57

Threading the needle ................................................................61

11. Sewing the Embroidery...................................... 64

Starting embroidering ...............................................................64

Stopping embroidering..............................................................66

12. Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric..... 68

Removing the embroidery frame...............................................68

Removing the fabric ..................................................................68

13. Turning OFF the Machine ..................................69

Screen Quick Reference Guide ................................70

Key displays.............................................................................. 70

Understanding the pattern type selection screen ..................... 71

Understanding the pattern list screen....................................... 72

Understanding the pattern editing screen ................................ 73

Understanding the embroidering settings screen...................... 75

Understanding the embroidering screen .................................. 78

When You Have a Question, This May Help You.....80

Technical terms:....................................................................... 80

Patterns: ................................................................................... 80

Embroidering:........................................................................... 80

Useful external connection functions....................................... 81

USB mouse operation............................................................... 83

The necessary points to ensure the correct operation of this machine are described below.

Power supply precautions

Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the power supply.

Operating Precautions

WARNING

• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,

electric shock, or damage to the machine.

• Make sure that the plugs on the power supply cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the

power supply cord receptacle on the machine. Otherwise, a fire or electrical shock may result.

• Do not insert the plug on the power supply cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.

• If any of the following occur, turn off the embroidery machine and unplug the power supply cord,

otherwise a fire, an electric shock or damage to the machine may result.

• When you are away from the machine.

• After using the machine.

• If a power outage occurs while the machine is being operated.

• If the machine is not operating properly, for example, when there is a loose or cut connection.

• During electrical storms.

CAUTION

• Use only the power supply cord included with this machine.

• Do not plug this machine in with extension cords or multi-plug adapters with any other appliances

plugged into them, otherwise a fire or an electric shock may result.

• Do not plug in or unplug the power supply cord with wet hands, otherwise an electric shock may result.

• When unplugging the power supply cord, be sure to first turn off the machine, and then grasp the plug

when unplugging the cord. Pulling on the cord may damage it or result in a fire or an electric shock.

• Do not allow the power supply cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or

bundled. In addition, do not place heavy objects on the cord or expose it to heat, otherwise damage to the

cord, fire or an electric shock may result. If the power supply cord or its plug is damaged, stop using the

machine, and then take the machine to your authorized Brother dealer for repairs before continuing use.

• If the machine is not to be used for a long period of time, unplug the power supply cord, otherwise a fire

may result.

• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or

the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.

• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.

•For U.S.A only

This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical shock,

this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.

If the plug does not fit fully in the electrical outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a

qualified electrician to install the proper electrical outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Needle precautions

Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the correct choice of needle for your machine.

Checking the needle

Sewing with a bent needle is extremely dangerous since the needle may break while the machine is

operating.

Place the flat side of the needle on a flat surface and check that the distance between the needle and the

flat surface is even. If the needle is bent or the tip of the needle is broken, replace the needle with a new

one. (Refer to “Changing the Needle” on page 86.)

Bobbin precautions

Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the bobbin.

CAUTION

• Your machine is designed to use household embroidery needles. The factory recommended needle is “HAX

130 EBBR” (Organ). Schmetz needles 130/705 H-E may be used as a substitute. Use of any other needles

may break the needle or thread or damage the needle-threading mechanism or result in injuries.

• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.

■ Good needle ■ Bad needle

If the distance between the needle

and the flat surface is not even, the

needle is bent. Do not use a bent

needle.

1 Flat side

2 Needle type marking

3 Flat surface

CAUTION

• Only use prewound bobbin (COATS “L” type/TRU-SEW POLYESTER

“Filaments”) or bobbins designed specifically for this machine. Use of any other

bobbin may result in injuries or damage to the machine.

• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly wound, otherwise the needle may

break or the thread tension will be incorrect.

• When winding a bobbin, only use optional bobbin winder (refer to page 279) and metal bobbins (Part

code: 100376-053).

• When winding the bobbin, be sure to use cotton or spun polyester bobbin thread (between 74 dtex/2 and

100 dtex/2).

COATS

Polyester

Upper thread recommendations

Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the upper thread.

Fabric recommendations

Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the fabric.

Display recommendations

Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the use of the operation panel display.

Note

• It is recommended that rayon or polyester embroidery thread be used (120 den x 2 / 135 dtex x 2 / 40

weight (in Americas and Europe) / #50 (in Japan)).

Note

• Your machine can embroider fabric that is up to 2 mm (5/64 inch) thick. If thicker fabric is sewn, the

needle may bend or break.

• When embroidering overlapping stitches, it is difficult for the needle to penetrate the fabric, possibly

resulting in the needle bending or breaking.

• Attach stabilizers to thin or stretch fabrics. (Refer to “Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric”

on page 92 for information.)

• When embroidering large pieces of fabric, make sure that the fabric is not caught in the carriage.

Note

• Only touch the display with your finger or included touch pen. Do not use a mechanical pencil,

screwdriver or any other hard or sharp object. In addition, do not apply extreme pressure to the

display screen, otherwise damage to the display screen may result.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Basic embroidering procedures are described below.

Check the overall procedure below, before operating the embroidery machine.

The operations to embroider the pattern are described on the following pages.

Although embroidering can continue without the pattern being edited or embroidering settings being

specified, refer to page 174 for details on editing the patterns, and refer to page 127 for details on

specifying embroidering settings.

Descriptions of the keys and other information that appear in the main LCD screens are provided in the

tables on pages 70 to 79. Use these tables for quick reference.

The various operating precautions that must be observed during the basic procedures are provided on

pages 32 to 34. These precautions must be strictly observed in order for the machine to function properly.

Make sure to read these precautions.

Basic Procedures

Step

Operation

Tutorial

Reference

Page

Operating

Precaution

Reference

Page

1 Install the bobbin. p. 36 p.33

2 Turn on the machine. p. 38 p.32

3 Select an embroidery pattern. p. 43

4 Edit the embroidery pattern. p. 45

5 Check the previewed image. p. 46

6 Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame. p. 48 p. 34

7 Attach the embroidery frame to the machine. p. 50

8 Specify the embroidering settings. p. 53

9 Check the embroidery area. p. 54

10 Thread the upper threads. p. 55 p.34

Unlock the machine, then press the start/stop button to start

embroidering.

(Once embroidering is completed, the machine automatically

stops.)

p. 64

Remove the embroidery frame, and then remove the fabric from

the frame.

p. 68

13 Turn off the machine. p. 69

When the machine is purchased, only the bobbin case is installed in the hook. Insert a bobbin wound

with bobbin thread for embroidering. For precautions concerning the bobbin, refer to page 33.

Removing the bobbin case

Open the hook cover.

Pull the hook cover toward you.

Pull the thread picker toward you if it was

not pulled toward the front.

1 Thread Picker

To gain access to the bobbin case easily, pull the

thread picker toward front.

Grab the bobbin case latch, and remove the

bobbin case.

1 Latch

■ Oiling the machine

After removing the bobbin case, apply oil to the

machine. The race should be oiled. For details on

oiling the machine, refer to “Oiling the machine”

on page 288.

Installing the bobbin

Insert the bobbin into the bobbin case.

1. Installing the Bobbin

Note

• The machine does not indicate how much

bobbin thread is remaining. Before starting

to embroider make sure that there is

enough bobbin thread for the pattern.

• Make sure to clean the bobbin case every

time the bobbin is changed. For details on

cleaning the bobbin case, refer to “Cleaning

the bobbin case” on page 286.

Memo

• Thread picker is a device that is used to

hold the thread when beginning to sew or

when trimming the thread.

CAUTION

• The thread picker can only be moved within a

certain range. Do not pull it with extreme

force.

Note

• Put a drop of oil onto the hook once a day

before use.

Memo

• This embroidery machine is not equipped

with a bobbin-winder. Use pre-wound (L

type) bobbins.

• The optional bobbin winder (stand-alone

type) and optional metal bobbins can also

be used. (Refer to page 22, 279.)

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Pass the thread through the thread slit and

under the tension-adjusting spring.

1 Thread slit

2 Tension-adjusting spring

Pull the thread about 50 mm (2 inches)

through the opening in the tension-

adjusting spring.

1 About 50 mm (2 inches).

For adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread, refer

to “Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread” on

page 124.

Installing the bobbin case

Insert the bobbin case into the hook.

Insert the bobbin case while aligning the tab on the

bobbin case with the notch in the hook, as shown in

the illustration.

1 Tab

2 Notch

Fully insert the bobbin case until it snaps

into place.

Close the hook cover.

Note

• Check that the thread winds off the bobbin

clockwise as shown in the illustration. If the

bobbin is installed with the thread winding

off in the opposite direction, the embroidery

will not be sewn correctly.

Connect the power supply cord, and then turn on the embroidery machine. For precautions concerning

the power supply, refer to page 32.

Plug the power supply cord into the

machine.

Insert the plug of the power supply cord

into a household electrical outlet.

Switch on the main power switch on the

back of the machine to “I”.

→ The LCD screen comes on.

When the machine is turned on, the

opening movie is played. Touch anywhere

on the screen to display the message below.

Touch .

→ The pattern type selection screen appears, and the

start/stop button lights up in red.

The carriage moves to its initial position.

• If the number 1 needle bar is not already at the

embroidering position, the needle bar case moves

and the number 1 needle bar moves to the

embroidering position.

2. Turning ON the Machine

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the included power cord for this

machine. Using any other power cord may

result in damage.

CAUTION

• Make sure to keep your hands and other items

away from the carriage, in order to prevent

any injuries.

Memo

• If the machine is turned off in the middle of

embroidering, the machine will

automatically save the design position when

turned on again. At that time, you will be

asked if you wish to continue embroidering

or begin a new operation. (Refer to

“Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the

Machine” on page 122.)

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Setting your machine for the first

time

When you first turn on the machine, set the

language and time/date to your language and local

time/date. Follow the procedure below when the

settings screen appears automatically.

Touch or and to set your local

language.

Touch .

→ The carriage moves to its initial position.

The message screen, confirming if you want

to set time/date, appears. To set the time/

date, touch ; to cancel the setting,

touch .

→ The screen to set time/date appears.

1 Touch to display the time on the screen.

2 Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).

3 Select whether 24h or 12h setting to display.

4 Set the current time.

Touch to start using your machine.

Note

• The time/date you set may be cleared, if

you don't turn on the machine for an

extended period of time.

• Time setting is also available by pressing

on the bottom right of the LCD

screen.

Understanding the screens

When the machine is turned on and is touched, the pattern type selection screen appears. The

operations described below will be entered using the operation panel. For precautions concerning the use

of the touch panel, refer to page 34.

* The keys in the table above appear and can be used in most of the screens described later in this manual.

No. Display Key Name Function

Reference

Page

1 Home key

Touch this key to cancel all operations previously

performed and return to the initial pattern group

selection screen.

–

Pattern display

area

This area displays the selected pattern. p. 223

–

Embroidering

area line

Shows the available embroidering area for the attached

embroidery frame. The embroidery frame indications,

the grid lines and other display settings can be specified

from the machine settings screen.

p. 223

Machine

operations guide

key

Touch this key to check a machine operation. p.235

Needle bar/

Frame move key

Touch this key to move or thread a selected needle bar,

to position the carriage, or to oil the machine so the

embroidery frame can easily be removed or attached.

p.62, 88

6 Clock key Touch this key to set the clock to your local time. p.39

7 Settings key

Touch this key to change the embroidery machine

settings.

p. 220

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Screen overview

The basic operation flow is shown below.

In the pattern type selection screen, select a

pattern type. (Refer to page 43, 71.)

In the pattern list screen, select the pattern. (Refer

to page 43, 72.)

1 Touch this key to return to the pattern type

selection screen.

2 Touch this key to continue to the pattern editing

screen.

In the pattern editing screen, edit the pattern.

(Refer to page 45, 73.)

1 Touch this key to return to the pattern type

selection screen and add another pattern.

2 Touch this key to continue to the embroidering

settings screen.

In the embroidering settings screen, if it is a

combined pattern, edit the entire pattern, specify

the embroidering settings and check the

embroidery area. (Refer to page 53, 75.)

1 Touch this key to return to the pattern editing

screen.

2 Touch this key to continue to the embroidering

screen.

In the embroidering screen, check the thread

colors assigned to the needle bars, and then install

the upper threads. Touch to unlock the

machine so that the start/stop button starts flashing

in green. The embroidery machine is now ready to

begin sewing.

1 Touch this key to return to the embroidering

settings screen.

2 Unlock key

After the embroidery pattern is sewn, a “Finished

embroidering” message screen appears. Touch

to return to the embroidering settings

screen. (Refer to page 53, 75)

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

As an example, we will select the pattern shown at the right.

In the pattern type selection screen, select a

pattern category (type).

Pattern type selection screen (For details on the

keys and other information on the screen, refer to

page 71.)

1 Pattern type keys

2 Touch to retrieve the saved patterns.

In the pattern list screen, search for the desired

pattern, and then touch the key for the pattern.

Pattern list screen (For details on the keys and

other information on the screen, refer to page 72.)

1 Displays a preview image.

2 Pattern keys

■ Checking a preview image from the

pattern list screen

Touch to preview the image prior to selecting.

Touch to return to the pattern list screen.

3. Selecting an Embroidery Pattern

Selecting an embroidery pattern

Touch to select the embroidery

patterns category.

→ The embroidery pattern categories appear.

• Sub-category keys may appear for some pattern

categories. Touch the key for the sub-category

containing the desired pattern.

Select an embroidery pattern category.

Touch the desired pattern category.

→ The pattern list screen appears.

Touch the desired pattern.

In this case, touch .

After a pattern is selected, the following appear:

1 Vertical length of the pattern

2 Horizontal width of the pattern

3 Number of thread color changes

4 Thumbnail size selection key

The size of the pattern thumbnails can be set to

large, medium or small.

5 These keys can be used to change the pattern size

or to flip the pattern horizontally. The functions

may be used depending on the type of pattern that

is selected.

(Refer to “Flipping a pattern horizontally” on

page 177.)

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired pattern.

Touch to display the next screen.

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

From this screen, the pattern can be edited.

Pattern editing screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 73.)

1 Shows the size of the embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern display area. The top

value shows the height and the bottom value

shows the width. If the embroidery pattern

consists of multiple patterns that have been

combined, the size of the entire pattern, including

all patterns, is shown.

2 Highlights the sizes of embroidery frames that can

be used to sew the currently selected embroidery

pattern.

3 Shows the size of the currently selected

embroidery pattern.

The top value shows the height and the bottom

value shows the width.

4 Touch to edit the pattern.

5 Touch this key to delete the pattern, for example, if

the wrong pattern was selected. No pattern is

selected and the pattern type selection screen

appears.

6 Displays a preview image.

7 Scans the fabric to align the embroidery position.

8 Touch to change the size of the on screen

embroidery image presentation.

9 Shows the number of thread color changes for the

currently selected embroidery pattern

0 Continues to the next screen.

In this example, we will not edit the pattern.

Without performing any editing operations,

continue to confirm the pattern.

4. Editing the Embroidery Pattern

Memo

• If the embroidery frame holder is not

attached to the machine, the embroidering

area will not display the correct frame size.

(Refer to page 50.)

You can view an image of the completed pattern within the embroidery frame.

Checking a preview image

Display the preview image to check that the

embroidery will be sewn as desired.

Touch .

→ The preview image is displayed.

1 Touch to display the pattern enlarged. Touch

to display the pattern reduced.

Touch or to select the type of

embroidery frame holder, and then select

the embroidery frame you are going to use.

• After determining the type of embroidery frame

holder and size of embroidery frame that are best for

your embroidery, change the embroidery frame

holder and embroidery frame that are installed. The

machine will automatically detect the embroidery

frame holder and embroidery frame and change the

display.

5. Previewing the Image

Memo

• A preview image in a landscape orientation

cannot be rotated to a portrait orientation,

even if there is space at the top and bottom.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Touch to check the embroidering

order.

→ The stitch simulator screen appears.

1 Select the simulation speed. Touch , or

to change the speed. The speed can even be

changed while the simulation is running.

2 Operation keys

: Touch to start the simulation at the set

speed.

: Touch this key while the simulation is

running to pause it. Touch to continue the

simulation.

: Touch this key while the simulation is

running or paused to stop it and return to the

condition before it was started.

• Touch to return to the embroidery frame holder/

embroidery frame selection screen.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

1 2

Memo

• The embroidery can be sewn while the

preview image is displayed in the

embroidering screen. If the preview image is

displayed in any screen other than the

embroidering screen, the embroidery

cannot be sewn.

After selecting the pattern to be embroidered, check which embroidery frames can be used to sew the

pattern. Select the appropriate frame, and hoop the fabric and stabilizer in the embroidery frame.

(Refer to “Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric” on page 92.) For precautions concerning the

fabric, refer to page 34.

Hooping the fabric in the

embroidery frame

Select an embroidery frame.

From the sizes of embroidery frames indicated in the

screen, select the embroidery frame that you wish to

use.

Embroidery frames that can be used appear lighter

( ) embroidery frames that cannot be used appear

darker ( ).

■ Embroidery frame types

There are four sizes of embroidery frames included

with this machine, which are used with the included

embroidery frame holder A. For details on the uses

for each frame, refer to “Correctly Using the

Embroidery Frames” on page 88.

If you use any of the optional embroidery frames,

the following icons appear in the screen.

: Embroidery frame holder B

: Embroidery frame holder C

: Embroidery frame holder D

: Embroidery frame holder E

6. Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame

Note

• If the fabric is not taut, the pattern may be misaligned or the fabric may pucker. Follow the procedure

described below to firmly stretch the fabric in the embroidery frame so that the fabric is not loose. In

addition, be sure to work on a level surface when putting the fabric in the embroidery frame.

Memo

• If the embroidery frame holder is not

attached to the machine, the embroidering

area will not display the correct frame size.

(Refer to page 50.)

Icon Name

Embroidering area

Extra-large embroidery frame

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

Extra-large embroidery frame (optional)

200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))

Large embroidery frame

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)

(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))

Medium embroidery frame

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

Small embroidery frame

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))

CAUTION

• If embroidery frames other than the four

included frames or recommended optional

frames are used, the embroidery frame may hit

the presser foot and damage the machine, or

cause injury to the user. (See “Correctly Using

the Embroidery Frames” on page 88 for the

details about the embroidery frames.)

Note

• The embroidery frame indicators show all

embroidery frame sizes in which the

embroidery pattern can be sewn. Be sure to

use an embroidery frame of the most

suitable size. If the embroidery frame that is

too large is used, the pattern may be

misaligned or the fabric may pucker. (Refer

to “Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames”

on page 88.)

Icon Name

Embroidering area

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

■ Hooping fabric in the small

embroidery frame

The procedure for hooping fabric in the small

embroidery frame is described below.

The same procedure is used to hoop the fabric in the

medium embroidery frame.

For details on hooping fabric in the other included

embroidery frames, refer to “Hooping the Fabric” on

page 93.

Loosen the screw on the outer frame.

1 Screw

Place the fabric with the right side up on

top of the outer frame.

• The outer frame does not have a front or back side.

Either side can be used as the front.

• In order to prevent shrinkage of the stitching or

misaligned patterns, we recommend that iron-on

stabilizer (backing) be used for embroidering. (Refer

to “Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric”

on page 92.)

Press the inner frame into the outer frame.

• Be sure that there are no wrinkles in the fabric after it

is positioned in the embroidery frame.

Lightly tighten the screw, and then pull the

edges of the fabric.

Securely tighten the screw, and then check

to make sure that the fabric is taut.

• After securing the fabric, lightly tapping it should

produce a drum-like sound.

• Firmly clamp together the inner and outer frames so

that the bottom of the inner frame is lower than the

bottom of the outer frame.

1 Inner frame

2 Outer frame

3 Bottom of inner frame

• Using the included disc-shaped screwdriver, firmly

tighten the screw.

1 Disc-shaped screwdriver

The amount that the fabric is stretched and the use

of stabilizer material differ depending on the type

of fabric being embroidered. Try various methods

to achieve the best embroidering results. (Refer to

“Hooping techniques” on page 253.)

After hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame, attach the frame to the embroidery machine.

Embroidery frame holders A and B are included accessories with this machine.

Install embroidery frame holder A when an included embroidery frame is to be used. (See “Correctly

Using the Embroidery Frames” on page 88 for the details about the embroidery frame holders.)

Attaching the embroidery frame

Adjust the width of the embroidery frame holder to the size of the embroidery frame, and then attach the

embroidery frame to the machine. As an example, the procedure for attaching the small embroidery

frame is described below.

1 Left arm of embroidery frame holder

Move the arm of the embroidery frame holder to

the left or right to adjust it to the size of the

embroidery frame.

2 Clip on embroidery frame holder.

Insert the embroidery frame into the clips on the

embroidery frame holder.

3 Positioning pin

4 Holes

5 Positioning slots

Loosen the two thumb screws on the

embroidery frame holder.

If the screw is too tight, please use the included disc-

shaped screwdriver.

1 Left arm

2 Thumb screws

→ The left arm of the embroidery frame holder can be

moved.

• Only loosen the thumb screws a maximum of 2 turns

counterclockwise. Do not remove the screw.

7. Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine

CAUTION

• If the embroidery frame is not correctly attached it may hit the presser foot and damage the machine, or

cause injury to the user.

• When attaching the embroidery frame, make sure that the start/stop button is lit in red. If the start/stop

button is flashing in green, the embroidery machine may start sewing. If the embroidery machine

accidentally starts operating, injuries may result.

• When attaching the embroidery frame, make sure that the embroidery frame does not hit any other part of

the embroidery machine.

Note

• Before attaching the embroidery frame, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Move the left arm to align the screw on the

right side with the mark for the embroidery

frame to be installed, and then tighten the

thumb screws.

For this example, align with mark 5.

1 Mark for extra-large embroidery frame

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

2 Mark for extra-large embroidery frame

200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) (optional)

3 Mark for large embroidery frame

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)

(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))

4 Mark for medium embroidery frame

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

5 Mark for small embroidery frame

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))

→ The embroidery frame holder is ready for the

embroidery frame to be attached.

Hold the embroidery frame level, and then

simultaneously align both the left and right

mounts with the embroidery frame holder

clips.

• The inner frame should be on top.

Insert the embroidery frame until it snaps

into place.

1 Make sure that the pins on the left and right arms

of the embroidery frame holder fit into the

positioning slot and hole on the embroidery frame.

Note

• Please firmly tighten the two thumb screws

with included disc-shaped screwdriver. If

the thumbscrews are not tightened, any of

the following problems may occur.

• The machine will detect the embroidery frame

size incorrectly.

• The starting position for the embroidery frame

is misaligned.

• The embroidery pattern is misaligned.

Note

• Attach the embroidery frame to place the

needle plate under the embroidering area

otherwise the embroidery frame hits the

needle plate.

1 Needle plate

• If the outer frame is on top, as shown

below, the embroidery frame is incorrectly

attached.

Continuing to the embroidering

settings screen

Press .

→ The embroidering settings screen is displayed.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

From this screen, the entire pattern can be edited and embroidering settings can be specified. In addition,

the embroidering position can be checked and a pattern can be saved for later use.

Embroidering settings screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to

page 75.)

1 Shows the size of the pattern in the pattern display

area.

2 Displays a preview image.

3 The image on fabric hooped in an embroidery

frame can be scanned with the built-in camera and

displayed as a background for the pattern. After

being scanned, the background image can be

hidden, or the image can be saved on external

memory.

4 Image on the Design Page shows image size,

rotation, number of thread changes and measured

position of image within the embroidery area.

5 Touch for additional editing functions.

6 Returns to the pattern editing screen.

7 Touch to store the pattern in memory.

8 The embroidering area guide in the pattern display

area indicates the size of the embroidery frame

that is actually installed.

9 Touch to check the needle drop point on the LCD

screen using the camera function.

0 Touch these keys to specify how the pattern will

be embroidered.

A Continues to the next screen

B Touch to check the embroidering area.

In this example, we will not specify any of the

embroidering settings. Continue with the next

operation.

8. Specifying Embroidering Setting

Note

• Available keys are not the same if you set

“Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in the

settings screen. For details on the keys and

other information on the screen, refer to

page 77.

Memo

• If the embroidery frame is not positioned

correctly when continuing to the

embroidering settings screen, the

embroidery frame is moved to the correct

position at the same time that the

embroidering settings screen is displayed.

(Refer to “Moving to the correct position” on

page 97.)

Check the embroidery area to make sure that the embroidery will be sewn in the desired location and will

not be misaligned and that the embroidery frame will not hit the presser foot.

If the embroidery frame is not correctly positioned, it moves to the correct position, and then the

embroidering position is indicated.

Touch .

→ The presser foot is lowered and the embroidery

frame moves to show the embroidery area.

The corners of the octagon showing the

embroidery area for the pattern are

indicated by changing direction.

Carefully watch the movement of the embroidery

frame and check that the embroidery is sewn in the

desired location and that the embroidery frame does

not hit the presser foot.

Temporarily stopping to check

the area

The embroidery frame can be temporarily stopped

at a desired position or the checking of the

embroidering area can be stopped.

When the embroidery frame moves to the

desired position, touch

again.

→ The embroidery frame stops moving, and the next

screen appears.

1 Touch to continue moving the frame.

2 Touch to stop checking the embroidering area.

To continue moving the embroidery frame,

touch . To stop checking the

embroidering area, touch .

Continuing to the embroidering

screen

After finishing the necessary operations in the

embroidering settings screen, continue to the

embroidering screen.

Touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears.

9. Checking the Embroidery Area

Note

• If you are embroidering a large project such

as a jacket or curtains, using the flat, quilt or

jumbo frame, your embroidering may be

interrupted by the presser feet not in use

catching on the fabric outside of the design

area. Try to stitch the design as close to the

center of the embroidery frame, using

needle bars 3 through 7, keeping the head

of the machine as centered as possible.

(Refer to page 110 or 132 to select the

needle bar).

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Check the embroidering screen for information on which needle bars should be threaded with which

thread colors, and then thread the upper threads.

Checking the needle bars and thread colors

In the embroidering settings screen, touch to display the embroidering screen. Check the thread

colors in this screen.

Change thread spools message will appear if the thread spools from the previous embroidery project need

to be changed. If you set “Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in the settings screen, the message does not

appear even if the thread spools need to be changed. (Refer to “Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for

Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence)” on page 132.)

Embroidering screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 78.)

1 Thread information for the first to tenth needle

bars

2 If no thread color name is displayed, that needle

bar has not been used.

If a thread color had been assigned to the needle

bar on a previously sewn design, the needle bar

will show the previously assigned color.

3 Change thread spools message. (Refer to

page 114.)

This message appears when it is necessary for the

thread spools to be changed. If 4 is not

touched to close the message, embroidering

cannot continue.

5 Thread color

6 Needle bar number

7 Thread color name or number

If the thread color number (#123) is selected in the

settings screen (Refer to “Changing the thread

color information” on page 225), the thread brand

will also displayed.

Thread with the color name that appears beside

each needle bar number is threaded on that needle

bar. For the screen shown

If there is no name beside the needle bar number,

that needle bar is not used. For this example,

needle bar 10 is not used.

10. Upper Threading

Memo

• The thread information for the thread spool

to be changed appears framed in red. When

the automatic needle-threading button is

pressed, the frame disappears.

1: LIME GREEN 6: WISTERIA VIOLET

2: MOSS GREEN 7: VIOLET

3: CARMINE 8: WHITE

4: RED 9: HARVEST GOLD

5: MAGENTA

Touch .

→ The screen indicating that the spools be changed is closed.

• In addition to checking the thread colors, information such as the number of stitches and the sewing time can be checked

and various embroidering settings can be specified in the embroidering screen.

1 The embroidering progress is shown by the red

mark in the bar. Touch to display (in the

indicator) only the thread color being embroidered.

2 Shows the number of thread color changes, the

number of stitches, the embroidering time and the

length of time until the machine will stop.

3 Shows the thread colors, embroidering order and

number of the needle bar assigned to the thread

colors. A red triangle appears beside the thread

color being embroidered. In addition, the box

changes to gray when embroidering is finished.

4 Touch and to view the embroidering order

and needle bar number for thread colors that

cannot be seen in the screen.

5 Use these keys to return to the embroidering

settings screen.

6 When starting the machine or cutting the threads,

touch this button to unlock the machine, and then

press the start/stop button or thread trimming

button.

7 Touch a key to move the selected needle bar to

the sewing position. Use when threading the

needle with the automatic needle-threading

mechanism.

Note

• Available keys are not the same if you set

“Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in the

settings screen. (Refer to page 78 for details

on the keys and other information on the

screen.)

CAUTION

• When (unlock key) in the embroidering screen is touched, the start/stop button begins flashing in

green and the embroidery machine can start sewing. If the upper threading is being performed or the

needle is being threaded, be careful that the embroidery machine is not accidentally started, otherwise

injuries may result.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Upper threading

Use machine embroidery thread to thread the needle bars in order, starting with needle bar 1.

On the spool pin, place a spool with the

thread color specified for the corresponding

needle bar.

• Check that the spool stand has been completely

opened.

• When using small spools of thread, be sure to place

the included spool mat on the spool pin before

placing the spool on the pin.

• Place the thread in the center of the spool stand so

that the thread feeds off of the spool correctly and

does not get tangled around the spool pin directly

under the thread spool.

CAUTION

• When threading the upper thread, carefully follow the instructions. If the upper threading is not

performing correctly, the thread may break or become tangled, causing the needle to bend or break.

Note

• It is recommended that rayon or polyester

machine embroidery thread be used (120

den/2, 135 dtex/2, 40 weight (in Americas

and Europe), #50 (in Japan)).

Memo

• The path that the embroidery machine

should be threaded is indicated by a line on

the machine. Be sure to thread the machine

as indicated.

• Use spool cap on all spools of thread shorter than the

height of the spool pin.

1 Spool mat

2 Small spool

3 Spool cap

The numbers indicate the thread path for each of

the numbered needle bars. Be very careful to

correctly thread the needle bars.

Pass the thread of a specified color through

the holes on the thread guide, making sure

that you have the thread color matched to

the coordinating needle bar.

Pass the thread from spool pins 1, 3, 5, 6, 8

and 10 through the holes in both thread

guides A and B.

Pass the thread from spool pins 2, 4, 7 and 9

through the hole in thread guide B only.

1 Thread guide A (There are 6 holes in this thread

guide)

2 Thread guide B (There are 10 holes in this thread

guide)

Pass the thread through the hole (with the

corresponding needle bar number) in

thread guide C, then through the

corresponding hole in thread guide D.

As an example, the threading for spool pin 1

is shown.

1 Thread guide C

2 Thread tension lever

3 Holes in thread guide C

4 Thread guide D

Note

• Before threading, make sure to slide the

thread tension lever to the left so that the

holes in thread guide C are fully open.

• After all upper threading is finished, be sure

to slide the thread tension lever back to the

right. Embroidering with the holes in thread

guide C fully open may cause the thread to

become tangled or break.

1 Thread tension lever

2 Holes in thread guide C

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Pass the thread through the hole in the

number 1 upper thread guide and pull the

thread toward you.

1 Hole in upper thread guide

Hold the thread with both hands, and then

pass it under the guide plate from the right.

1 Upper thread guide plate

Wind the thread clockwise once around the

number 1 thread tension disc.

1 Thread tension disc

2 Pass thread in a clockwise direction at this

location on the tension disks.

• Make sure that the thread is securely positioned in the

thread tension.

Lead the thread along the thread path and

around the correct thread guide pins as

indicated on the machine, then slip the

thread under the number 1 middle thread

guide plate from the right.

1 Thread guide pin

2 Middle thread guide

• The path from the upper thread guide around the

thread tension disc and to the middle thread guide

(steps

f through g) may differs depending on the

spool number. Passing the thread through the thread

guide pins is designed to prevent the thread from

becoming tangled. Be sure to follow the thread path

indicated on the machine.

Note

• All thread tension discs are threaded in

clockwise direction.

Pass the thread along the number 1 slot to

pass it through the number 1 take-up lever

hole from right to left.

1 Thread take-up lever

Pass the thread down through the slot to the

lower thread guide, and then through the

hole in the number 1 lower thread guide.

1 Hole in lower thread guide

Use the included threader to pass the

thread into the number 1 needle bar thread

guide.

1 Needle bar thread guide

2 Threader

When all upper threading is complete, be

sure to slide the thread tension lever for

thread guide C to the right, closing the

holes in the thread guide.

1 Thread tension lever

2 Holes in thread guide C

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Threading the needle

Use the automatic needle-threading mechanism to

thread the needle.

Press the automatic needle-threading

button.

→ The hook on the automatic needle-threading

mechanism passes through the eye of the needle.

→ The spool thread indicator is turned off.

Pull out about 150 mm (6 inches) of thread.

Allow thread to relax and eliminate any

stress on the thread. Then, as shown in the

illustration, pass the thread under the fork

of the automatic needle-threading

mechanism from the right, and then catch

the thread with the hook that passes

through the eye of the needle.

1 Hook

2 Fork

Pass the thread under the guide on the

presser foot.

1 Guide on presser foot

2 Notch in guide on presser foot

• Make sure that the thread securely passes through the

notch in the guide on the presser foot.

Securely pass the thread through the groove

in the thread cutter, and then lightly pull

the thread to cut it.

1 Groove in thread cutter

CAUTION

• If the needle is not fully inserted, the hook of

the automatic needle-threading mechanism

will not pass through the eye of the needle

during automatic needle threading, and the

hook may bend or the needle cannot be

threaded.

• If the hook of the automatic needle-threading

mechanism is bent or damaged, contact your

authorized Brother dealer.

• While the hook of the automatic needle-

threading mechanism is passed through the

eye of the needle, do not rotate the

handwheel, otherwise the automatic needle-

threading mechanism may be damaged.

Note

• To avoid damage, the automatic needle-

threading mechanism may return to the

back position when you turn the handwheel.

• The automatic needle-threading mechanism

can thread one needle at the sewing

position. When this mechanism is used, be

sure that the needle bar that you want to

thread is positioned as the sewing position,

otherwise the automatic needle-threading

mechanism cannot be used at the particular

needle. If the needle bar is not at the sewing

position, move it there. (Refer to page 62.)

Note

• When catching the thread with the hook, be

careful that the thread does not become

loose.

Press the automatic needle-threading

button.

• The threader moves back away from the needle. The

thread is pulled through the needle eye.

• The wiper comes out and catches the thread between

the needle and the threader.

• The threader goes back to the original home position.

This completes the upper threading for needle bar 1.

Thread the remaining needle bars in the same way.

■ Moving and threading a selected

needle bar

You can move and thread a selected needle bar to

the embroidering position at any time.

Touch .

→ The needle bar move screen appears.

Touch the key for the needle bar that you

wish to move or thread.

→ The selected needle bar moves to the position of

embroidery.

Note

• If the thread is not correctly passed through

the groove in the thread cutter, the

message “Wiper error” appears and the

needle cannot be threaded. Be sure to

securely pass the thread through the

groove.

• If enough thread is not pulled out, the

thread cannot be pulled through the thread

cutter.

Note

• If the needle bar to be threaded is not

moved to the embroidering position, the

needle cannot be threaded with the

automatic needle-threading mechanism.

For the remaining needle bars, perform the

following operation to move the needle bar

to the embroidering position before trying to

thread the needle.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Press the automatic needle-threading

button while the needle bar move screen

appears.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

■ Moving the needle bar to be

threaded to the position of

embroidery

You can move the needle bar in the embroidering

screen.

Touch the key for the needle bar that you

wish to thread.

→ The selected needle bar moves to the embroidering

position.

■ Using the spool net

When using metallic thread or any other strong

thread, place the included spool net over the spool

before sewing.

If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match the

size of the spool before placing it over the spool.

It may be necessary to adjust thread tension when

using the spool net.

1 Spool net

2 Thread

Memo

• In the embroidering screen, a blue frame

appears around the thread information box

of the selected needle bar.

Note

• If the thread is not taut, it may come out of

the thread tension disc. After upper

threading is finished, check again to make

sure that the thread is correctly passed into

the thread tension disc. (Refer to step

f on

page 59.)

Memo

• When changing one of the upper thread

colors, it is easy to re-thread by cutting the

thread currently being used between the

spool and the thread guide above the spool.

Place the new spool on the spool pin and tie

the end of the new thread to the end of the

previous thread. Then pull the thread

through to the needle. (Refer to page 115.)

Now, the embroidery machine is ready to begin sewing.

When the machine starts sewing, the presser foot is automatically lowered, the necessary thread trimming

operations at the end of stitching are performed, the threads are changed as necessary while the

embroidery is sewn, and the machine stops when the end of the stitching is reached.

■ Locking mechanism

For safety reasons, this embroidery machine is equipped with a locking function.

Normally, the embroidery machine is locked (it cannot start sewing). Unless the machine is unlocked, it cannot

start sewing. If the embroidery machine is not started within 10 seconds after unlocking it, it automatically

returns to being locked.

The start/stop button shows whether or not the embroidery machine is locked. If the start/stop button lights up in

red, the machine is locked. If the start/stop button flashes in green, the machine is unlocked.

Starting embroidering

Touch to unlock the embroidery

machine.

→ The start/stop button begins flashing in green and

the embroidery machine can be started.

• If the start/stop button is not pressed within 10

seconds after unlocking the embroidery machine, the

machine becomes locked again.

11. Sewing the Embroidery

CAUTION

• For safety reasons, the embroidery machine must not be left unattended while it is sewing.

• While the machine is in operation, pay special attention to the needle location. In addition, keep your

hands away from all moving parts such as the needle, needle bar case, thread take-up lever and carriage,

otherwise injuries may result.

Note

• Make sure that there are no objects within

the moving area of the embroidery frame. If

the embroidery frame hits another object,

the pattern may become misaligned.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Press the start/stop button.

Press the start/stop button while it is flashing in green.

If the start/stop button returns to being lit in red,

perform this procedure again from step a.

→ The start/stop button lights up in green and begins

sewing the first color.

1 The thread color for the needle bar that is currently

being used for sewing or will soon be used for

sewing appears at the top of the thread color

sequence display. The remaining thread colors are

listed in the sewing order, starting from the top.

2 A blue frame appears around the thread

information box of the needle bar currently being

selected.

• While the embroidery machine is sewing, the point

being sewn is indicated by the green crosshairs in the

pattern display area. In addition, the number of

stitches and the time count up.

After sewing of the first color is finished,

the machine automatically stops and trims

the thread. The needle bar case moves to

the 2nd color position and sewing of the

2nd color begins.

→ The thread color display in the screen continues to

the second color, and the thread information for the

second needle bar is surrounded by the blue frame.

This continues until the last color is sewn,

and the embroidery machine automatically

stops.

→ The embroidering settings screen reappears.

→ The start/stop button lights up in red.

• No thread trimming operations at the beginning of

stitching and at the end of stitching are necessary.

■ Continuing embroidering

To sew the same pattern again, touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears so the same

pattern can be sewn again.

To select a new pattern, touch .

→ The pattern type selection screen appears.

Stopping embroidering

The machine can be stopped during sewing.

■ Temporarily pausing

Press the start/stop button.

→ The machine stops and the start/stop button lights up

in red.

• Embroidering can also be stopped by touching an

area displaying the pattern.

• The thread is not trimmed.

• To continue sewing, after checking that the upper

thread is taut, touch the unlock key, and then press

the start/stop button.

Note

• Automatic Lock stitching can be set so that

it is sewn at the beginning of the

embroidery, when starting to sew after

changing thread colors, and when trimming

the thread. (Refer to “Automatic Lock Stitch

Setting” on page 134.)

• The sewing speed can be changed, even

while the pattern is being sewn. (Refer to

“Maximum Sewing Speed Setting” on

page 139.)

Memo

• If the Reserve Stop key is touched while

embroidery is being sewn, the machine

stops sewing before the next color begins.

(Refer to “Stopping the machine at the next

color change” on page 140.)

• Before starting to sew, the machine can be

set to stop at any thread color change.

(Refer to “Specifying pause locations before

embroidering” on page 140.)

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

■ Resume sewing after the machine

was turned off

Press the start/stop button.

→ The embroidery machine stops and the start/stop

button lights up in red.

• The thread is not trimmed.

Touch to unlock the embroidery

machine.

Press the thread trimming button.

→ The bobbin and upper threads are trimmed.

• Before turning off the embroidery machine, be sure to

trim the threads.

Set the main power switch to “{”.

→ The embroidery machine is turned off and the

display and the start/stop button indicator go off.

• Sewing can resume after the embroidery machine is

turned on again. Back up several stitches to overlap

the stitching. (Refer to “Resume Embroidering After

Turning Off the Machine” on page 122 for details.)

■ If the thread breaks while sewing

If a problem occurs while sewing, such as if the

thread breaks, the machine stops automatically.

Re-thread the broken thread, back up several

stitches, and then continue sewing. (Refer to “If the

Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out

While Embroidering” on page 116 for details.)

Memo

• The machine can be stopped at any time,

even while it is embroidering; however, if

the machine is stopped when the thread

color is changed, it is not necessary to go

back through the stitching when

embroidering is continued. The machine

can be set to stop when the thread color is

changed. (For details, refer to “Specifying

pause locations before embroidering” on

page 140.)

After sewing is finished, remove the embroidery frame, and then remove the fabric from the frame.

Removing the embroidery frame

With both hands, grab the left and right

sides of the arms of the embroidery frame

holder, and then slightly lift up the frame.

The pins on the arms of the embroidery frame holder

should come out of the holes in the sides of

embroidery frame.

Pull off the embroidery frame toward you.

Removing the fabric

Loosen the outer frame screw.

→ If the screw was tightened using a disc-shaped

screwdriver, use the included disc-shaped

screwdriver to loosen it.

Remove the outer frame, and then remove

the fabric.

12. Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric

CAUTION

• When removing the embroidery frame, make

sure that the start/stop button is lit in red. If

the start/stop button is flashing in green, the

machine may start sewing. If the machine

accidentally starts operating, injuries may

result.

• When removing the embroidery frame, be

careful that the embroidery frame does not hit

any other part of the machine.

• Do not lift up the embroidery frame holder

with extreme force, otherwise it may be

damaged.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

After all embroidery is finished, turn off the machine.

Set the main power switch to “{”.

→ The embroidery machine is turned off and the

display and the start/stop button indicator goes off.

Unplug the power supply cord from the

electrical outlet.

Grasp the plug when unplugging the power supply

cord.

If necessary, unplug the power supply cord

from the machine.

Store the power supply cord in a safe place.

13. Turning OFF the Machine

Note

• If a power outage occurs while the

embroidery machine is being operated, turn

off the embroidery machine and unplug the

power supply cord. When restarting the

embroidery machine, follow the necessary

procedure to correctly operate the machine.

(Refer to “2. Turning ON the Machine” on

page 38.)

Memo

• If the machine is turned off while it is

sewing, embroidering can continue when

the machine is turned on again. (Refer to

“Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the

Machine” on page 122.)

Turned off while

embroidering

Turned on

After the opening movie

Descriptions of the keys and other information that appear in the screens are provided in the tables

below.

Key displays

The appearances of the keys have the following meanings.

Screen Quick Reference Guide

(Normal color display) : This key is not selected, but can be selected.

(Dark-colored display) : This key is selected.

(Gray display) : This key cannot be selected.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Understanding the pattern type selection screen

In this screen, select a pattern category (type).

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Built-in patterns

The embroidery pattern

for a design can be

selected.

p.151

Embroidery

pattern key

14 stitch types can be

combined with 10 frame

shapes, such as a circle

and a square.

p.152

Frame pattern

key

Uppercase and

lowercase letters,

numbers, symbols and

accented characters

from 37 fonts can be

selected in small,

medium and large sizes.

Japanese fonts can be

selected in large and

small sizes.

p.155

Alphabet key

Various character

patterns, such as floral

characters, appliqué

characters and so on,

can be selected.

p.158

Decorative

alphabet key

Monogram designs can

be created by

combining two or three

letters.

p.153

Monogram

and frame key

Recalls patterns from USB

media.

p.165

USB media

keys

By using the included USB

cable to connect a computer

to the embroidery machine,

patterns can be recalled from

the computer.

p.166

Computer

(USB) key

Recalls patterns from SD

cards.

p.165

SD card key

Recalls patterns stored in the

machine’s memory.

p.164

Embroidery

patterns

stored in the

machine

memory key

This key is not displayed

unless a pattern is selected.

Touch this key to quit trying

to add another pattern from

the pattern type selection

screen. Return to the pattern

editing screen.

p.174

Return key

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Understanding the pattern list screen

In this screen, select the pattern.

* Some patterns cannot be edited with 8, 9, A or

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Shows the size of the

embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern

display area. The top value

shows the height and the

bottom value shows the

width.

If the embroidery pattern

consists of multiple patterns

that have been combined,

the size of the entire pattern,

including all patterns, is

shown.

Size

Shows the size of the pattern

selected when its pattern key

is touched. The top value

shows the height and the

bottom value shows the

width.

Size

An image of the pattern

appears on the key. Touch

the image to select the

pattern.

Drag your finger up and

down in this area to scroll

through the pages.

p.150

Pattern keys

Touch to leave the currently

selected pattern category

and choose a different

category. Returns to the

pattern type selection screen.

p.150

Return key

Displays an image of the

pattern that is to be

embroidered so it can be

previewed.

p.46

Preview key

Shows the number of thread

colors for the currently

selected embroidery pattern.

Number of

thread colors

The character information of

an entered character pattern

can be checked here. Since

characters will be entered

after the red cursor, use

and to change the input

position.

p.158

Text preview

area

Allows the size of the

currently selected

embroidery pattern to be

changed.

p.156

Size key

Touch to select a left, center

or right alignment for a

paragraph of a multi-line

character pattern.

p.158

Text

alignment key

Touch after selecting the

pattern. The selection of the

pattern is confirmed and the

pattern editing screen

appears.

p.151

Set key

Touch this key to change the

configuration of a character

pattern.

p.158

Array key

The size of the pattern

thumbnails can be set to

large, medium or small.

p.151

Thumbnail

size selection

key

Touch this key to display the

previous page.

p.151

key

Touch this key to display the

next page.

p.151

Next page key

Flips the pattern being

selected horizontally.

p.177

Horizontal

mirror image

key

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Understanding the pattern editing screen

In the pattern editing screen, patterns can be individually edited. (The entire pattern cannot be edited

from this screen.) The pattern selected in the pattern display area can be repositioned, resized, rotated

and rearranged, and its color scheme can be changed. In addition, multiple patterns can be selected and

combined. Entered character patterns can also be edited in various ways.

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Shows the size of the

embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern

display area. The top value

shows the height and the

bottom value shows the

width. If the embroidery

pattern consists of multiple

patterns that have been

combined, the size of the

entire pattern, including all

patterns, is shown.

Pattern size

Shows the sizes of

embroidery frames that can

be used to sew the

embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern

display area.

p.48

Embroidery

frame

indicators

Shows the size of the pattern

being edited. The top value

shows the height and the

bottom value shows the

width.

Size

Deletes the pattern. If

touched, the pattern being

edited is deleted.

p.200

Delete key

Adds a pattern. If touched,

the pattern group selection

screen appears.

p.174

Add key

Displays an image of the

pattern so that it can be

previewed.

p.46

Preview key

Shows the vertical distance

that the pattern being edited

is moved.

p.176

Distance from

center

(vertical)

Shows the horizontal

distance that the pattern

being edited is moved.

p.176

Distance from

center

(horizontal)

Shows the rotation angle that

the pattern being edited is

rotated.

p.180

Rotation angle

Shows the total number of

thread colors for the pattern

that is being edited.

Number of

thread colors

Moves the sewing position of

the pattern that is being

edited in the direction of the

arrow. (If is touched, the

sewing position is moved to

the center of the

embroidering area.)

p.176

Positioning

keys

Selects the pattern that is

being edited when the

embroidery pattern consists

of multiple patterns that have

been combined.

p.175

Pattern

selection keys

Finish editing and continue

to the embroidering settings

screen.

p.52

Edit End key

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Scans the fabric to align the

embroidery position.

p.102

Fabric scan

key

Select from 100%, 125%,

150% or 200% to adjust

how the pattern being edited

is displayed.

p.174

Enlarge key

Rotates the pattern that is

being edited.

p.180

Rotate key

Changes the size of the

pattern that is being edited.

p.178

Size key

Changes the color of the

pattern.

p.185

Change

thread color

key

Makes and edits a repeating

pattern.

p.190

Border key

7 Duplicates the pattern. p.199

Duplicate key

Touch to change the pattern

being edited into an

appliqué pattern.

p.129

Embroidery

Appliqué key

Enables the thread color of

each character in an

alphabet pattern to be

changed; can only be used

when an alphabet is

selected.

p.184

Multi Color

key

Changes the orientation of

the characters in the

alphabet pattern that is being

edited.

p.181

Array key

Touch to change the font of

the character pattern being

edited.

p.184

Font Type key

Touch to change the size

and font of individual

characters in the character

pattern being edited.

p.184

Letter Edit key

Flips the pattern being edited

horizontally.

p.177

Horizontal

mirror image

key

Changes the density of the

pattern that is being edited;

can only be used if an

alphabet or frame pattern is

selected.

p.185

Density key

Touch to group the multiple

selected patterns.

p.176

Grouping key

Changes the spacing

between the characters in

the character pattern that is

being edited.

p.181

Spacing key

Automatically trim any

excess thread jumps within

the letters of alphabet

pattern.

p.183

Thread trim

setting key

Touch to select multiple

patterns.

p.175

Multiple

selection key

Touch to group the selected

character patterns.

p.183

Text

combining

key

Touch to ungroup the

selected character pattern.

p.182

Text dividing

key

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

Understanding the embroidering settings screen

From this screen, the entire pattern can be edited and embroidering settings can be specified. In addition,

the embroidering position can be checked and a pattern can be saved for later use. Keys available in this

screen differ when you set “Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in settings screen. (Refer to page 77 and

132.)

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Shows the size of the

embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern

display area. The top value

shows the height and the

bottom value shows the

width. If the embroidery

pattern consists of multiple

patterns that have been

combined, the size of the

entire pattern, including all

patterns, is shown.

Pattern size

Shows the sizes of

embroidery frames that can

be used to sew the

embroidery pattern currently

displayed in the pattern

display area.

p.48

Embroidery

frame

indicators

Shows the vertical distance

that the pattern being

combined/edited is moved.

p.98

Distance from

center

(vertical)

Shows the horizontal

distance that the pattern

being combined/edited is

moved.

p.98

Distance from

center

(horizontal)

Shows the rotation angle that

the pattern being edited is

rotated.

p.99,

201

Rotation angle

Touch to view (on the LCD)

the image below the needle

or display an image of the

edited embroidery pattern at

the actual embroidering

position.

p.105,

108

Camera view

key

Touch to display the image

(after touching the camera

view key) enlarged to double

the size.

This key is available even if

the camera view key was not

touched.

p.106

Camera zoom

key

Shows the total number of

thread colors for the pattern

that is being edited.

Number of

thread colors

changes

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Scans (with the built-in

camera) fabric hooped in an

embroidery frame and

displays it as a background

image for the pattern.

p.102

Fabric scan

key

Saves, onto USB media, the

background image scanned

in with the built-in camera.

p.103

Save

background

image key

Displays or hides the

background image scanned

in with the built-in camera.

p.103

Background

image display

key

Touch to set the machine to

pause before sewing the

specified color.

p.140

Pause key

Start pattern connecting

embroidering.

p.206

Pattern

connect key

When stabilizer material is

not affixed to the fabric, sew

basting stitches along the

outline of the pattern to

minimize shrinkage of the

stitching and misaligned

patterns.

p.128

Embroidery

basting key

Rotates the entire

embroidery pattern when it

consists of multiple patterns

that have been combined.

p.99,

201

Rotate key

Touch to align the

embroidering position using

the machine's built-in

camera.

p.108

Positioning

key

Specifies that the sewing

sequence for multiple

patterns that have been

combined be rearranged by

thread color.

p.190

Color sorting

key

Specifies that automatic lock

stitch is sewn when the

thread is trimmed.

p.134

Lock stitching

(end) key

Specifies that automatic lock

stitch is sewn at the

beginning of the pattern and

at the beginning of sewing

after thread trimming.

p.134

Lock stitching

(beginning)

key

Touch to return to the

pattern editing screen.

Edit key

Save a pattern in the

machine’s memory, USB

media or a computer.

p.160,

161

Memory key

Displays an image of the

pattern that is to be

embroidered so it can be

previewed.

p.46

Preview key

Moves the sewing position of

the whole pattern in the

direction of the arrow. (If

is touched, the sewing

position is moved to the

center of the embroidering

area.)

p.98

Positioning

keys

Selects the speed to move

the frame.

Touch to move the

frame by 0.1 mm.

Touch to move the

frame by 0.5 mm.

Keep touching to move

the frame at maximum

speed. When viewing the

camera image, the frame

moves by 2.0 mm.

p.98

Frame

movement

speed keys

Specifies the needle position

at the beginning of sewing

and at the end.

p.135

Starting/

ending

position key

Finish all operations in the

embroidering settings screen

and continues to the

embroidering screen.

p.54

Embroidery

key

Moves the embroidery frame

so that the embroidering

position can be checked.

p.54

Trial sewing

key

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

■ In the “Manual Color Sequence”

mode

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

This illustration appears

when the sewing machine is

in the “Manual Color

Sequence” mode.

p.132

Manual color

sequence

mode icon

Touch to change the needle

bar color setting.

This key appears when you

set “Manual Color

Sequence” to “ON” in

settings screen.

p.133

Manual color

sequence key

Understanding the embroidering screen

From this screen, the total number of thread colors and the sewing time can be checked, the needle bar

settings can be specified, and the needle placement forward or backward can be done. Keys available in

this screen differ when you set “Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in settings screen. (Refer to page 132.)

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

The bottom value shows the

total number of thread colors

in the pattern and the top

value shows the thread

colors that is currently being

sewn.

Sewing order

Shows the amount of time

until the machine will stop.

When the last thread spool is

being sewn, the number

appears in red.

If the thread color needs to

be changed, this shows the

time until the thread spool

will need to be changed.

p.113

Time until the

machine stops

Shows the part of the pattern

that will be sewn with the

thread color shown first in

the thread color sequence

display.

Region

display

Shows the order for the

thread color changes. During

embroidering, this display

scrolls automatically so that

the color of the thread

currently being sewn

appears at the top.

Thread color

sequence

display

This red line indicator shows

when the thread spools will

need to be changed. The

thread spools will need to be

changed at the point

between the two thread

colors where the indicator is

displayed.

p.113

Spool change

indicator

Indicates the needle bar

number where the thread

color at the left is assigned.

Needle bar

number

The bottom value shows the

total number of stitches in

the pattern and the top value

shows how many stitches

have already been sewn.

Stitch count

The bottom value shows the

total amount of time required

to sew the pattern and the

top value shows how much

time has already passed

sewing.

Sewing time

The thread color sequence

display shows the first seven

thread colors. To check the

sequence for the eighth and

later thread colors, touch

or , or touch the scroll

bar.

Scroll bar

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

The embroidering progress is

shown by the red mark in the

indicator. Touch to

display (in the indicator) only

the thread color being

embroidered.

Progress bar

While sewing embroidery,

touch this key for the

machine to stop prior to the

next color beginning.

p.140

Reserve Stop

key

Change the needle bar

settings from the screen

without changing the thread

spools on the machine.

p.110

Switch spool

key

(Not available

in the

“Manual

Color

Sequence”

mode)

Touch to sew the pattern in

the same color, regardless of

specified color changes. The

entire thread color sequence

display will appear in the

same color.

The progress bar

1 and

thread color setup display 7

will show the original colors.

p.142

Uninterrupted

embroidery

key/

Monochrome

Touch this key to quit sewing

and return to the

embroidering settings screen.

Return key

Unlocks the machine so it

can start sewing within 10

seconds. When this key is

touched, the start/stop button

flashes in green.

p.64

Unlock key

Touch a key to move the

needle bar position to the

selected needle bar number.

Use when threading the

needle with the automatic

needle-threading

mechanism.

Needle bar

key

Thread color

set up display

Shows the color and the

thread color name (number)

for the thread on the needle

bar indicated on the key.

Thread the machine as

indicated here.

p.55

Specifies the maximum

sewing speed.

p.139

Maximum

sewing speed

key

Moves the needle forward or

backward through the

stitching. Use this key in the

following situations:

• If the thread breaks or

runs out while

embroidering

• To restart sewing from

the beginning

• To continue sewing

after the machine was

turned off

p.116

Forward/

Backward

stitch key

Enables the needle bar

settings to manually be

specified.

p.142

Temporary

needle bar

settings key

Memo

• The thread color numbers in the thread

color sequence display and the thread color

set up display can be changed, for

example, to the color name or the thread

color number for other brands. (Refer to

“Changing the thread color information” on

page 225.)

No.

Display

Function Page

Key Name

Technical terms:

■ DST

This is the extension of Tajima data file (*.dst) that is

one of the data formats of embroidery patterns.

Tajima data does not contain color information,

therefore the embroidery machine automatically

assigns colors when a Tajima (.dst) file is loaded.

(Refer to page 250.)

■ Needle number

The needles are numbered from right to left. The far

right needle is number 1 needle. (Refer to page 7.)

■ Needle at the “embroidering

position”

This is the needle that is placed above the needle

hole in the needle plate. The needle bar case is

moved to position that particular needle with the

next thread color to the “embroidering position”.

Also when using the needle threader, the needle that

is going to be threaded should be moved to the

“position of embroidery”. (Refer to page 62 and

page 63.)

1 Needle hole in the needle plate

2 Needle

■ Wiper

This is the mechanism for pulling the thread. The

wiper pulls the thread when the needle threader is

used.

The wiper also pulls the thread from the material

when the machine trims the thread. This makes

trimming threads after embroidering un-necessary.

(Refer to page 62.)

Patterns:

Following patterns can be processed by the

machine to embroider.

- Use USB media or SD cards to transfer the

embroidery data with *.pen, *.pes, *.phc or *.dst

format to the machine.

Using the USB cable, the data can be transferred

from the PC to the machine.

- Optional embroidery cards

- Embroidery patterns created by digitizing software

program

- The patterns saved on USB media by the machine

Embroidering:

■ Customize the embroidery colors

- Use the thread color function by selecting either

64 colors or 300 colors, or by setting the custom

thread color table on the pattern editing screen.

For more details, see page 195 and page 197.

- Use the manual color sequence function in the

embroidering settings screen.

For more details, see page 132.

- Use the “Temporary needle bar setting” function

by selecting the key on the “Embroidering” screen.

More details please see the page 142.

■ Resume an unfinished pattern from

the last time the machine was

switched off.

- The machine remembers the pattern and the

position even after turning off the power. And the

machine can resume the embroidery when the

machine turns on again. (Refer to “Resume

Embroidering After Turning Off the Machine” on

page 122.)

When You Have a Question, This May Help You

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

■ Getting false thread breakage error

- Check that the position of the upper thread is

under the upper thread guide plates. (Refer to

page 57.)

- Check that the position of the upper thread is

around the thread tension disc. (Refer to page 59.)

- Check that no lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc. If it has, remove it. (Refer to

“Cleaning the thread paths of the upper threads”

on page 287.)

1 Upper thread guide plates

2 Thread tension disc

■ Thread tension changed suddenly

- Thread is caught on a rough edge of the spool of

upper thread.

- Upper thread is caught under the spool of thread.

- The thread dust or lint is gathered under the

bobbin’s tension spring.

- Check that no lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc. If it has, remove it. (Refer to

“Cleaning the thread paths of the upper threads”

on page 287.)

■ The embroidery frame becomes

separated from the carriage

Make sure that the positioning pins are placed into

the frame’s positioning slot and hole. (Refer to

page 50.)

To insure proper registration of pattern for

embroidery, turning off the machine and turning it

back on will allow the embroidery arm to reset it’s

registration points.

■ Unable to detach the frame from the

machine

Touch and to move the carriage, then

the frame will be detachable. (Refer to page 88.)

■ Cancel the current design and start

again

Select the “Home” key on the upper right of the

screen. The pattern and all information will be

deleted. (Refer to page 40.)

Useful external connection

functions

You can access various patterns by using the

machine’s USB port and SD card slot.

1 SD card slot

2 USB port for media (USB 2.0)

3 USB port for computer

■ Using SD cards

When using SD cards to import or export pattern

data, insert the card into the SD card slot.

1 SD card slot

2 SD card

Note

• Do not insert anything other than USB

media into the USB media port. Otherwise,

the USB media drive may be damaged.

■ Using USB media

When sending or reading patterns using the USB

media, connect the device to the USB port.

1 USB port for media

2 USB media

■ Connecting the machine to the

computer

Using the included USB cable, the sewing machine

can be connected to your computer.

1 USB port for computer

2 USB cable connector

■ Using a USB mouse

The USB mouse, connected to the sewing machine,

can be used to perform a variety of operations in the

screens.

Connect a USB mouse to the USB port marked with

. You can also connect a USB mouse to the other

USB port.

1 USB port marked with

2 USB mouse

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data.

• Do not insert anything other than USB

media into the USB media port. Otherwise,

the USB media drive may be damaged.

Memo

• USB media is widely used, however some

USB media may not be usable with this

machine. Please visit our website ( http://

support.brother.com ) for more details.

• Depending on the type of USB media being

used, either directly plug the USB device

into the machine's USB port or plug the

USB media Reader/Writer into the

machine's USB port.

Note

• The connectors on the USB cable can only

be inserted into a port in one direction. If it

is difficult to insert the connector, do not

insert it with force. Check the orientation of

the connector.

• For details on the position of the USB port

on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the

instruction manual for the corresponding

equipment.

• You can arrange the USB cable using the

included USB clamp. (Refer to “Connecting

the USB using the included USB cord

clamps” on page 163.)

Note

• Do not perform operations with the mouse

at the same time that you are touching the

screen with your finger or the included

touch pen.

• A USB mouse can be connected or

disconnected at any time.

• Only the left mouse button and its wheel

can be used to perform operations. No

other buttons can be used.

• The mouse pointer does not appear in the

screen saver.

EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL

USB mouse operation

■ Clicking a key

When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears

on the screen. Move the mouse to position the

pointer over the desired key, and then click the left

mouse button.

1 Pointer

■ Changing pages

Rotate the mouse wheel to switch through the tabs

of the pattern selection screens.

Memo

• Double-clicking has no effect.

Memo

• If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for

additional pages are displayed, rotate the

mouse wheel or click the left mouse button

with the pointer on / to display the

previous or next page.

■ Changing the size

Refer to “Changing the size of a pattern (Normal

resizing mode)” on page 178.

Touch .

Change the size of the pattern.

• Rotate the mouse wheel away from you to shrink the

pattern in the same way as when is touched.

• Rotate the mouse wheel toward you to enlarge the

pattern in the same way as when is touched.

■ Rotating the pattern

Refer to “Adjusting the angle” on page 99 and

“Rotating a pattern” on page 180.

Touch .

Rotate the pattern.

• Rotate the mouse wheel away from you to rotate the

pattern 10 degrees to the left in the same way as when

is touched.

• Rotate the mouse wheel toward you to rotate the

pattern 10 degrees to the right in the same way as

when is touched.

Chapter 3

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

This chapter provides explanations on operations other than those described in chapter 2, such

as sewing a pattern with eleven or more colors, changing the needles and changing thread

spools.

Changing the Needle............................................... 86

Replacing the needle.................................................................86

Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames.................. 88

Embroidery frame holders.........................................................88

When difficult to replace the embroidery frame .......................88

Types of embroidery frames/frame holders and their applications

....89

Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric .... 92

Hooping the Fabric.................................................. 93

Hooping the fabric in the extra-large and large embroidery frames

...93

Using the embroidery sheet ......................................................94

Large/small pieces of fabric ......................................................95

Embroidery Frame Position and Movement............. 96

Changing the Embroidering Position ....................... 98

Adjusting the angle ...................................................................99

Aligning the Embroidering Position ....................... 102

Displaying the fabric while aligning the embroidery position

...102

Using the built-in camera........................................................105

Using the included embroidery positioning sticker .................108

Switching the Thread Colors on the Screen........... 110

Embroidering a Pattern Containing Eleven or

More Colors .......................................................... 112

Checking if thread spool changes are necessary......................113

Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of

Eleven or More Colors........................................... 114

Change thread spools message and spool thread indicators ....114

Easily changing the thread spools............................................115

If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs

Out While Embroidering ....................................... 116

If the upper thread breaks.......................................................116

If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out...................................118

Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the

Pattern................................................................... 119

Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the Machine

... 122

Adjusting the Thread Tension of both the Bobbin

and Upper Thread ................................................. 124

Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread .............................124

Adjusting the tension of the upper thread ...............................125

If the needle is bent or the tip of the needle is broken, replace the needle with a new one. Use the

included Allen screw driver to replace the needle with one that is designed specifically for this machine

and that passes the test described in “Checking the needle” on page 33.

Replacing the needle

Turn off the embroidery machine.

Loosen the needle set screw and remove the

needle.

Hold the needle with your left hand, and then hold the

Allen screw driver in your right hand and turn the

needle set screw counterclockwise.

• Do not apply extreme force when loosening or

tightening the needle set screw, otherwise the

machine may be damaged.

With the flat side of the needle toward the

back of the machine, insert the needle all

the way up until it touches the needle bar

stopper.

Pass the needle through the hole in the presser foot,

and then use the needle changing tool to lift up the

needle.

1 Needle bar stopper

2 Needle

3 Flat side of needle

4 Needle changing tool

Changing the Needle

CAUTION

• Be sure to turn off the embroidery machine

before replacing the needle, otherwise injuries

may result if the machine starts sewing.

Note

• Be sure to use the included Allen screw

driver to replace the needle, otherwise too

much force may be applied to the needle,

causing it to break.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

Hold the needle changing tool and press the end of the

needle changing tool 1 in to extend the needle-

mounting clamp 2. Attach the clamp to the needle,

and then release the pressed area to clamp the needle.

To unclamp the needle, press 1 again.

1 End of the needle changing tool

2 Needle mounting clamp

While holding the needle in place with your

left hand, tighten the needle set screw.

Use the Allen screw driver to turn the needle set screw

clockwise.

CAUTION

• Be sure to insert the needle in the needle bar

chamber until it reaches the needle bar

stopper and securely tighten the needle set

screw with the Allen screw driver, otherwise

the needle may break or the machine may be

damaged.

• If the needle is not fully inserted, the hook of

the automatic needle-threading mechanism

will not pass through the eye of the needle

during automatic needle threading, and the

hook may bend or the needle cannot be

threaded.

• If the hook of the automatic needle-threading

mechanism is bent or damaged, contact your

authorized Brother dealer.

Various types of embroidery frames can be used with this machine to suit your project.

In addition to the four included embroidery frames, there are many frames that can be used with this

embroidery machine. (Refer to “Optional Accessories” on page 22.)

Embroidery frame holders

Two types of embroidery frame holders

(embroidery frame holder A and embroidery frame

holder B) are included with this machine.

Embroidery frame holder A is used with the four

included embroidery frames. Embroidery frame

holder B is used with the optional embroidery

frames. In addition, if you purchase optional round

frame set, clamp frame set or compact frame set,

specified frame holder C, D or E is included. For

details on which embroidery frame can be

installed on each embroidery frame holder, refer to

“Types of embroidery frames/frame holders and

their applications” on page 89.

1 Embroidery frame holder A

2 White corner covers

3 Embroidery frame holder B

4 Light gray corner covers

5 Magnet

6 Embroidery frame holder C (optional)

7 Dark gray corner covers

8 Embroidery frame holder D (optional)

9 Embroidery frame holder E (optional)

When difficult to replace the

embroidery frame

Depending on the position of the needle bars, it

may be difficult to replace the embroidery frame.

In that case, follow the procedure described below

to move the embroidery frame.

Touch .

→ The needle bar move screen appears.

Touch .

→ The carriage automatically moves to a position

where the embroidery frame can easily be replaced.

• Touch to close the needle bar move screen

and to move the carriage to the previous position.

Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames

CAUTION

• Only use embroidery frames of the sizes indicated in the screen, otherwise the embroidery frame may hit

the presser foot, which may result in injuries.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

Types of embroidery frames/frame holders and their applications

Embroidery type

Embroidering area

Reference

Usage

Embroidery frame holder A

Extra-large embroidery frame 200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

(Refer to “Hooping the

Fabric” on page 93.)

Use when embroidering connecting characters or patterns,

combined patterns or large embroidery patterns.

Extra-large embroidery frame

(optional)

200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))

Use when embroidering connecting characters or patterns,

combined patterns or large embroidery patterns.

Flat frame (optional) 200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering jackets and other thick garments.

Large embroidery frame 130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)

(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))

(Refer to “Hooping the

Fabric” on page 93.)

Use when embroidering patterns with a size less than 130 mm (H) ×

180 mm (W) (5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))

Medium embroidery frame 100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

(Refer to “6. Hooping the

Fabric in the Embroidery

Frame” on page 48.)

Use when embroidering standard-sized patterns.

Small embroidery frame 40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))

Use when embroidering small-sized patterns, such as nametags.

Embroidery

frame holder B

Quilt frame (optional) 200 mm (H) × 200 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H) ×

7-7/8 inches (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering pieces for quilts.

Border frame (optional) 100 mm (H) × 300 mm (W) (4 inches (H) ×

11-3/4 inches (W))

Use when embroidering a long string of characters or patterns.

Jumbo Frame (optional) 360 mm (H) × 360 (W) mm (14 inches (H) ×

14 inches (W))

Refer to “Embroidery

Patterns for the Optional

Jumbo Frame” on

page 258.

Use when embroidering combined patterns with a size less than

360 mm (H) × 200 mm (W) (14 inches (H) × 7-7/8 inches (W)) or

patterns with a maximum size of 350 mm (H) × 350 mm(W) (13-3/4

inches (H) × 13-3/4 inches (W)).

Sleeve frame (optional) 200 mm (H) × 70 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 2-3/4 inches (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering long items such as shirt sleeves.

Embroidery

frame holder C

(optional)

Round frame (optional)

∅=diameter

∅100 mm (4 inches)

∅130 mm (5 inches)

∅160 mm (6 inches)

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when adding a built-in embroidery pattern to a sleeve. Select

the frame appropriate for the size of the pattern.

Embroidery

frame holder D

(optional)

Clamp frame S (optional) 24 mm (H) × 45 mm (W)

(7/8 ichines (H) × 1-3/4 ichines (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering specialty shaped items that cannot be held

in normal frames, such as shoes and gloves.

Clamp frame M (optional) 100 mm (W) × 100 mm (H) (4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))

Use when embroidering specialty shaped items, such as narrow

bags.

Embroidery

frame holder E

(optional)

Compact frame (optional) 70: 41 mm (H) × 70 mm (W)

(1-5/8 inches (H) × 2-3/4 mm (W)))

50: 50 mm (H) × 50 mm (W)

(2 inches (H) × 2 inches (W))

44: 38 mm (H) × 44 mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) × 1-3/4 inches (W))

Vertical: 33 mm (H) × 75 mm (W)

(1-5/16 inches (H) × 2-15/16 inches (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering logos or embroidery patterns on small

items.

Cap frame wide type (optional) 60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (2-3/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) (For details on attaching

this frame, refer to “Using

the Optional Cap Frame”

on page 262.)

Use when embroidering caps.

Baseball (golf) caps, tulip hats and bucket hats can be embroidered

with these frames.

These frames cannot be used with hats having a front area of 60

mm (2-3/8inches) or less, such as sun visors and children’s hats.

In addition, these cannot be used with hats that have a brim longer

than 80 mm (3-1/8 inches).

Embroidery type

Embroidering area

Reference

Usage

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

Cylinder frame (optional) 80 mm (H) × 90 mm (W)

(3 inches (H) × 3-1/2 inches (W))

Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

Use when embroidering tubular and curved fabric, such as shirt

sleeves and turtlenecks.

Note

• The embroidery frame indicators show all embroidery frame sizes in which the embroidery pattern can

be sewn. Be sure to use an embroidery frame of the most suitable size. If the embroidery frame that is

used is too large, the pattern may be misaligned or the fabric may pucker.

• All genuine embroidery frames that can be used with PR series machines can be installed on this

machine.

• When sewing with an optional embroidery frame (jumbo frame, border frame, quilt frame or flat frame),

the included table must be installed onto the machine.

• Due to the weight of the embroidery frame and fabric it is recommended that the included table be

used, to prevent the frame holder from bending, which may result in the distortion of your design or

machine damage.

Embroidery type

Embroidering area

Reference

Usage

In order to prevent shrinkage of the stitching or misaligned patterns, we recommend that iron-on

stabilizer (backing) be used for embroidering.

Using a steam iron, affix the iron-on

stabilizer (backing) to the back of the

fabric.

1 Adhesive side of iron-on stabilizer (backing)

2 Fabric (wrong side)

• When embroidering fabric that should not be ironed

or when embroidering an area that is difficult to iron,

hoop a layer of the iron-on stabilizer (backing) under

the fabric in the embroidery frame without ironing it.

Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric

CAUTION

• When embroidering on thin or stretch fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave or fabrics that easily allow the

stitching to shrink, be sure to use iron-on stabilizer (backing) for embroidering. If iron-on stabilizer

(backing) is not used while embroidering, the needle may bend or break or the pattern may become

misaligned.

Note

• Use a piece of iron-on stabilizer (backing)

that is larger than the embroidery frame.

When framing the fabric in the embroidery

frame, be sure that the stabilizer (backing) is

clamped on all edges in order to prevent

wrinkles in the fabric.

1 Area of embroidery frame

2 Iron-on stabilizer (backing)

Memo

• When embroidering thin fabrics, such as

organza or lawn, use a water-soluble

stabilizer (backing). Water-soluble

stabilizers dissolve when washed, allowing

you to create beautiful embroidery that is

not stiff.

• When embroidering fabric with a nap, such

as towels or corduroy, hoop a layer of iron-

on stabilizer (backing) under the fabric in the

embroidery frame without ironing it.

• For other uses of stabilizer (backing), refer

to “Stabilizers (backing)” on page 251.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

Hooping the fabric in the extra-large and large embroidery frames

Loosen the screw on the outer frame.

1 Screw

Place the fabric with right side up on top of

the outer frame.

• The outer frame does not have a front or back side.

Either side can be used as the front.

Press the inner frame into the outer frame.

First insert the inner frame at the corner with the screw

A, next insert the nearby one corner B, and then

insert the opposite corner C. Then insert the opposite

corner (non screw) D.

First, align the inner and outer frames at the corner

with the screw A. Then, while lightly pulling the

fabric in the direction indicated by arrow B so that the

fabric is taut, insert the inner frame at corner B. In the

same way, lightly pull the fabric in the direction

indicated by arrow C and insert corner C, and then

lightly pull the fabric in the direction indicated by

arrow D and insert corner D.

• Be sure that there are no wrinkles in the fabric after it

is stretched in the embroidery frame.

While stretching the fabric even more,

securely tighten the screw so that the fabric

is taut.

• After stretching the fabric, lightly tapping it should

produce a drum-like sound.

• Firmly clamp together the inner and outer frames so

that their tops are even.

1 Outer frame

2 Inner frame

3 Right side of fabric

4 Top of inner and outer frames are even

• Using the included disc-shaped screwdriver, firmly

tighten the screw.

1 Disc-shaped screwdriver

Hooping the Fabric

Memo

• To correctly frame the fabric in the

embroidery frame, we recommend using a

flat surface.

• Refer to “Hooping fabric in the small

embroidery frame” on page 49 for details on

hooping smaller frames.

Using the embroidery sheet

In order to hoop the fabric so that the pattern will

be sewn in the correct position, use the guidelines

on the embroidery sheet to accurately stretch the

fabric in the frame.

With a fabric marker, mark the area of the

fabric you want to embroider.

Place the embroidery sheet on the inner

frame. Align the guidelines on the

embroidery sheet with the marks that you

drew on the fabric.

1 Guidelines

2 Inner frame

Gently stretch the fabric, so that there are

no folds or wrinkles.

Press the inner frame into the outer frame.

Remove the embroidery sheet.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

Large/small pieces of fabric

This section provides information on embroidering

fabric that is either much larger or much smaller

than the embroidery frame.

■ Embroidering large pieces of fabric

or heavy clothing

When embroidering large pieces of fabric or heavy

pieces of clothing, use a clothespin or binder clip to

fasten the excess fabric to the embroidery frame so

that it does not hang down from the frame.

Embroidering with excess fabric hanging down from

the embroidery frame may prevent the frame from

moving properly and may result in a misaligned

pattern.

• Use a clothespin or binder clip to fasten the excess

fabric to the embroidery frame.

■ Embroidering small pieces of fabric

When embroidering pieces of fabric that are smaller

than the embroidery frame, use spray fabric

adhesive to attach the fabric to stabilizer (backing)

hooped in the embroidery frame. With fabrics where

you do not wish to use spray adhesive, baste the

fabric to the stabilizer (backing).

1 Fabric

2 Stabilizer (backing)

■ Embroidering the corner of fabric

When embroidering the corner of a piece of fabric,

use spray fabric adhesive to attach the corner of the

fabric to stabilizer (backing), and then hoop the

stabilizer (backing) in the embroidery frame. With

fabrics where you do not wish to use spray adhesive,

baste the fabric to the stabilizer (backing).

1 Fabric

2 Stabilizer (backing)

■ Embroidering narrow pieces of

fabric, such as ribbon

When embroidering narrow pieces of fabric, use

spray fabric adhesive to attach the fabric to stabilizer

(backing), and then hoop the stabilizer (backing) in

the embroidery frame. With fabrics where you do

not wish to use spray adhesive, clamp both ends of

the fabric, together with the stabilizer (backing), in

the embroidery frame.

1 Ribbon

2 Stabilizer (backing)

The following provides information concerning the embroidery frame when operating the embroidery

machine.

■ Embroidery frames that cannot be

used for embroidering

As explained on page 48, the embroidery frame

indicators at the top of the screen show the

embroidery frames that can be used to sew the

currently selected pattern.

Embroidery frames with an embroidering area

smaller than the pattern cannot be used. In addition,

the embroidery frame cannot be used if the

embroidery is smaller than the embroidering area

but is positioned so that it extends out of the

embroidering area of the frame.

Embroidery frames with an embroidering area

smaller than the pattern

Patterns that extend out of the embroidering area

of the frame

In either of these cases, a message appears on the

embroidery machine, warning that the embroidery

frame must be changed.

A message indicating that the embroidery frame be

replaced may appear even if no embroidery frame is

installed.

The embroidery machine detects which embroidery

frame is installed according to the position of the left

arm of the embroidery frame holder. Therefore, the

embroidery frame size is determined by the position

of the left arm, even if the embroidery frame is not

actually installed. In addition, if the embroidery

frame holder is not installed, the embroidery

machine determines that the cap frame (optional) is

installed.

Embroidery Frame Position and Movement

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

■ Moving to the correct position

If the center of the embroidery frame is at the needle

drop point in the embroidering area, the embroidery

frame is correctly positioned, in other words, at the

starting position before embroidering.

If the embroidery frame is changed, the next frame

that is installed will not be correctly positioned.

For example, if the extra-large embroidery frame is

replaced with the small frame, the following will

occur.

1 Center of embroidery frame at the correct position

2 Needle position when the embroidery frame is

replaced

In order to correct the misalignment of this

embroidery frame, the embroidery frame

automatically moves to the correct position when

any of the following are performed.

• The embroidery machine is turned on.

The embroidery frame will move.

• The embroidering settings screen is displayed.

The embroidery frame will not move if it is correctly

positioned.

If the pattern extends out of the embroidering area for

the frame, a message appears, indicating that the

embroidery frame should be replaced. Either replace

the embroidery frame or return to the pattern editing

screen and move the embroidering position.

• The embroidery frame is replaced while the

embroidering settings screen or embroidering screen

is displayed, and then the key for checking the

embroidering area, for moving the embroidery

frame, or for starting embroidering is touched.

The embroidery frame will move.

Since the embroidery frame is moved to the correct

position and paused, touch the desired key again.

If the pattern extends out of the embroidering area for

the frame after the frame is moved, a message

appears, indicating that the embroidery frame should

be replaced. Either replace the embroidery frame or

return to the pattern editing screen and adjust the

pattern size or embroidering position.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, it was adjusted so that the beginning of the stitching was

from the center of the pattern. Therefore, move the frame and adjust the embroidering position so that the

center of the pattern aligns with the needle drop point at the sewing position. If you need to align the

embroidering position to the specific point, follow the procedure described in “Aligning the Embroidering

Position” on page 102. In addition, the angle of the entire pattern can be adjusted if the fabric cannot be

hooped evenly within the embroidery frame and the pattern is positioned at an angle on the fabric.

Touch , or in the embroidering

settings screen to select the speed.

1 Touch to move the frame by 0.1 mm.

2 Touch to move the frame by 0.5 mm.

3 Keep touching to move the frame at maximum

speed. While using the built-in camera (page 104),

the frame moves by 2.0 mm using the move key.

4 Move key

Touch , , , , , , and

in the embroidering settings screen.

Move the embroidery frame so that the needle drop

point is at the center of the area where you wish to

embroider.

→ The embroidery frame moves in the opposite

direction of the arrow.

→ The pattern in the pattern display area moves in the

same direction of the arrow.

1 Shows the vertical distance moved from center

2 Shows the horizontal distance moved from center

• Touch to move the embroidery frame

back to its original position (where the center of the

embroidery frame is aligned with the needle drop

point at the sewing position).

The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.

If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to

position the pointer on the desired pattern, and then

while holding in the left mouse button, drag the

pattern. The pattern can also be dragged by selecting it

directly in the screen with your finger or the touch

pen.

Changing the Embroidering Position

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

■ Finding the sewing position

By locking the needle bar (securing the needle and

presser foot in the down position), the needle drop

point can easily be seen.

As shown in the illustration, insert the Allen

screwdriver into the hole in the needle

clamp to slowly lower the needle bar down

till needle bar stops then clicks into the lock

position.

→ The needle and presser foot are locked in the down

position.

Touch the arrow keys in the embroidering

settings screen to move the embroidery

frame so that the needle drop point is at the

center of the area where you wish to

embroider.

• With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen, drag

the pattern to move it.

• When specifying the starting of stitching, align the

needle drop point with the point specified as the

starting of stitching. (For details on specifying the

starting/ending of stitching, refer to page 135.)

■ Unlocking the needle bar

Display the embroidering screen, and then

touch the key for any needle bar other than

the one that is locked.

→ The needle bar is unlocked and will return to

original position.

Adjusting the angle

Depending on the type of fabric being

embroidered, it may not be possible to stretch the

fabric in the embroidery frame at the desired

angle. In this case, adjust the angle of the pattern

so that it is correctly positioned on the fabric.

Touch .

The following screen appears.

Note

• Make sure that the needle is not lowered

beyond the positioning click into the fabric.

100

Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the

desired angle.

Each touch of a key rotates the pattern.

1 Shows the angle of the pattern after a key is

touched to change it.

The pattern can also be rotated by holding down and

dragging a red point around the pattern.

• To return the pattern to its original angle, touch

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the pattern.

For more details, refer to page 98.

If necessary, touch and then touch

to check the embroidering area.

For more details, refer to page 54.

After making the desired changes, touch

The embroidering settings screen appears again.

Example: Original angle

Rotates 90 degrees to the right

Rotates 10 degrees to the right

Rotates 1 degree to the right

Rotates 0.1 degree to the right

Rotates 90 degrees to the left

Rotates 10 degrees to the left

Rotates 1 degree to the left

Rotates 0.1 degree to the left

Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on

the key.

Moves the frame by 0.1 mm.

Moves the frame by 0.5 mm.

Moves at maximum speed when a key is held

down.

Touch this key to return the pattern to its original

angle.

Touch this key to close this screen.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

101

Memo

• With this operation, fine adjustments can be

made to the angle; also, this operation is

particularly useful when embroidering items,

such as bags and tubular items, that have

limitations to being hooped in the

embroidery frame.

Example: When embroidering a pillowcase

Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the left

before embroidering.

Example: When embroidering a T-shirt

Rotate the pattern 180 degrees. Pass the

machine bed through from the waist of the

T-shirt, not from the neck, and attach the

embroidery frame to the machine. This will

prevent the neck of the shirt from being

stretched when the embroidery frame is

moving.

● While rotating the pattern, the embroidering

position can be checked with the camera

functions , and .

For using the camera, refer to “Displaying

the fabric while aligning the embroidery

position” on page 102 and “Using the built-

in camera” on page 105.

102

Displaying the fabric while

aligning the embroidery position

The fabric hooped in the embroidery frame can be

displayed on the LCD so that the embroidery

position can be aligned.

This feature can be used from the pattern editing

screen and embroidering settings screen.

Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame,

and then attach the frame to the

embroidery machine.

Select the pattern.

Press in the pattern editing screen.

When the following message appears, touch

→ The embroidery frame moves so the fabric can be

scanned.

When the fabric appears as a background

for the pattern, the pattern can be edited if

it is necessary.

Aligning the Embroidering Position

Note

• When installing the optional embroidery

frame holder D, embroidery holder E, Cap

frame, or Cylinder frame, the built-in camera

cannot be used to align the embroidering

position.

• For details on using fabric thicker than 2

mm, refer to Positioning the pattern on thick

fabric (page 104).

Note

• Check page 7 of settings screen to make

sure the “Fabric Thickness Check” is set to

“OFF” when using light to medium weight

fabrics. (Refer to “Positioning the pattern on

thick fabric” on page 104.)

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

103

Use to align the pattern with the

desired embroidery position.

• The pattern can be moved to the desired position by

using your finger or the touch pen to drag the

pattern displayed on the screen.

Press to display the embroidering

settings screen.

Press to start embroidering.

→ When embroidery is finished, the fabric displayed in

the background disappears.

Whether or not the fabric is displayed in the

background can be specified from page 7 of the

settings screen. In addition, “Standard” or “Fine” can

be selected for the quality of the background image.

1 Set to “ON” to leave the fabric displayed in the

background.

2 When set to “OFF”, the background will

disappear.

3 Select the quality of the background image.

4 Touch to remove the background image

completely.

■ Saving the background image to USB

media

By touching , the background image can be

saved to USB media.

Refer to “Displaying the fabric while

aligning the embroidery position” on

page 102 to scan a background image.

Insert the USB media into the USB port.

Select the USB port ( or ) that you

want to save to.

Select the USB media where the image is to

be saved.

→ The background image is saved to the USB media.

Memo

• If necessary, touch to display a preview

in order to check the pattern position.

The background can be displayed or hidden

by touching in the embroidering

settings screen.

Memo

• The pattern can also be aligned from the

embroidering settings screen.

Note

• If the embroidery is not sewn, the fabric

background will remain on the screen.

On page 7 of the settings screen, touch

to erase the background image.

104

■ Positioning the pattern on thick

fabric

When positioning the pattern on the fabric thicker

than 2 mm, the fabric may not be detected correctly.

In order for the fabric to be correctly detected, its

thickness must first be measured.

Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame,

and then attach the frame to the machine.

Select the pattern, and then display the

embroidering settings screen.

Display page 7 of the settings screen, and

then set “Fabric Thickness Check” to “ON”.

Press .

When the following message appears, touch

→ The embroidery frame moves so the fabric can be

scanned.

Affix the embroidery positioning sticker to

the fabric within the area indicated by the

red frame in the LCD, and then touch

When the following message appears,

remove the embroidery positioning sticker,

and then touch .

→ The embroidery positioning sticker affixed to the

fabric is detected, and then the embroidery frame

will be moved.

Continue with step e on page 102 to align

the pattern with the desired embroidery

position.

CAUTION

• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm

(approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm

(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

105

Using the built-in camera

The camera built into this machine can be used to

easily align the embroidering position. This is

useful for patterns which need to be embroidered

in particular position as shown below.

Use a chalk pencil to mark the desired

embroidering position.

1 Chalk pencil mark

Hoop the fabric.

Select the pattern.

Touch in the embroidering settings

screen.

Touch to set the starting point to the

center of the pattern.

Touch .

Touch the positioning keys to move the

embroidery frame until the chalk mark

drawn on the fabric is displayed in the

camera view window.

Touch the frame movement speed keys to select the

speed to move the frame. (Refer to “Changing the

Embroidering Position” on page 98.)

1 Positioning keys

2 Frame movement speed keys

Note

• When hooping the fabric in the embroidery

frame, make sure that the embroidery

pattern will fit within the embroidering area

of the frame being used.

1 Embroidering area

2 Embroidery pattern size

3 Chalk pencil mark

106

Touch to display the needle drop point.

• Touch to change the brightness of the camera

image. The embroidering position can more easily be

checked by making the image darker ( ) on lighter

fabrics or lighter ( ) on darker fabrics.

1 Needle drop point

2 Chalk mark on the fabric

3 Each touch of this key changes the brightness of

the camera image.

4 Touch to save the camera image on the external

device.

• Touch to check the embroidering position.

Touch and adjust the orientation of the

pattern until the pattern is parallel with the

chalk mark drawn on the fabric. (Refer to

“Adjusting the angle” on page 99.)

• Touch the positioning keys to move the embroidery

frame until the pattern in the camera view window is

aligned with the chalk mark drawn on the fabric.

Touch to return to the previous screen.

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering.

■ Enlarging the camera image

Touch .

The camera image is displayed enlarged.

• You can change the display settings that is specified

in the normal camera image display.

1 Touch to save the camera image on the external

device.

2 Touch to specify the needle drop point mark on or

off.

3 Each touch of this key changes the brightness of

the camera image.

Memo

• Touch to enlarge the camera view. By

enlarging the camera view, you can make a

close adjustment for the center point of the

pattern moving the embroidery frame little

by little.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

107

Touch , or to display the keys

for specifying the starting position, rotating

the pattern or moving the embroidery

frame.

• For details on each of the keys, refer to the following

sections.

“Starting/Ending Position Settings” on page 135,

“Adjusting the angle” on page 99 and “Changing the

Embroidering Position” on page 98.

1 Use these keys to adjust the embroidering

position by moving the embroidery frame.

2 Use these keys to rotate the pattern.

3 Use these keys to specify the starting position of

sewing.

• While using these three key panels in the enlarged

camera image, panels will be invisible to show the

pattern and the camera image clearly.

Touch to return to the normal camera

image.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

Memo

• The three key panels can be repositioned so

that the pattern can easily be viewed.

Touch the center of the top of a key panel to

view possible locations where the panel can

be repositioned. Touch the desired location

to move the selected key panel.

The possible locations for repositioning the

panel appear in gray.

The key panel moves to the selected

location.

Note

• When using the camera to align the

embroidering position on thick fabric, use

the thick fabric sensor as described in

“Positioning the pattern on thick fabric” on

page 104.

108

Using the included embroidery

positioning sticker

Using the camera built into this machine and the

included embroidery positioning stickers, the

embroidering position can easily be aligned.

Affix an embroidery positioning sticker to

the fabric at the desired embroidering

position. Align the center of the large circle

in the embroidery positioning sticker with

the center of the embroidery pattern.

1 Embroidery positioning sticker

2 Center of embroidery pattern

3 Embroidering area

In the embroidering settings screen, touch

When the following message appears, touch

From the areas displayed in the LCD, touch

the area containing the embroidery

positioning sticker to select it.

Note

• When hooping the fabric in the embroidery

frame, make sure that the embroidery

pattern will fit within the embroidering area

of the frame being used.

1 Embroidering area

2 Embroidery pattern size

3 Embroidery positioning sticker

• Depending on the type of fabric to be used,

it may not be possible to easily remove the

embroidery positioning sticker. Before

affixing the embroidery positioning sticker,

check how easily the sticker can be

removed by affixing it to a scrap of the

same type of fabric.

Note

• The built-in camera may not be able to

detect the embroidery positioning sticker if

the four corners of the sticker are not firmly

affixed to the fabric. Use tape to firmly affix

the sticker to the fabric.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

109

Touch .

When the following message appears, touch

→ The built-in camera automatically detects the

embroidery positioning sticker, and then the

embroidery frame is moved so that the starting

position of the embroidery pattern is aligned with

the center of the large circle in the embroidery

positioning sticker.

When the machine's built-in camera has

finished detecting the location of the

embroidery positioning sticker, the

following message appears.

Remove the embroidery positioning sticker

from the fabric.

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering.

Memo

• You can touch to confirm the

embroidery position is correctly aligned

before removing the embroidery positioning

sticker.

• Touch for the closer image.

• Touch again to return to the previous

screen.

Note

• If the following error message appears,

touch , remove the embroidery

positioning sticker, and then affix it within

the embroidering area. Then, touch

again.

Note

• After all of the included embroidery

positioning stickers have been used, new

ones can be purchased separately. When

purchasing new ones, check “Optional

Accessories” on page 22 for the part code,

and then contact your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

110

If a thread color on the spool stand is different than the needle position thread color on the screen, the

thread colors on the screen can be switched to match the spool stand thread color position.

Touch in the embroidering screen.

→ The spool selection screen appears.

Touch the number of the first needle bar

that will be switched.

• To cancel the selection, touch the same needle

number again.

Touch the number of the other needle bar

that will be switched. The two needle

numbers are connected with an arrow.

• To cancel the selection, touch the same needle

number again.

Touch to switch the two thread

colors.

After making the desired changes, touch

Switching the Thread Colors on the Screen

Memo

• This function is not available when you set

“Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in

settings screen.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

111

■ To cancel the thread color settings

for all previously stitched design

Touch .

→ The thread color setting is canceled.

Touch .

→ Thread colors are assigned by the machine again,

regardless of the previous spool setting.

Memo

• The color settings will be completely

canceled even if the machine is in the

middle of the embroidery.

Note

• This function will not clear anchor settings

of any of the needles which have been

assigned a thread color (Refer to “Reserved

Needle Bar and Sewing Speed Settings” on

page 143).

112

When embroidering a pattern that uses eleven or more thread colors, it is necessary to change the thread

spools. When changing the thread spools, instruction to change the thread spools will appear with the

machine automatically stopping.

■ Assignment of thread colors to

needle bars

Thread colors are automatically assigned by the

machine to needle bars 1 to 10, starting with the

thread colors that are sewn first. (However, if a new

pattern has thread colors that are the same as the

previously sewn pattern, the thread colors will be

assigned to the same needle bar as before,

regardless of the sewing order.)

For example, for a pattern with five thread colors

and nine thread color changes, the thread colors are

assigned as shown below.

For a pattern with eleven or more thread colors, the

thread spool information is updated when the

eleventh thread color is needed.

Afterward, the machine adjusts the assignment of

thread colors to reduce the number of times that the

thread spools will have to be changed.

For example, for a pattern with eleven thread colors

and fourteen thread color changes, the thread colors

are assigned as shown below.

Since the thread colors on needle bars 2 to 10 will

be used again after the thread spools are changed,

they will not be replaced. However, different colors

are assigned to the other needle bars.

Embroidering a Pattern Containing Eleven or More

Colors

Memo

• This function is not available when you set

“Manual Color Sequence” to “ON” in

settings screen.

1 Needle bar 1

2 Needle bar 2

3 Needle bar 3

4 Needle bar 4

5 Needle bar 5

Needle bar 1

Needle bar 2

Needle bar 3

Needle bar 4

Needle bar 3

Needle bar 5

Needle bar 6

Needle bar 7

Needle bar 8

Needle bar 9

Needle bar 10

Needle bar 4

Change thread spools here.

Needle bar 1

10 Needle bar 10

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

113

Checking if thread spool changes

are necessary

When selecting a pattern, the number of thread

changes can be viewed, however, which thread

colors are used in the pattern cannot be checked

on this screen. Whether or not and when thread

spools will need to be changed can be checked

with the following indicators.

■ Time until the machine stops

embroidering

This indicator shows the amount of time until the

machine stops embroidering. The machine stops

when a spool change is required, or when the

machine is set to be stopped by other settings.

If the spool change indicator is appears, the

machine will require a spool change. When the time

is indicated in red, it is the last color embroidering

before the machine stops.

1 Time until the machine stops

■ Spool change indicator ( )

The spool change indicator in the stitch navigating

screen indicates the number of times that the thread

spools will need to be changed and the amount of

time between changes.

Use the scroll bar on the right side of the

thread color sequence display in the

embroidering screen.

→ Each time is touched, the thread color sequence

display scrolls down to the next color. After

reaching the last color in the thread color sequence

display, the first color is selected.

• The display can also be scrolled by using the scroll

bar.

Check the position of .

1 indicates when the thread spools will

need to be changed. The thread spools will need

to be changed the number of times that this

indicator is displayed and between the two thread

colors at the point where it is displayed.

2 Touch to scroll up through the thread color

sequence display. Each time this key is touched,

the previous color in the thread color sequence

display is selected. After reaching the first color in

the thread color sequence display, the last color is

selected.

After checking the desired information,

touch or the top of the scroll bar to

return to the first color.

114

This section provides details on the spool thread indicators and the change thread spools message in

addition to the procedure for easily changing the spools.

Change thread spools message

and spool thread indicators

When it is necessary to replace the thread spool

while embroidering a pattern that contains eleven

or more colors, the machine automatically stops

sewing and the message shown below appears. At

the same time, the indicator on the spool stand for

the spool to be replaced lights up in white, then

flashes in the thread color of the next spool to be

installed.

When a new pattern is selected, the LCD message

and indicators warn you if the thread spools must

be changed. Change the thread spools according

to their new assignments.

1 The thread information for the thread spool to be

changed appears in the new thread color and

framed in red.

2 The thread information for the thread spool needs

not to be changed appears in gray.

3 Touch this key to close the message indicating

that the thread spool be changed.

1 Flashing in white, then lights up with the next

thread color (light turns off when indicates black

thread color)

2 The thread does not need to be changed on

spools where the LED is not flashing.

• Confirm the actual thread color number on the LCD

screen. The LED lights indicate the approximate

thread color to be used on that particular spool.

After the necessary thread spools have been

changed, touch to stop the flashing of the

spool stand indicator. Then, start embroidering.

• If the automatic needle-threading button is pressed,

the spool stand LED for the threaded needle turns off.

Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of Eleven or

More Colors

Memo

• This feature is not available if “Manual Color

Sequence” has been set to “ON” in the

settings screen.

Note

• Touch needle bar key to move the needle

into the correct position for threading into

the new thread color. Refer to “Moving and

threading a selected needle bar” on

page 62.

• When the embroidering screen appears, the

needle bar settings are saved.

• If the needle bar settings are saved and the

next pattern that is opened contains thread

colors that are the same as those from the

previous pattern, the same needle bars will

be assigned the same thread colors from

the previous pattern.

• The settings for the lighting and flashing of

the spool thread indicator can be changed.

For details, refer to “Specifying the spool

stand LED setting” on page 231.

• If you wish to delete all assigned color on

display refer to “To cancel the thread color

settings for all previously stitched design”

on page 111.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

115

Easily changing the thread spools

When replacing the thread spools, it is necessary

to re-thread the upper thread. However, the thread

spools can easily be changed when replacing a

thread spool whose thread is correctly threaded

through the machine.

Cut the thread between the thread spool

and the thread guide.

Change the thread spool.

Tie the end of the thread on the new spool

with the end of the thread remaining from

the previous color.

Pull out the old thread just after the needle

bar thread guide.

Continue pulling the thread until the knot is above the

needle. Cut the knot.

Use the automatic needle-threading

mechanism to thread the needle with the

new thread. (Refer to page 61.)

→ This completes the changing of the thread spool.

Memo

• To use a different thread color than the one

that was specified, use the temporary

needle bar setting key, and then change the

thread color setting. (For details, refer to

“Temporary Needle Bar Setting” on

page 142.)

• To minimize changing the thread spools,

frequently used thread colors can be

specifically assigned to certain needle bars.

(For details, refer to “Reserved Needle Bar

and Sewing Speed Settings” on page 143.)

Note

• When pulling out the thread, do not pull the

knot through the eye of the needle. If the

knot is pulled through the eye of the needle,

the needle may be damaged.

116

If the thread breaks or the bobbin thread runs out while embroidering, the machine will automatically

stop. Since some stitches may be sewn with only one thread, go back through the stitching to a point

where stitches have already been sewn before continuing embroidering.

If the upper thread breaks

Re-thread the upper thread. (Refer to

page 57.)

Touch .

→ The stitch navigating screen appears.

Touch to check the needle drop point

on the LCD screen.

→ The camera view window appears.

• Touch to zoom up the camera view twice the

size of normal view.

Touch and to go back through

the stitching to a point where stitches have

already been sewn.

1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch back

through the stitching.

2 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches back

through the stitching.

As you move to the area where your design was last

stitched, by touching the or , the

embroidery frame will move, allowing you to place

the cross mark directly on the last stitch shown.

If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out

While Embroidering

Note

• If the thread sensor is turned off, the

machine does not stop until embroidering is

finished. Normally, the thread sensor should

be turned on. (Refer to page 233.)

• Be careful when going back or forward

through the stitching since the embroidery

frame moves at the same time.

Memo

• When the thread breaks or the bobbin

thread runs out while embroidering, the

spool stand LEDs flash to notify you of the

problem.

Note

• It is recommended to stitch over the top of

the last two or three stitches for complete

coverage.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

117

1 Stitch line

2 Cross mark

3 Embroidery progress bar

You can also touch the specific point of the

embroidery progress bar to move the stitch count to

the desired point.

If the needle bar is moved back too far through the

stitching, touch or to go forward through

the stitching.

1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch forward

through the stitching.

2 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches forward

through the stitching.

Touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears again.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to continue embroidering.

■ Specifying a stitch number

In step d on page 116, touch .

Use the number keys to enter the desired

stitch number, and then touch .

→ The embroidery frame moves to the specified stitch.

→ When is touched in this screen to enlarge the

display, a stitch number can be specified with the

number keys.

Touch to return to the previous screen,

and then continue with step

Memo

• Touch to reset the stitch number and

embroider from the first stitch. In addition, if

no stitch number was entered when

is touched, embroidering will begin from the

first stitch.

• To specify the last stitch number, select the

last thread color, and then touch .

118

If the bobbin thread breaks or

runs out

Touch , and then press the thread

trimming button.

→ The upper thread is trimmed.

• If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out, also trim the

upper thread.

Remove the stitches sewn only with the

upper thread.

Pull the trim end of the upper thread.

• If the stitches cannot be cleanly removed, trim the

thread with scissors.

■ If the bobbin thread ran out, replace

the bobbin at this point in the

procedure.

Replace the bobbin with a bobbin wound

with bobbin thread. (Refer to page 36.)

• If the hook cover can be opened, replace the bobbin

without removing the embroidery frame from the

machine.

• If the machine bed is hidden, for example, with a bag-

shaped piece of fabric, or if the hook cover cannot be

opened, temporarily remove the embroidery frame.

(Refer to page 68.) After replacing the bobbin, re-

attach the embroidery frame. (Refer to page 50.)

Go back through the stitching in the same

way as that described in step

b of “If the

upper thread breaks” on page 116, and then

continue embroidering.

Note

If the embroidery frame is removed before

embroidering of the pattern is finished, take

caution, otherwise the pattern may become

misaligned.

• Do not apply extreme pressure to the

framed fabric and cause it to become loose.

• When removing and re-attaching the

embroidery frame, do not allow the frame to

hit the carriage or the presser foot.

If the carriage is hit and moves, turn the

machine off, then on again. The correct

frame position at the time that the machine

was stopped is stored in the machine’s

memory, and the embroidery frame is

returned to the correct position.

• When the embroidery frame is re-attached,

make sure that the pins on the left and right

arms of the embroidery frame holder

securely fit into the holes in the handles on

the embroidery frame.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

119

If you wish to restart embroidering from the beginning, for example, if trial embroidery was sewn and an

incorrect thread tension was used or if the wrong thread color was used, restart the embroidering using

the forward/backward stitch key. In addition, you can go forward or back through the stitching by thread

color or by stitch to start stitching at any position of the pattern.

Press the start/stop button to stop the

machine.

• If necessary, trim and remove the sewn stitches.

Touch .

→ The stitch navigating screen appears.

Touch to check the needle drop point

on the LCD screen.

→ The camera view window appears and the cross

mark in the camera view indicates the needle drop

point.

1 Needle drop point

• Touch to zoom up the camera view twice the

size of normal view.

Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the

Pattern

Note

• Be careful when going back or forward

through the stitching since the embroidery

frame moves at the same time.

120

■ To start sewing from the beginning

Touch .

1 Touch this key to return to the beginning of the

first color.

→ The embroidery frame moves to the starting

position.

■ To select the stitch from where

embroidering is to begin

Use the scroll bar to select the thread color,

and then touch , , , ,

, , and to select the

specific stitch.

1 The stitch from where embroidering is to begin

can also be specified by using the scroll bar.

2 The thread color at the top of the thread color

sequence display is the color of the area currently

selected.

Touch this area to specify the stitch from where

embroidering is to begin.

→ The needle bar case moves and the current needle

bar moves to the sewing position, and then the

embroidery frame moves and current needle

position is indicated.

Touch .

After selecting the stitch from where

embroidering is to begin, touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears again.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to begin embroidering.

→ Embroidering begins from the specified point.

Each touch of this key moves one stitch back

through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves ten stitches back

through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves one hundred stitches

back through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves one thousand stitches

back through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves one stitch forward

through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves ten stitches forward

through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves one hundred stitches

forward through the stitching.

Each touch of this key moves one thousand stitches

forward through the stitching.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

121

■ Specifying a stitch number

In step e on page 120, touch .

Use the number keys to enter the desired

stitch number, and then touch .

→ The embroidery frame moves to the specified stitch.

→ When is touched in this screen to enlarge the

display, a stitch number can be specified with the

number keys.

Touch to return to the previous screen,

and then continue with step

Memo

• If no stitch number was entered when

is touched, embroidering will begin from the

first stitch.

122

In either of the following cases, the remaining stitches of the embroidery are stored in the machine’s

memory.

• If the machine’s power switch is pressed to turn off after stopping embroidering.

Cut the thread before the machine’s main power switch is turned off, otherwise the thread may be pulled or may catch

when the carriage returns to its initial position after the machine is turned on again.

• If the machine was accidentally turned off, for example, due to a power outage, while it was embroidering.

The remainder of the embroidery can be sewn when the machine is turned on again; however, some of the stitches that

were already sewn may be sewn again.

Set the main power switch to “I” to turn on

the machine.

When the machine is turned on, the

opening movie is played. Touch anywhere

on the screen to display the message below.

Touch .

→ A message appears, asking if you wish to continue

embroidering or start a new operation.

Touch .

1 Touch to cancel embroidering and display the

pattern type selection screen to select a new

pattern.

2 Touch to continue embroidering.

→ The embroidering screen displayed before the

machine was turned off appears.

Touch .

→ The stitch navigating screen appears.

Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the Machine

Note

• Be careful when going back or forward

through the stitching since the embroidery

frame moves at the same time.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

123

Touch to check the needle drop point

on the LCD screen.

→ The camera view window appears.

• Touch to zoom up the camera view twice the

size of normal view.

Touch two or three times to go back

two or three stitches.

1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch back

through the stitching.

• Check that the needle drop point is positioned where

stitches have already been sewn.

Touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears again.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to continue embroidering.

Memo

• The machine can be stopped at any time,

even while it is embroidering; however, if

the machine is stopped when the thread

color is changed, it is not necessary to go

back through the stitching when

embroidering is continued. The machine

can also be set to stop when the thread

color is changed. (For details, refer to

“Setting the Machine to Stop at Color

Changes” on page 140.)

124

The following procedure describes how to adjust the thread tensions. After adjusting the tension of the

bobbin thread, adjust the tension of the upper thread for each needle bar.

Adjusting the tension of the

bobbin thread

Tie the included weight to the end of the

thread extending from the bobbin case.

As shown in the illustration, hold the

bobbin case against a smooth vertical

surface.

• If the thread with the weight attached is slowly pulled

out, the thread tension is correct.

Use the included standard screwdriver to

turn the tension-adjusting screw and adjust

the thread tension.

1 Tension-adjusting screw

2 Tighter

3 Looser

Adjusting the Thread Tension of both the Bobbin and

Upper Thread

Note

• Be sure to check the tension of the bobbin thread each time that the bobbin is changed.

Depending on the bobbin thread type and whether a prewound bobbin is used, the tension of the

bobbin thread may differ. For example, when replacing an empty prewound bobbin with one of the

same type, be sure to check the tension of the bobbin thread and adjust the tension if necessary.

• Be sure to adjust the tension of the bobbin thread before adjusting the tension of the upper thread.

Note

• Different weights are used to adjust pre-

wound bobbins and metal bobbins.

Pre-wound bobbins: Only weight (L)

Metal bobbins: Weight (L) and weight (S)

* Weight (S) is included with the optional

bobbin winder.

OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES

125

After making the adjustments, try

embroidering with all needle bars to check

the thread tension.

Adjusting the tension of the

upper thread

When embroidering, the thread tension should be

set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on

the wrong side of the fabric.

Turn the thread tension knobs.

1 Thread tension knobs

2 Tighter

3 Looser

4 Mark

→ If the thread tension is not still correctly adjusted,

turn the upper thread guide pretension knob.

1 Upper thread guide pretension knob

2 Tighter

3 Looser

■ Correct Thread Tension

The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the

fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the

pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or

the thread may break.

1 Right side

2 Wrong side

Follow the operations described below to adjust

thread tension according to the situation.

Memo

• In the built-in embroidery patterns, one

pattern is used for checking the thread

tension. By sewing this pattern, the thread

tension can easily be checked. For details,

refer to page 247.

Note

• If the thread tension setting is made

extremely weak, the machine may stop

during sewing. This is not the sign of a

malfunction. Increase the thread tension

slightly, and begin sewing again.

• If necessary, refer to page 287 for

reassembling the tension unit.

126

■ Upper thread is too tight

The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting

in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side

of the fabric.

1 Right side

2 Wrong side

Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow to

decrease the tension of the upper thread.

1 Red line

If the red line is visible, the thread tension cannot be

decreased any further. Increase the tension of the

bobbin thread. For details, refer to page 124.

■ Upper thread is too loose

The tension of the upper thread is too loose,

resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks

or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.

1 Right side

2 Wrong side

Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow to

increase the tension of the bobbin thread.

Note

• If you decrease the thread tension further

than the red line, the tension knob may be

disassembled.

• If necessary, refer to page 287 for

reassembling the tension unit.

Chapter 4

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

This chapter contains descriptions on the various embroidering settings, which make operation

easier.

Basting Embroidery ............................................... 128

Creating an Appliqué Piece ................................... 129

Creating an appliqué piece .....................................................129

Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for

Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence) ........... 132

Convenience of the manual color sequence............................132

Specifying the manual color sequence ....................................132

Using the manual color sequence ...........................................133

Precautions on the manual color sequence.............................133

Automatic Lock Stitch Setting ............................... 134

Starting/Ending Position Settings........................... 135

Repeatedly sewing a pattern along a diagonal ........................136

Embroidering linked characters ..............................................137

Maximum Sewing Speed Setting............................ 139

Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes ...... 140

Stopping the machine at the next color change ......................140

Specifying pause locations before embroidering .....................140

Temporary Needle Bar Setting .............................. 142

Uninterrupted embroidering (monochrome) ..........................142

Reserved Needle Bar and Sewing Speed Settings... 143

128

Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for

embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By stitching

stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be minimized.

Touch , and then display page 2 of the

settings screen.

Use and to specify the distance from

the pattern to the basting stitching.

Touch to return to the embroidering

settings screen.

Touch to select the basting setting.

• To cancel the setting, touch .

→ Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing

order.

Touch to continue to the

embroidering screen.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to begin embroidering.

When embroidering is finished, remove the

basting stitching.

1 Basting stitching

Basting Embroidery

Note

• It is recommended to finish combining and

editing the pattern before selecting the

basting setting. If the pattern is edited after

selecting the basting setting, the basting

and pattern may become misaligned, and

the basting under the pattern may be

difficult to remove after embroidering is

complete.

Memo

• The higher the setting, the farther the

basting is from the pattern.

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

Note

• When is pressed, the pattern is moved

to the center. After selecting the basting

setting, move the pattern to the desired

position.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

129

Appliqué pieces can be created from the built-in patterns and patterns on embroidery cards. This is

convenient for fabrics that cannot be embroidered or when you wish to attach an appliqué to a garment.

Creating an appliqué piece

The following pattern will be used to create an

appliqué piece.

Select the pattern to be used for the

appliqué.

In the pattern editing screen, touch .

Select the outline.

If is selected, an outline can be created around

the pattern.

→ Use or to specify the distance between the

pattern and the appliqué outline.

Check the preview in the screen, and then

touch .

After specifying the various settings, touch

Specify the embroidering settings, and then

touch to continue to the

embroidering screen.

Creating an Appliqué Piece

Note

• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to

make the appliqué piece. Depending on the

pattern and fabric used, lighter weight

fabrics may cause the stitching to appear

smaller.

• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer

material for embroidering.

• Select a frame that matches the pattern

size. Frame options are displayed on the

LCD screen.

• Finish combining and editing the pattern

before selecting the appliqué setting. If the

pattern is edited after selecting the appliqué

setting, the appliqué stitching and pattern

may become misaligned.

• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an

appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is

selected) will be larger than the original

pattern.

First, adjust the size and position of the

pattern as shown below.

1 Embroidering area

2 Approx. 10 mm

3 Pattern size

Memo

• If a border pattern is selected for the outline,

the border pattern can be enlarged,

reduced or moved.

• Touch to select a different outline

pattern.

Note

• At this time, the pattern and outline will be

grouped.

130

Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the

back of the felt or denim fabric to be used

as the appliqué piece.

Hoop the appliqué fabric in the embroidery

frame, attach the embroidery frame to the

machine, and then start embroidering.

After the cutting line “APPLIQUE

MATERIAL” is embroidered, stop the

machine and remove the appliqué material

from the embroidery frame.

Carefully cut along the stitching. After

cutting, carefully remove all of the cutting

line thread.

1 Cutting line for appliqué

Use two layers of adhesive water-soluble

stabilizer material with their sticky sides

together, and then hoop them in the

embroidery frame.

Sew the placement line for the appliqué

position “APPLIQUE POSITION”.

1 Pattern placement line

Lightly apply glue or spray adhesive, and

paste the appliqué piece so that it aligns

with the placement line.

Memo

• Three steps are added to the sewing order:

appliqué cutting line, position of pattern

placement on the garment, and appliqué

stitching.

1 Cutting line for appliqué

2 Position of pattern placement on garment

3 Appliqué stitching

• We recommend using thread for the cutting

line “APPLIQUE MATERIAL” that is closest

to the color of the fabric.

Note

• Depending on the pattern density and fabric

used, there may be shrinking of the pattern

or the appliqué may be misaligned with the

placement line. We recommend cutting

slightly outside of the cutting line.

• When using patterns that are vertically and

horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil

to indicate the pattern orientation before

cutting it out.

• Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline

you just sewed. Do not cut inside the

cutting line, otherwise the appliqué fabric

will not be caught by the appliqué stitch.

Note

• If water-soluble stabilizer is used, it is not

necessary to remove the stabilizer material

after sewing the appliqué outline. To reduce

shrinkage of the pattern, we recommend

using water-soluble stabilizer.

• Put together two layers of water-soluble

stabilizer, otherwise the stabilizer material

may tear during embroidering.

Note

• Before pasting the appliqué piece down,

make sure the appliqué piece is positioned

correctly within the placement line.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

131

Sew the outline “APPLIQUE”.

1 Outline of appliqué piece

After embroidering is finished, remove the

stabilizer material from the embroidery

frame.

Use scissors to cut the excess water-soluble

stabilizer from outside the appliqué outline.

Soak the appliqué piece in water to dissolve

the water-soluble stabilizer.

Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if

necessary.

Note

• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,

otherwise the stitching may be damaged.

Memo

• The outline is sewn using satin stitching.

• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,

needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish

embroidering the appliqué pattern, and then

clean off the glue.

132

The thread colors assigned to each needle bar can be manually specified/managed. In addition, the

thread colors can be assigned to needle bars automatically and more efficiently than when the settings are

normally specified.

Convenience of the manual color

sequence

The manual color sequence is convenient when

the machine is being used under the following

conditions.

■ When using embroidery data that

has no thread color information,

such as with DST files

The thread spools to be used can easily be selected

for data with no thread color information. (For

details on the thread color information for DST files,

refer to “Colors of Tajima (.dst) embroidery data” on

page 250.)

■ When the same combination of

thread colors is always used

If specific thread colors are assigned to certain

needle bars, the thread color settings can be

changed with the needle bar number assignments,

even when the pattern is changed. The operation is

simplified if the same thread colors are always used.

■ When continuously sewing with the

same needle bar settings

If the settings are specified normally, the needle bar

settings are canceled when the embroidering

settings screen appears after sewing stops. However,

with the manual color sequence, the needle bar

settings continue to be applied unless the pattern is

deleted or the machine is turned off.

This is useful if the same pattern is to be sewn

continuously multiple times.

Specifying the manual color

sequence

Touch , and then display page 5 of the

settings screen.

Touch , and then select the manual

color sequence.

• When the embroidery machine is purchased, “OFF”

is selected.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

→ The icon for the manual color sequence appears in

the screen.

Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for Each Needle Bar

(Manual Color Sequence)

Note

• The manual color sequence cannot be

changed while operations are being

performed in the embroidering screen.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

133

Using the manual color sequence

■ Manually assign thread colors to all

needle bars

By specifying the thread colors used with this

machine, sewing can continue more efficiently

simply by changing the needle bar assignments after

a pattern is selected. With the normal method of

specifying settings, only a maximum of 9 needle

bars can be manually assigned thread colors;

however, with the manual color sequence, all 10

needle bars can be assigned thread colors.

(For details on specifying the settings, refer to

“Reserved Needle Bar and Sewing Speed Settings”

on page 143.)

■ Needle bar number settings

The needle bar used with each thread color can be

specified.

In the embroidering settings screen, touch

→ A screen appears, allowing the needle bar numbers

to be selected.

From the thread color sequence display,

select the thread color whose needle bar is

to be changed.

• If the desired thread color is not displayed, use the

scroll bar on the right side to display it.

1 Scroll bar

Touch a number button (between and

) to select the number of the needle bar

whose settings are to be specified.

→ The needle bar number for the thread color selected

in step

b changes to the selected needle bar

number.

If the needle bar number was specified with

reserved needle bar settings, the color of the thread

spool on the left side changes to the specified thread

color, and the pattern in the pattern display area also

changes to the color of the specified needle bar.

1 Needle bar number specified with reserved needle

bar settings

2 Needle bar set to a different number (needle bar 5)

3 If a color is selected by touching this key, the

machine stops before sewing the selected color.

■ Initializing thread color settings

With the manual color sequence, the thread color

information on the machine can be initialized each

time a new pattern is selected, and then the needle

bars can be assigned. This allows the needle bar

settings to be specified without being affected by the

thread color information from the previous pattern.

Precautions on the manual color

sequence

■ When embroidering a pattern

containing 11 or more colors

With the manual color sequence, the machine does

not monitor the timing for replacing thread spools.

Since the machine does not automatically stop and

no message indicating that the thread spool be

changed appears, as with the normal needle bar

settings, follow the procedure described in either

“Stopping the machine at the next color change” or

“Specifying pause locations before embroidering”

on page 140 to set the machine to stop with thread

spools that must be changed.

Memo

• Using the procedure described in

“Reserved Needle Bar and Sewing Speed

Settings” on page 143, the finished

embroidery colors can be checked in the

screen if thread colors are assigned to

thread spools.

134

The machine can be set to automatically sew lock stitches, for example at the beginning of the pattern,

before sewing each thread color change, and before trimming the thread.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, this

function is set ON.

■ Specifying that lock stitches be sewn

at the beginning of the pattern, at

the beginning of sewing each thread

color change and at the beginning of

sewing after the thread trim.

Touch so that it changes to .

Touch (or ) to select the desired setting.

• Each touch of the key turns the setting either on or off.

■ Specifying that lock stitches be sewn

before the thread is trimmed.

Touch so that it changes to .

Touch (or ) to select the desired setting.

• Each touch of the key turns the setting either on or off.

Automatic Lock Stitch Setting

Automatic lock stitch

setting turned on

Automatic lock stitch

setting turned off

Memo

• If the first stitch length is less than 0.8 mm,

the lock stitch won’t be inserted.

• If “Thread Trimming” is set “OFF” in the

settings screen, the lock stitch won’t be

inserted (refer to page 227).

Automatic lock stitch

setting turned on

Automatic lock stitch

setting turned off

Memo

• The automatic lock stitch setting stays the

same until the key is touched to turn it off.

The setting specified before the machine is

turned off remains selected the next time

that the machine is turned on.

• If “Thread Trimming” is set “OFF” in the

settings screen, the lock stitch won’t be

inserted (refer to page 227).

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

135

The machine can set the start point and the ending point separately from the 9 points of the pattern. Those

are upper-left corner, upper-center, upper-right corner, center-left, center-center, center-right, lower-left

corner, lower-center and lower-right corner.

These settings can be used to repeatedly sew a pattern along a diagonal.

The starting/ending position settings are specified

from the embroidering settings screen.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, both

the starting position and the ending positions are

set to the center of the pattern.

Touch .

→ The starting/ending position settings screen appears.

1 Specifies the starting position

2 Specifies the ending position

Touch a key to select the setting.

The highlighted key shows the currently selected

setting.

Example

3 Touch this key to close this screen.

■ Specifying the starting position

Touch the key for the desired starting

position setting.

→ When a starting position is selected, the ending

position is automatically set to the same position.

→ The embroidery frame moves to the starting

position.

■ Specifying the ending position

Touch the key for the desired ending

position setting.

After selecting the desired settings, touch

→ The embroidering settings screen appears again.

Starting/Ending Position Settings

This key is selected.

Memo

• The starting/ending position settings do not

change until the key for a new setting is

touched. The settings specified before the

machine is turned off remain selected the

next time that the machine is turned on.

136

Repeatedly sewing a pattern

along a diagonal

Example

Specify the upper-left corner as the starting

position and the lower-right corner as the

ending position.

Touch in the embroidering settings screen to

display the starting/ending position settings screen.

For the starting position, touch so that it changes

to .

For the ending position, touch so that it changes

to .

Touch to close the starting/ending position

settings screen.

Sew the first embroidery pattern.

Touch to display the embroidering screen, and

then touch and press the start/stop button.

1 Starting position

2 Ending position

After embroidering is finished, the machine

stops at the lower-right corner of the

pattern.

Touch and repeat steps b and c

three times.

Note

• If the next embroidery pattern of the series

will be stitched outside the embroidery field,

the following screen will appear.

Rehoop the fabric to continue to repeat the

sewing pattern. Touch and repeat

steps

b and c.

Memo

• If the starting position and ending position

settings are changed, instead of sewing the

patterns in a fixed direction, various pattern

designs are possible.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

137

Embroidering linked characters

Follow the procedure described below to

embroider linked characters in a single row when

the pattern extends beyond the embroidery frame.

Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters “ABC”

Select the character patterns for “ABC”.

In the embroidering settings screen, touch

Touch .

→ The needle bar is positioned in the lower-left corner

of the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that

the needle is positioned correctly.

Touch to return to the embroidering

settings screen, and then touch

continue to the embroidering screen.

→ changes to while the starting point is set

in the lower-left corner of the pattern.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to begin embroidering.

After the characters are embroidered, cut

the threads, remove the embroidery frame,

and then attach the embroidery frame again

so that the remaining characters (“DEF”)

can be embroidered.

1 End of the embroidering

As in step a, select the character patterns

for “DEF”.

In the embroidering settings screen, touch

Touch .

→ The needle bar is positioned in the lower-left corner

of the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that

the needle is positioned correctly.

Touch .

Note

• To cancel the starting point setting and

return the starting point to the center of the

pattern, touch .

• Use to select a different starting

point for embroidering.

138

Use to align the needle with the end of

embroidering for the previous pattern.

• Touch to check the needle drop point on the

LCD screen.

• Touch to zoom up the camera view.

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to begin embroidering the remaining

character patterns.

Note

• You can also follow the procedure in

page 99 to find the sewing position, by

directly place the needle over the end of the

previous pattern.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

139

The maximum sewing speed can be set to one of seven levels at every 100 spm between 400 and 1000

spm. If Cap frame, Cylinder frame or Clamp frame is used, the maximum sewing speed can be set to one

of five levels at every 50 spm between 400 and 600 spm.

Maximum sewing speed

The maximum sewing speed setting is specified

from the embroidering screen.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, the

maximum sewing speed is set to 1000 spm (Cap

frame, Cylinder frame or Clamp frame for 600

spm).

For the types of embroidery frames, refer to “Types

of embroidery frames/frame holders and their

applications” on page 89.

To increase the sewing speed, touch . To

decrease the sewing speed, touch .

→ The value beside and changes.

Maximum Sewing Speed Setting

Embroidery frame/Flat

frame/

Round frame/

or other frames

Cap frame/

Cylinder frame/

Clamp frame

1 1000 1 600

2 900 2 550

3 800 3 500

4 700 4 450

5 600 5 400

6 500 – –

7 400 – –

Memo

• You can also specify a maximum sewing

speed to a certain needle bar in the

reserved needle bar settings (refer to

page 144). When you set the slower sewing

speed to a certain needle bar, the sewing

speed set with the procedure described in

this page, will not change the sewing speed

on the balance of the needles. It changes

the speed of the reserved needle.

• Decrease the sewing speed when

embroidering on thin, thick or heavy fabrics.

In addition, the machine embroiders more

quietly at a slower sewing speed.

• The sewing speed can be changed while

embroidery is being sewn.

• The maximum sewing speed setting does

not change until a new setting is selected.

The setting specified before the machine is

turned off remains selected the next time

that the machine is turned on.

• Decrease the sewing speed to 400 spm,

when using a weak thread like a metallic

thread.

140

The machine can be stopped at any time; however, if the machine is stopped while it is embroidering, it

is better to go back a few stitches before continuing sewing to overlap the stitching. If the machine stops

at a color change, it is not necessary to go back through the stitching before continuing embroidering.

Stopping the machine at the next

color change

The machine can be set to stop before sewing the

next color.

While sewing the color before the point

where you wish to stop the machine, touch

so that it changes to .

After finishing sewing the area for the

current color, the next needle bar moves

into position and the machine stops before

sewing the next color.

→ changes back to .

• If the machine is temporarily turned off, you will be

asked if you wish to continue sewing or select a new

pattern when the machine is turned on again.

Touch to continue embroidering. (Refer to

“Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the

Machine” on page 122.)

Specifying pause locations before

embroidering

Pause locations can be specified in the pause

setting screen, displayed by touching .

Touch in the embroidering settings

screen.

→ The change thread color screen appears.

From the thread color sequence display,

select the thread color where you wish to

stop the machine before sewing it.

• If the desired thread color is not displayed, use the

scroll bar on the right side to display it.

1 Scroll bar

Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

141

Touch .

→ The mark appears to indicate where the machine

will stop.

1 mark

• To cancel the setting, touch again.

Repeat steps b and c for each pause that

you wish to specify.

• Any number of pauses can be specified.

After specifying the desired settings, touch

• If the machine is temporarily turned off when it is

stopped at the specified location after embroidering,

you will be asked if you wish to continue sewing or

select a new pattern when the machine is turned on

again.

Touch to continue embroidering. (Refer to

“Resume Embroidering After Turning Off the

Machine” on page 122.)

Memo

• If the machine is temporarily turned off, the

settings to stop the machine at color

changes specified before the machine was

turned off are not cancelled. However, the

settings are cancelled if a new pattern is

selected.

• If a pattern with the settings to stop the

machine at color changes is saved, the

settings to stop the machine at color

changes are also saved.

142

After embroidering begins, the machine can be stopped at a color change and a different needle bar can

be specified for the next color to be sewn.

By substituting an upper thread color already threaded on a different needle bar, the time for sewing can

be saved. For example, similar color thread can be substituted for temporary use.

Touch .

→ The temporary needle bar setting screen appears.

Touch the key for the needle bar threaded

with the thread that you wish to embroider

with.

→ The needle bar number changes and appears to

indicate the selected needle bar.

→ To cancel the setting, touch .

Touch .

→ The embroidering screen appears again.

Uninterrupted embroidering

(monochrome)

A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color

instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate

but not stop between color steps, and then

continue till the pattern is completed.

Touch the key for the needle bar threaded

with the thread you wish to embroider

uninterruptedly.

Touch for the multicolor steps to

become shaded and the selected pattern

will embroider in a single color, instead of

changing the thread while embroidering.

→ The thread color displayed on the screen will be

grayed out.

• Touch again to return to the pattern’s original

settings.

Temporary Needle Bar Setting

Memo

• The thread color (needle bar) cannot be

changed in the middle of an area that is

being sewn.

Memo

• Even if uninterrupted embroidering has

been set, the DST thread trimming function

can be used (refer to page 227).

• After finishing the embroidery, uninterrupted

embroidery will be canceled.

EMBROIDERING SETTINGS

143

Normally, the machine automatically assigns thread colors to the needle bars; however, a specific thread

color can be manually assigned to a certain needle bar. If a needle bar is specified, that needle bar is

removed from the machine’s automatic assignments and the specified color remains assigned to it.

By specifically assigning often used thread colors to certain needle bars, the trouble of changing the

thread spools can be reduced.

Also, the maximum sewing speed can be specified to the assigned needle bar. It is useful when you

specially set a weak thread such as a metallic thread to the assigned needle bar.

Once a manual needle bar setting is specified, it

remains applied until the setting is cancelled.

The manual needle bar settings can be specified in

page 3 of the settings screen.

Touch , and then touch and to

display page 3 of the settings screen.

Touch any of the key from to for the

number of the needle bar that you wish to

specify.

1 Indicates the number of the selected needle bar

Select the color to be assigned to the needle

bar.

Touch , , and , or directly touch a

color, to select the desired color.

1 The color that appears enlarged is the color that is

selected.

2 Displays the color that is selected and its name

3 Highlighting a color square moves in the direction

of the arrow on the key that is touched.

Reserved Needle Bar and Sewing Speed Settings

Note

• This feature is not accessible through the embroidering screen.

• You can assign thread colors up to 9 needle bars in normal mode. When you set “Manual Color

Sequence” to “ON” in settings screen, it is available to assign up to 10 needle bars. If you assign all

the 10 needle bars in the “Manual Color Sequence” mode, and then you set the machine to the normal

mode, the setting of needle bar 10 is canceled automatically.

Refer to “Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for Each Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence)” on

page 132

146

Chapter 5

SELECTING/EDITING/

SAVING PATTERNS

This chapter provides details on selecting, editing and saving embroidery patterns.

Using the Memory Function.................................. 148

Embroidery data precautions ..................................................148

Concerning USB media ...........................................................149

Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ........................... 150

General pattern selection........................................................150

Embroidery patterns................................................................151

Frame patterns ........................................................................152

Monogram and frame designs .................................................153

Alphabet patterns....................................................................155

Decorative alphabet patterns..................................................158

Saving embroidery patterns in the machine’s memory............160

Saving embroidery patterns to USB media/SD card ................161

Saving embroidery patterns in the computer ..........................161

Connecting the USB using the included USB cord clamps ......163

Retrieving patterns from the machine’s memory.....................164

Recalling from USB media/SD card ........................................165

Recalling from the computer...................................................166

Saving embroidery patterns from any memory source to

another memory .....................................................................168

Sending Embroidery Patterns From a Computer to

the Machine (Link Function).................................. 169

Operations available with the Link function ...........................169

Embroidering using the Link function......................................170

Disabling the Link function .....................................................173

Editing the Embroidery Pattern

(Pattern Editing Screen)......................................... 174

Enlarge the pattern image on the screen .................................174

Combining patterns.................................................................174

Selecting the pattern to be edited ...........................................175

Grouping multiple selected patterns .......................................176

Moving a pattern.....................................................................176

Flipping a pattern horizontally................................................177

Changing the size of a pattern (Normal resizing mode) ..........178

Changing the pattern size while maintaining

the desired thread density (stitch recalculator) .......................179

Rotating a pattern ...................................................................180

Changing the text arrangement of a character ........................181

Changing the character spacing ..............................................181

Separating combined character patterns.................................182

Trimming the threads between characters ..............................183

Combining the separated character patterns ..........................183

Specifying multi-color text ......................................................184

Changing the character font....................................................184

Changing the font and size of individual characters................184

Changing the thread density (only for selected character

and frame patterns).................................................................185

Changing the colors of the pattern..........................................185

Find new color schemes with the color shuffling function ......187

Thread color sorting................................................................190

Designing repeated patterns ...................................................190

Creating a custom thread table .............................................. 195

Choosing a color from the custom thread table ..................... 197

Saving and recalling the custom thread table using USB media

... 198

Duplicating a pattern ............................................................. 199

Deleting a pattern .................................................................. 200

Editing the Embroidery Pattern

(Embroidering Settings Screen) ..............................201

Rotating the entire pattern ..................................................... 201

Editing a Combined Pattern....................................202

Using the Camera to Connect Patterns ..................206

Connecting three patterns ...................................................... 206

Changing the position of a sticker .......................................... 212

Connecting rotated patterns................................................... 214

Connecting patterns to be joined along an edge..................... 216

Resume feature....................................................................... 218

148

Embroidery data precautions

Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this

machine.

■ Types of embroidery data that can be used

• Only .pen, .pes, .phc and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other than that saved

using our data design systems or embroidery machines may cause the embroidery machine to malfunction.

■ Types of USB devices/media that can be used

Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.

• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)

• USB Floppy disk drive

Stitch data can be recalled only.

• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives

You can also use the following types of USB media with USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.

• Secure Digital (SD) Card

• CompactFlash

• Memory Stick

•Smart Media

• Multi Media Card (MMC)

•xD-Picture Card

■ Connecting your machine to the PC

• Compatible models:

IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment

IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment

• Compatible operating systems:

Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10

Using the Memory Function

CAUTION

• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when

sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that

case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity of data stored.

• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website ( http://

support.brother.com ) for more details.

• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB devices/media, and it will take about 5 to 6

seconds to recognize the devices/media. (Time will differ depending on the USB device/media).

Memo

• To create file folders, use a computer.

• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

149

■ Precautions on using the computer to create and save data

• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special

characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend using the 26

letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and “_”.

• Embroidery data larger than 200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (approx. 7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) cannot be used. (All

patterns must be within the 200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (approx. 7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) pattern field size.)

• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be displayed.

The combined pattern can not exceed a maximum number of 500,000 stitches or a maximum number of 127 color

changes (Above numbers are approximate, depending on the overall size of the pattern). Use one of our pattern software

programs to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets these specifications.

• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.

• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in “Removable Disk”,

that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.

■ Tajima (.dst) embroidery data

• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default thread color

sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.

Concerning USB media

• Do not disassemble or alter the USB media.

• Do not allow the USB media to become wet, such as with water, solvents, drinks or any other liquids.

• Do not use or store the USB media in a location exposed to strong static electricity or electrical interference.

• Do not use or store USB media in locations exposed to vibrations or impacts, direct sunlight, extreme dust (or lint), high

temperatures, high humidity, severe temperature fluctuations, or strong magnetic forces (such as from speakers).

• While embroidery data is being recalled from the USB media, do not allow the machine to be exposed to vibrations or

impacts, and do not attempt to remove the USB media from the machine.

• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our web site for more details.

• Only remove USB media while an access lamp on the USB media is not flashing (refer to “Saving embroidery patterns to

USB media/SD card” on page 161).

• For additional information, refer to the instruction manual included with the USB media that you have purchased.

• Do not unplug a USB device/media from this machine immediately after it has been plugged in. Be sure to wait at least 5

seconds before unplugging the USB device/media.

150

Various embroidery patterns are built into this machine. Other than the built-in patterns, various other

patterns can be selected from embroidery cards (optional) and from the computer.

General pattern selection

The procedure for selecting a pattern differs depending on the type of pattern; however, the general

procedure for selecting a pattern is described below.

In the pattern type selection screen, touch

the key for the desired category.

■ Pattern type selection screen

In the pattern category list screen, which

appears next, touch the desired pattern

category to select it.

In the pattern list screen, which appears

next, touch the desired pattern to select it.

Selecting an Embroidery Pattern

1 Embroidery patterns

2 Frame patterns

3 Decorative alphabet patterns

4 Alphabet patterns

5 Monogram and frame pattern

6 Embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s

memory

7 Embroidery patterns saved on USB media

8 Embroidery patterns saved on a computer (USB)

9 Embroidery patterns saved on an SD card

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

151

■ Pattern list screen

1 Pattern keys

Touch a pattern to display the following

information of the pattern.

2 Vertical length of the pattern

3 Horizontal width of the pattern

4 Number of thread color changes

5, 6 If there is more than one page, touch or

until the desired page is displayed.

7 Touch to return to pattern type selection

screen to change category.

8 Touch to confirm the pattern, and move to the

pattern editing screen.

■ Changing the size of pattern keys

The size of pattern keys can be set to “Small”,

“Medium” or “Large”.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

“Medium” is selected.

1 “Small” pattern key size

1 “Large” pattern key size

Embroidery patterns

Touch .

→ The embroidery pattern categories appears.

Select an embroidery pattern category.

Touch the desired category.

→ The list of embroidery patterns appears.

Memo

• If there are multiple pages in the pattern list,

drag your finger up and down in the pattern

area to scroll through the pages.

152

Select an embroidery pattern.

Touch the desired pattern.

→ The selected pattern appears in the pattern display

area.

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired pattern.

Touch .

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Frame patterns

Touch .

→ The list of frame patterns appears.

From the upper tabs of the screen, select

the desired shape for the frame.

Touch the desired frame shape.

→ The available frame patterns appear in the lower

half of the screen.

Select a frame pattern.

Touch the desired pattern.

→ The selected pattern appears in the pattern display

area.

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired pattern.

Touch .

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

153

Monogram and frame designs

Monogram designs can be created by combining

two or three letters. Frame patterns are also

available for these types of designs.

Touch .

→ The design selection screen appears.

Select the monogram design.

Touch the button for the desired character style.

→ The text input screen appears.

• If 4 is selected, the frame pattern list appears. When

creating a pattern by combining letters with a frame, it

does not matter which of the two, the letters or the

frame, is selected first. The sewing order follows the

order in which the parts of the monogram are

selected. For this example, we will select the letters

first.

Select the characters.

Touch the tabs to select different character shapes, and

then touch the key for one letter on each tab.

* Since the shapes of the letters are the same with this

design, there are no tabs to select. On this screen,

select three letters.

1 Tabs

2 To change the character font, touch to

return to the design selection screen.

→ The selected characters appear in the text preview

area and the pattern display area.

1 Text preview area

2 Pattern display area

3 If the wrong character was selected or you wish to

select a different character, touch to delete

the last character selected, and then touch the

desired character.

4 Line feed key

123

Memo

• Depending on the design, there is a preset

number of letters; however, more than the

preset number of letters can be entered. If

too many letters are selected, touch

to delete the letters.

• If desired, multiple letters can be selected to

use these characters in the same way as

any other character pattern without creating

a monogram.

154

If necessary, edit the characters.

• For details on editing characters, refer to “Alphabet

patterns” on page 155.

1 Touch this key to change the size of the

characters.

2 Touch this key to change the text arrangement.

3 Touch this key to change the text alignment.

■ Changing the pattern size

After selecting the first character, touch until

the character is the desired size.

• The next character that is selected will have the new

character size.

• The character size of all entered characters cannot be

changed after the characters are combined. (The size

of the entire pattern can be changed from the pattern

editing screen.)

■ Selecting a character

A character can be selected in either the text

preview area or the pattern display area.

1 Directly select a character.

2 Touch and to move the cursor and select

a character.

Touch .

This confirms the character selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Next, we will combine the letters with a frame.

Touch .

→ The pattern type selection screen appears.

Touch .

→ The design selection screen appears.

Touch .

→ The list of frame patterns appears.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

155

Select a pattern.

Touch the desired pattern.

→ The selected frame pattern appears in the pattern

display area.

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired frame pattern.

Touch .

This confirms the frame selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Alphabet patterns

There are 37 built-in character fonts.

Example: Entering “Lucky Color”.

Touch .

→ The font selection screen appears.

Select a character font.

Touch the desired character font.

• Touch or for additional selections.

→ The text input screen appears.

Memo

• Due to size or shape, some frame patterns

cannot be used with the design.

• The frame patterns are just some of the

patterns that can be used. Character

patterns other than the 3-letter monogram

patterns can be used in the combination.

156

If the key for the character that you wish to

select is not displayed, touch the tab for the

desired set of characters.

1 Uppercase letters

2 Lowercase letters

3 Numbers/symbols

4 Accented characters

5 Touch this key to change the character font.

→ The text input screen for the characters shown on

the tab appears.

• To change the character font, touch

to return

to the font selection screen.

Enter “L”.

→ The selected characters appear in the text preview

area and the pattern display area

With the first character entered, touch

to change the size of the character.

1 Text preview area

2 Pattern display area

3 Touch this key to change the size.

• The next characters that are selected will have the

new character size.

• The character size of all entered characters cannot be

changed after the characters are combined. (The size

of the entire pattern can be changed from the pattern

editing screen.)

Note

• Size of the six small fonts

and cannot be changed. All

of these smaller fonts are shown on page

4/4 of the font selection screen.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

157

Touch and enter “ucky”.

1 If the wrong character was selected or you wish to

select a different character, touch to delete

the last character selected, and then touch the key

for the desired character. Each touch of

deletes the last character of the text.

2 Touch to enter a space.

Touch to enter a line feed.

Touch and enter “C”.

Touch and enter “olor”.

Even after text has been entered, characters

can be selected and edited (resized, etc.).

1 Directly select a character.

2 Touch and to move the cursor and select

a character.

After entering all of the text as desired,

touch .

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Memo

• The color of the text is set to black. To

change the color, refer to “Specifying multi-

color text” on page 184 and “Changing the

colors of the pattern” on page 185.

158

■ Changing the text arrangement

Touch to display the screen shown below.

Touch the key for the desired text arrangement.

After selecting the desired text arrangement, touch

to return to the text input screen.

• If the text is arranged using one of the text

arrangements on this screen, even more characters

can be entered.

■ Changing the text alignment

Touch to change the text alignment. Continue

pressing until the desired text alignment is

selected.

When the key displayed as , text is aligned to

the left.

When the key displayed as , text is aligned to

the center.

When the key displayed as , text is aligned to

the right.

Decorative alphabet patterns

Touch .

→ The list of decorative alphabet categories appears.

Select a decorative alphabet category.

Touch the desired category.

→ The list of the patterns in the selected category

appears.

Arranges the text on a straight line.

Arranges the text on the outside of a wide curve.

Arranges the text on the inside of a wide curve.

Arranges the text on a slanted line.

Arranges the text on the outside of a sharp curve.

Arranges the text on the inside of a sharp curve.

If text is arranged on a curve, each touch of this key

decreases the bend of the curve (makes it flatter).

If text is arranged on a curve, each touch of this key

increases the bend of the curve (makes it more

curved).

Memo

• If the text contains a line feed, changes to

the text arrangement are only applied to the

line containing the selected character.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

159

Select an embroidery pattern.

Touch the desired pattern.

→ The selected pattern appears in the pattern display

area.

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired pattern.

If necessary, edit the pattern.

1 Touch this key to flip the pattern horizontally.

Touch .

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

■ Appliqué alphabet

Touch .

→ The list of decorative alphabet categories appears.

Touch .

→ The list of appliqué alphabets appears.

160

Select an embroidery pattern.

Touch the desired pattern.

1 Touch this button to change the character size.

→ The selected pattern appears in the pattern display

area.

• If the wrong pattern was selected or you wish to select

a different pattern, touch the desired pattern.

Touch .

This confirms the pattern selection.

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Saving embroidery patterns in

the machine’s memory

You can save embroidery patterns that you have

customized and will use often; for example, your

name, patterns that have been rotated or had the

size changed, patterns that have had the

embroidering position changed, etc. A total of

about 10 MB of patterns can be saved in the

machine’s memory.

Touch when the pattern you want to

save is in the embroidering settings screen.

Touch .

* Touch to return to the original screen without

saving.

→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the

pattern is saved, the display returns to the original

screen automatically.

■ If the memory is full

If the screen below displays, either the maximum

number of patterns have been saved or the pattern

you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the

machine cannot save it. Press and delete a

previously saved pattern, then you can save the

current pattern. Refer to “Retrieving patterns from

the machine’s memory” on page 164.

Memo

• For details on sewing appliqués, refer to

“Sewing appliqué patterns” on page 240.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will

lose the pattern you are saving.

Memo

• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to

the machine’s memory.

• See page 164 for information on retrieving a

saved pattern.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

161

Saving embroidery patterns to

USB media/SD card

When sending embroidery patterns from the

machine to USB media/SD card, plug the USB

media/SD card into the machine’s USB port/SD

card slot.

Touch when the pattern you want to

save is displayed in the embroidery settings

screen.

Insert the USB media/SD card into the USB

port/SD card slot on the machine.

1 SD card slot

2 USB port

Touch , or .

* Touch to return to the original screen without

saving.

→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the

pattern is saved, the display returns to the original

screen automatically.

Saving embroidery patterns in

the computer

Using the included USB cable, the machine can

be connected to your computer, and the

embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved

from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in

your computer. An approximate of 10 MB of

embroidery patterns can be saved in the

“Removable Disk”, but the saved embroidery

patterns are deleted when the machine is turned

OFF.

For Computers and Operating Systems, refer to

“Connecting your machine to the PC” on

page 148.

Memo

• USB media is commercially available, but

some USB media may not be usable with

this machine. Please visit our website

( http://support.brother.com ) for more

details.

• Depending on the type of USB media being

used, either directly plug the USB device

into the machine’s USB port or plug the

USB media Reader/Writer into the

machine’s USB port.

• The USB media/SD card can be inserted or

removed at any time.

Note

• Do not insert anything other than USB

media into the USB media port. Otherwise,

the USB media drive may be damaged.

• Do not insert anything other than SD card

into the SD card slot. Otherwise, the SD

card slot may be damaged.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media/SD

card while “Saving…” screen is displayed.

You will lose some or all of the pattern you

are saving.

Note

• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the

“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will

lose the pattern you are saving.

162

Plug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine.

* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports

on the computer and embroidery machine whether

or not they are turned on.

1 USB port for computer

2 USB cable connector

→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in

“Computer (My Computer)” on the computer.

Turn on your computer and select

“Computer (My Computer)”.

Touch when the pattern you want to

save is in the embroidering screen.

Touch .

* Touch to return to the original screen without

saving.

→ The pattern will be temporarily saved to

“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My

Computer)”.

Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable

Disk” and copy the file to the computer.

Note

• The connectors on the USB cable can only

be inserted into a port in one direction. If it

is difficult to insert the connector, do not

insert it with force. Check the orientation of

the connector.

• For details on the position of the USB port

on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the

instruction manual for the corresponding

equipment.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

163

Connecting the USB using the

included USB cord clamps

When connecting the embroidery machine to a

computer, use the included USB cord clamps to

keep the cord away from the carriage.

Included cord clamps

Installation positions of the USB cord clamps

1 Front screw hole on the side of the machine

2 Rear screw hole on the side of the machine

Using the included Allen screwdriver,

remove the protective cap covering the

front screw on the side of the machine.

• Insert the end of the Allen screwdriver into the hole in

the protective cap, and then lightly pull out the

protective cap to remove it.

Open the USB cord clamp.

• With your fingernail, press on the tab to open the

clamp.

1 Tab

Hold the clip end of the USB cord clamp,

and then firmly insert the other end into the

screw hole where the protective cap was

removed.

As described in steps a through c,

remove the protective cap from the rear

screw hole on the side of the machine, and

then insert an opened USB cord clamp.

Note

• Do not insert the Allen screwdriver too far

into the hole in the protective cap;

otherwise, the machine or the Allen

screwdriver may be damaged.

164

Check that the USB cord clamps have been

firmly inserted into the front and rear screw

holes on the side of the machine.

• If the USB cord clamps are not firmly inserted into the

screw holes, they are not correctly installed. Firmly

insert the cord clamps into the screw holes.

Pass the USB cable through the front USB

cord clamp, and then close the clamp to

secure the cable.

Using the same operation described in step

e, secure the USB cable with the rear USB

cord clamp.

Arrange the USB cable between the USB

cord clamps so that the cable does not

interfere with the operation of the machine.

Retrieving patterns from the

machine’s memory

Press .

→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the

memory.

Touch the key of the pattern you want to

retrieve.

Note

• When passing the USB cable through the

clamp, do not insert it with excessive force;

otherwise, the clamp may break.

Memo

• Store the protective caps, which were

removed in step

a, in the included

accessory case so they will not be lost.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

165

Touch .

* Touch to delete the embroidery pattern.

→ The embroidering screen is displayed.

Recalling from USB media/SD

card

You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from

either direct USB media/SD card or a folder in the

USB media/SD card. If the pattern is in a folder,

check each folder to find the embroidery pattern.

Insert the USB media/SD card into the USB

port/SD card slot on the machine.

1 SD card slot

2 USB port

Touch , or .

→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are

displayed.

Touch when there is a subfolder to sort

two or more stitch patterns to USB media/

SD card, the embroidery pattern in the

subfolder is displayed.

1 Folder name

2 Embroidery patterns in USB media/SD card

3 Path

* The path to show the current folder at the top of the

list.

* Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder

are displayed.

* Press to return to the previous folder.

* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot

be created with the machine.

Note

• The processing speed may vary by quantity

of data.

166

Touch the key of the pattern you want to

retrieve.

* Touch to return to the original screen.

Touch .

* Touch to delete the pattern from the USB

media/SD card.

→ The Embroidery Edit screen is displayed.

Recalling from the computer

Refer to “Connecting your machine to the PC” on

page 148 for the available computer operating

systems.

Plug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine. (Refer to “Saving

embroidery patterns in the computer” on

page 161.)

On the computer, open “Computer (My

Computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.

Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable

Disk”.

→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the

machine.

Press .

→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the

selection screen.

Touch the key of the pattern you want to

recall.

Note

• While data is being written, do not

disconnect the USB cable.

• Do not create folders within “Removable

Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch

pattern data within folders cannot be

recalled.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

167

Touch .

* Touch to delete the pattern from the computer.

→ The Embroidery Edit screen is displayed.

■ With patterns larger than 200 mm

(H) × 360 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H)

× 14 inches (W))

When a pattern larger than 200 mm (H) × 360 mm

(W) (7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) is selected,

the following message appears.

Touch

to rotate the pattern 90 degrees before

opening it.

If the data is larger than 200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (7-

7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) even after it is rotated

90 degrees, the following message appears.

Touch to return to the pattern list screen.

■ If the desired pattern cannot be

recalled

When recalling pattern data from the computer, the

data is not taken directly from the computer.

Instead, the pattern data is temporarily written to the

machine, and that written pattern data is recalled. A

total of about 10 MB of embroidery patterns can be

saved in the “Removable Disk”. Pattern data cannot

be recalled if that data amount is exceeded.

1 Shows the amount of free space in the USB area

of the machine. If pattern data with this size is

added, it can be recalled (temporarily written).

To recall a pattern larger than the amount of space

available, delete any currently written patterns, and

then place the pattern that you wish to recall into

the folder.

Remove all unnecessary patterns from the

“Removable Disk” folder on the computer.

Select the pattern data, and then move it to a different

folder, the Recycle Bin, or right-click it and click

“Delete”.

Place the pattern that you wish to recall

into the “Removable Disk” folder.

→ After writing the data to the embroidery machine,

the key for that pattern appears in the screen.

If the desired pattern can still not be

written, repeat steps

a and b.

Memo

• Perform the same operation when a pattern

larger than 200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)) is

selected, whether from the computer or

USB media.

168

Saving embroidery patterns from

any memory source to another

memory

Embroidery patterns saved in the machine’s

memory, USB memory, SD card, or PC can be

transferred to each other.

On the home screen, press the key you

want to retrieve/recall from.

Touch the key of the pattern you want to

save.

Touch .

Choose the memory you want to save.

→ Embroidery pattern is saved.

Note

• Design will be displayed on screen.

Note

• When saving the embroidery pattern to USB

media/SD card, the pattern is saved in the

“bPocket” folder.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

169

This machine is compatible with the Link function. This function allows embroidery patterns edited in

embroidery editing software provided with the Link function, such as PE-DESIGN NEXT or later, to be

transferred from a computer to multiple embroidery machines. As many as 100 embroidery patterns can

be transferred to an embroidery machine, and the embroidering status of the patterns being transferred

can be viewed from the computer monitor.

Use the included USB cable to connect the embroidery machine to a computer.

Operations available with the Link function

■ Send multiple embroidery patterns to connected embroidery machines

■ Check the sewing status of the embroidery machine (this model) from the

computer

(Example of multiple machines connected)

Sending Embroidery Patterns From a Computer to the

Machine (Link Function)

Memo

• When connecting multiple embroidery

machines to the computer, use a

commercially available USB hub.

Please note that we recommend you to use

a self-powered USB hub. Do not use USB

extension cables or repeater cables. For

details on using the USB hub, refer to its

operating instructions.

170

Embroidering using the Link

function

First, use the embroidery editing software to create

the embroidery pattern to be sent to the

embroidery machine.

Touch , and then touch and to

display page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch to enable the Link function.

→ When the following message appears, touch .

Turn off the machine.

Use the included USB cable to connect the

embroidery machine to the computer.

• When connecting the embroidery machine to the

computer, be sure to use the included USB cord

clamps. For details on using the USB cord clamps,

refer to page 163.

Turn on the machine.

Using embroidery editing software

provided with the Link function, such as PE-

DESIGN NEXT or later from a computer,

send the embroidery pattern to the machine

in the Link mode.

Note

• Embroidery data in the PES format (.pes)

and the PEN format (.pen) can be

embroidered using the Link function.

• The Link function cannot be used with

large-size (split) embroidery patterns or

embroidery patterns for the jumbo frame

(optional).

• Attach to the embroidery machine the

embroidery frame for the size of the pattern

to be sent.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

171

When the following message appears, touch

→ A message appears in the machine’s LCD while the

machine is connecting to PC.

Note

• For details on using the embroidery editing

software, refer to the Instruction Manual

included with it.

* This Link dialog box is found in PE-DESIGN NEXT

software.

• If the following error message appears, the

type of embroidery frame installed on the

machine is not compatible with the size of

the pattern. Replace the embroidery frame

with one compatible with the size of the

pattern.

172

After the embroidery pattern has been

opened by the machine, the embroidering

screen appears.

→ The opened embroidery pattern appears in the

pattern display area with the icon for the Link

function.

1 Icon for Link function

2 10-digit machine ID

3 Number of the pattern in the queue

• Touch to delete the pattern.

To change the embroidering settings for the

opened embroidery pattern, touch .

• Touch when the following message appears.

Touch to return to the embroidering screen.

→ The embroidering settings screen appears.

After the desired settings have been

specified, touch to return to the

embroidering screen.

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering.

→ When embroidering is finished, the following

message appears.

Memo

• While the embroidery machine is connected

to the computer, the machine’s status can

be displayed by using a function of the

embroidery editing software. If multiple

embroidery machines are connected at the

same time, check the status of the

machines using the 10-digit machine ID that

appears in the machine’s screen. The

following information can be viewed from

the computer.

• Number of the stitch being sewn and total

number of stitches in the pattern

• Information on sewing errors

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

173

To open another pattern sent from the

computer, touch , and then repeat the

procedure starting from step

h to continue

embroidering.

To stop embroidering or to embroider the same pattern

again, touch .

Disabling the Link function

Touch , and then touch and to

display page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch to disable the Link function.

→ When the following message appears, touch .

Turn off the machine.

Note

• The embroidering screen settings specified

in step

j are saved even if was

touched to continue sewing after

embroidering is finished.

Memo

• If the embroidery machine is turned off

while it is embroidering, the resume

operation can be used the next time it is

turned on.

174

The patterns can be edited from the pattern editing screen and the embroidering settings screen.

Individual patterns can be edited with the pattern editing screen, and the entire pattern can be edited with

the embroidering settings screen. The results of editing the pattern can be seen in the pattern display area.

Enlarge the pattern image on the

screen

The pattern can be displayed enlarged to a

maximum of double its normal size.

Touch .

→ The enlarged pattern image is displayed on the

screen.

Each touch of switches the enlargement

ratio to 125%, 150% or 200%.

• Touch , , and on the pattern display

area to view the hidden area of the pattern.

To return the pattern to its normal size,

continue pressing until the enlargement

ratio is 100%.

Combining patterns

Various patterns, such as embroidery patterns,

frame patterns, built-in alphabet patterns and

patterns on embroidery cards, can easily be

combined.

Touch .

→ The pattern type selection screen appears again.

• Touch in the pattern type selection screen, if

you no longer want to combine patterns. The pattern

editing screen will then appear. This key is not

available unless a pattern has been previously

selected.

Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen)

Memo

• The pattern display area can be moved

even if a blank area is touched and moved.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

175

Select an embroidery pattern.

Select the pattern to be added as described on

page 150 to 167.

• When another pattern is selected, it is normally added

at the center of the pattern display area.

Repeat steps a and b until all patterns to

be combined are selected.

Selecting the pattern to be edited

If multiple patterns are selected, you can choose

which pattern will be edited.

Touch or .

The pattern that will be edited is the pattern enclosed

by the red frame.

Continue touching and until the red frame is

around the pattern that you wish to edit.

→ The patterns are selected in the order or the opposite

order that they were added to the pattern.

1 Red frame indicating the pattern to be edited.

■ Selecting multiple patterns at the

same time

Multiple patterns can easily be edited, for example,

when moving patterns that are combined, if they are

all selected together.

Touch .

→ The Multiple Selection screen appears.

Memo

• The position of individual patterns and other

editing operations can be performed from

the pattern editing screen. The editing

operations can be performed in the same

way from the pattern editing screen whether

it is displayed as each pattern is selected or

after all patterns that you wish to combine

have been selected.

Memo

• If multiple patterns appear in the pattern

editing screen, the basic editing procedure

is to 1. select the pattern to be edited, and

then 2. edit that pattern.

176

Select the multiple patterns by dragging

your finger in the screen to create a box

around the desired patterns.

Touch to return to the pattern editing

screen.

• The multiple selected patterns are surrounded with a

red box.

Grouping multiple selected

patterns

If the multiple patterns selected in “Selecting

multiple patterns at the same time” on page 175

are grouped, they can be edited as a single pattern.

Touch so that it changes to .

→ The selected patterns are grouped.

• Touch to ungroup the patterns. If there are

multiple grouped patterns, the selected pattern group

is ungrouped.

Moving a pattern

Determine where in the embroidery frame the

pattern will be embroidered. If multiple patterns

are combined, move each pattern to lay out the

design.

Touch the key for the direction where you

wish to move the pattern.

→ The pattern moves in the direction of the arrow on

the key.

Memo

• Multiple patterns can be selected or

deselected from the multiple selection

screen. Touch or to check the

patterns to be selected, and then touch

The selected pattern is surrounded with a

red box.

• Touch to select all patterns in the

pattern display area.

• Touch to deselect all selected patterns.

• The patterns can also be selected by touching

them in the screen.

• While the Multiple Selection screen is

displayed, patterns can be moved with .

The displayed

patterns are grouped.

The selected pattern

group is ungrouped.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

177

1 Shows the vertical distance moved from center.

2 Shows the horizontal distance moved from center.

• To return the pattern to its position before it was

moved (center of the embroidery frame), touch .

The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.

If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to

position the pointer on the desired pattern, and then

hold in the left mouse button while dragging the

pattern. The pattern can also be dragged by selecting it

directly in the screen with your finger or the touch

pen.

Flipping a pattern horizontally

Touch so that it changes to .

→ The pattern is flipped horizontally.

• Each touch of the key turns the setting either on or off.

Memo

• If you wish to group combined patterns,

refer to “Grouping multiple selected

patterns” on page 176.

Memo

• The pattern can also be moved by touching

the arrow keys in the screens that appear

when any of the other editing keys are

touched.

• The arrow keys in the embroidering settings

screen are used to move the frame to select

the embroidering position.

• The pattern can also be moved to the

desired position by dragging it with your

finger.

Horizontal flip

turned off

Flipped horizontally

178

Changing the size of a pattern

(Normal resizing mode)

The size of the pattern can be increased or

decreased to between 90% and 120% of its

original size.

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

• The pattern rotation handle appears in the screen. The

pattern can be rotated while it is being resized. For

details on rotating the pattern, refer to “Adjusting the

angle” on page 99.

If is not selected, touch .

If a new pattern is selected, is selected. Simply

continue with step

Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the

desired size.

Each touch of a key slightly enlarges or reduces the

pattern.

The size of the pattern is displayed after a key is

touched to change it.

1 Vertical length

2 Horizontal width

• The size that the pattern can be enlarged depending

on the pattern or character.

• Depending on the pattern or character, if it is rotated

90 degrees it may be enlarged even more.

• If the pattern is rotated, the vertical and horizontal

directions may be reversed.

• To return the pattern to its original size, touch

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the pattern.

(For more details, refer to page 176.)

Example: Original angle

Reduces without changing the height-

to-width proportion.

Reduces only in the vertical direction.

Reduces only in the horizontal

direction.

Enlarges without changing the height-

to-width proportion.

Enlarges only in the vertical direction.

Enlarges only in the horizontal

direction.

Normal resizing mode

Enlarges/reduces without changing the number of

stitches.

Stitch Recalculator mode

Enlarges/reduces while thread density is

maintained.

Selects a pattern to be resized.

Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on

the key.

Touch this key to return the pattern to its original

size.

Closes the screen.

Available only with character patterns.

Touch this key to switch the size of the character

pattern.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

179

After making the desired changes, touch

→ The pattern editing screen appears again.

Changing the pattern size while

maintaining the desired thread

density (stitch recalculator)

In the embroidery edit screen, the size of the

pattern can be changed while the desired thread

density is maintained.

With this function, the pattern will be enlarged or

reduced at a larger ratio than with normal pattern

resizing.

Press .

→ The following screen is displayed. (Refer to

page 178)

Press to enter Stitch Recalculator

mode ( ).

When the following message appears, touch

→ The pattern will be returned to its original size,

angle, and position as it was before it was edited.

Select how to change the pattern size.

(Refer to page 178.)

CAUTION

• After changing the size of the pattern, check

the icons for the embroidery frames that can

be used and use only the indicated frames. If a

frame other than those indicated are used, the

presser foot may hit the embroidery frame and

cause injuries.

Note

• Patterns with a large number of stitches

(about 100,001 or more) cannot be resized

while maintaining a desired thread density.

The maximum limit for the number of

stitches differs depending on the data size

of pattern.

• If this function is used, thread density is

maintained while the pattern is enlarged/

reduced. However, the needle drop point

pattern is not entirely maintained. Use the

normal resizing mode depending on

the results of trial embroidering.

Memo

• Stitch Recalculator cannot be used if

does not appear.

180

Touch .

Rotating a pattern

The pattern can be rotated in either direction to

the desired angle.

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

• For details on each key, refer to “Adjusting the angle”

on page 99.

Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the

desired angle.

Each touch of a key rotates the pattern.

1 Shows the angle of the pattern after a key is

touched to change it.

• To return the pattern to its original angle, touch

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the pattern.

(For more details, refer to page 176.)

Memo

• In Stitch Recalculator mode, the pattern can

be reduced/enlarged between 60% and

120%.

• With the density scale bar, the thread

density can be changed.

A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%

increments can be specified.

1 Touch to make the pattern less dense.

2 Touch to make the pattern more dense.

Note

• Depending on the pattern, embroidering

may not be possible at the appropriate

thread density. Before sewing on your

project, be sure to embroider a trial sample

on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same

as the fabric used in the project, using the

same needle and embroidery thread.

• If the pattern is enlarged and there is space

between stitches, a better effect can be

achieved by increasing the thread density.

• If the pattern is reduced and the stitching is

too thick, a better effect can be achieved by

reducing the thread density.

CAUTION

• Depending on the pattern, the stitching may

become entangled or the needle may break when

the pattern is reduced. If this occurs, slightly

enlarge the pattern.

• After changing the size of the pattern, check the

icons for the embroidery frames that can be used

and use only the indicated frames. If a frame other

than those indicated are used, the presser foot may

hit the embroidery frame and cause injuries.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

181

After making the desired changes, touch

→ The pattern editing screen appears again.

Changing the text arrangement of

a character

Characters can be arranged on a horizontal line,

on a slant or on an arc.

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

• For details on each key, refer to “Changing the text

arrangement” on page 158.

Touch the key of the desired text

arrangement.

After selecting the desired text

arrangement, the bend of the curve can be

adjusted. If necessary, touch and

to adjust the bend of the curve.

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the pattern.

(For more details, refer to page 176.)

After making the desired changes, touch

→ The pattern editing screen appears again.

Changing the character spacing

The spacing between the characters can be made

wider or narrower.

Touch .

→ The character spacing screen appears.

CAUTION

• After changing the angle of the pattern, check

the icons for the embroidery frames that can

be used and use only the indicated frames. If a

frame other than those indicated are used, the

presser foot may hit the embroidery frame and

cause injuries.

Memo

• If in the embroidering settings screen

is used, the entire combined pattern can be

rotated. (For details, refer to “Rotating the

entire pattern” on page 201.)

• If the pattern is too large or the pattern is

too close to the edge of the embroidery

field, all of the rotating options may not

apply.

Memo

• When selecting , and

change to and . You can

increase or decrease the incline.

Memo

• The text arrangement specified when the

character was selected on page 158 can be

changed at this point.

182

Touch the keys to adjust the characters to

the desired spacing.

Each touch of a key slightly increases or decreases the

character spacing.

1 Increases the space between characters equally.

2 Decreases the space between characters equally.

3 Selects the standard character spacing (original

character spacing).

4 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on

the key.

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the pattern.

(For more details, refer to page 176.)

After making the desired changes, touch

Separating combined character

patterns

Combined character patterns can be separated to

adjust the character spacing or to separately edit

the patterns after all character have been entered.

Touch .

→ The following screen is displayed.

Use to select where the pattern is to

be separated, and then touch to

separate it. For this example, the pattern

will be separated between “T” and “a”.

Use and to select a pattern, and

then use to adjust the character

spacing.

Touch .

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

183

Trimming the threads between

characters

If the machine is set to trim the threads between

the characters, the jump stitches between the

characters are reduced and any other necessary

procedures after embroidering are reduced.

However, the embroidering time will increase if

the threads are trimmed between each of the

characters.

Touch so that it changes to .

• Each touch of the key turns the setting either on or off.

Combining the separated

character patterns

Two separated lines of character patterns can be

combined. The characters can be aligned to the

specified order. You cannot combine the lines of

character patterns if the text contains a line feed

using the Line Feed function.

Touch .

→ The following screen is displayed.

Select the group of character patterns that

you want to combine.

• You can select the patterns by touching them on the

screen, or touching or to check the patterns

to be selected, and then touch .

→ Numbers 1 and 2 are assigned temporarily to the

patterns.

Touch or to choose the order of

the 2 patterns.

Threads are not

trimmed.

Threads are

trimmed.

Memo

• The selected character is assigned as

Number 1.

184

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

Specifying multi-color text

The alphabet pattern characters selected on

page 155 are set to black. The color of the

characters can be changed using the change

thread color key; however, to change the color of

individual characters, touch the Multi Color key to

turn it on, and then specify the color for each

character.

Touch so that it changes to .

• Each touch of the key turns the setting either on or off.

• For details on changing the thread color, refer to

“Changing the colors of the pattern” on page 185.

Changing the character font

In the pattern editing screen, the font used in the

selected pattern can be changed.

Touch .

Use to select the character pattern

whose font is to be changed, and then select

the desired font.

Touch .

Changing the font and size of

individual characters

The font and size of individual characters in a

character pattern can be changed.

Touch .

Touch to select the individual

character to be edited.

Multi-color text

turned off

Multi-color text

turned on

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

185

Select a character size below to

change the character to the desired size.

Touch , and then select the desired

font.

Touch .

Changing the thread density (only

for selected character and frame patterns)

The thread density for some character and frame

patterns can be changed.

A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%

increments can be specified.

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

1 Selects a less thread density

2 Selects a more thread density

3 Touch this key to close this screen.

■ Selects a less/more thread density

Touch the keys to select the desired thread

density.

Each touch of a key slightly increases or decreases the

thread density.

• To return to the original thread density (standard),

select “100%”.

After making the desired changes, touch

→ The pattern editing screen appears again.

Changing the colors of the

pattern

The colors of the pattern can be changed and

previewed on the screen.

By changing the colors of the pattern, the same

pattern can be viewed in various ways.

If your thread colors are registered in a color

thread table and if you used the table for changing

color, the thread spools can be assigned with the

thread colors that you have. And the pattern

displayed in the screen will appear with colors that

are almost the same as the actual thread colors.

With this operation, the colors of all patterns will

be changed, not just those of the pattern being

edited.

Less Standard More

186

Touch .

→ The 64 embroidery threads table screen appears.

1 The thread color surrounded with a blue box in the

thread color sequence display is the color that is

being changed.

2 Shows the number of thread color changes. The

top value shows the position in the sewing order

for the color at the top of the thread color

sequence display and the bottom value shows the

total number of thread color changes.

3 Using the Color Shuffling function. Select the

desired color scheme from the new suggested

color schemes to change the overall tone of the

pattern. (Refer to “Find new color schemes with

the color shuffling function” on page 187.)

4 Selects the previous color in the thread color

sequence display.

5 Thread color table

Select a color from this table.

6 Use these keys to select a color from the thread

color table.

7 Selects the next color in the thread color

sequence display.

8 Touch this key after selecting a color.

9 Touch this key to return to the original color.

From the thread color sequence display,

select the thread color whose color is to be

changed.

• If the desired thread color is not displayed, use the

scroll bar on the right side to display it.

1 Scroll bar

Touch , , and , or directly

touch the desired color, to select the new

color from the color palette.

1 The color that appears enlarged is the color that is

selected.

2 Displays the name of the selected thread color

→ In the pattern display area, the color of the selected

part of the pattern is changed.

Memo

• The part of the pattern whose thread color

is to be changed can be directly selected in

the pattern.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

187

Touch .

→ The color change is confirmed.

→ The pattern editing screen appears again.

Find new color schemes with the

color shuffling function

■ The Color Shuffling function

With the Color Shuffling function, the machine

suggests new color schemes for the embroidery

pattern that you have selected. After you select the

desired effect from one of the four available color

schemes (“Random”, “Vivid”, “Gradient” and “Soft”)

the sample for the selected effect is displayed.

Press .

→ The change thread color screen appears.

Press .

Select the color group you want to use.

→ You can select the color shuffling function from the

following color groups. 1 Thread colors currently

on the spool stand, 2 thread table (64 colors: preset

color table) and 3 custom thread table (300 colors:

color table that you can set as you like).

By setting the embroidery thread colors of the brand

you have on the custom thread table, you can create

your embroidery pattern with your own thread

colors.

Memo

• The color thread table can be changed to a

custom thread table that you create to

reflect the thread colors that you have.

(Refer to “Creating a custom thread table”

on page 195.)

Note

• This function may not be available

depending on the pattern you select (ex. a

bordered embroidery pattern).

If the color shuffling key is grayed out,

select another pattern.

• If you have not created a custom thread

table, the color shuffling key will be grayed

out. In that case, use the thread table (64

colors) instead or create colors in the

custom thread table. Refer to “Creating a

custom thread table” on page 195

188

Select the number of colors you want to use

and then select the desired effect.

1 Number of colors to be used in the pattern

2 Effects for schemes

• When “Random” or “Gradient” is selected, follow the

instructions under “When “Random” or “Gradient” is

selected” on page 189.

Press the desired color scheme from

samples.

* Touch to display the new schemes.

1 Touch to review the previous schemes after

touching .

Press to select the displayed color

scheme.

* Touch to return to the previous screen.

* You can continue selecting color schemes from the

selected page prior to touching .

* Touch or to display the other color schemes.

→ The change thread color screen appears again.

Note

• You cannot select more thread colors than

the number in the selected color group.

Memo

• Selection for the desired number of colors

must stay within the range for the number of

thread changes for the pattern you

selected.

• When using this function the PES data

pattern recalled on the machine, and the

“PES Thread Code” is set to “ON” in the

Settings Screen, the thread colors which

are not in the thread table of the machine

will not be used to make the color schemes.

You can get the color schemes using all the

thread colors in the selected pattern by

setting “PES Thread Code” to “OFF” in the

Settings Screen. (Refer to “Selecting the

thread color information for “PES” format

data” on page 226.)

Note

• Maximum 10 pages of schemes can be

reviewed. After 10 pages of schemes, the

oldest page is deleted every time you touch

Note

• The following settings in the settings screen

cannot be changed in this function;

• Thread color brand selection

• Reserved needle setting

• “PES Thread Code” setting

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

189

■ When “Random” or “Gradient” is

selected

Touch to select the desired thread

palette mode.

→ If the thread colors to be used will not be selected,

select “Auto”.

With “Random”

Up to six thread colors can be pinned.

A random color scheme will be created from the

pinned colors.

1 Select the thread colors from the palette.

2 The selected thread colors appear in the list.

3 Push pins appear on the colors used in the color

scheme. Touch the pinned color twice, to unpin

the unwanted color.

With “Gradient”

Only one thread color can be selected.

A gradient will be created with the selected color.

1 Select the thread color from the palette.

2 The selected thread color appear in the list.

3 A push pin appears on the color used in the color

scheme. Touch the pinned color twice, to unpin

the unwanted color.

Touch .

→ The sample image is displayed with the created

color scheme.

• Continue with step

e on page 188.

190

Thread color sorting

You can embroider while replacing the thread

spool a minimal number of times.

Before starting to embroider, touch in the

embroidering settings screen to rearrange the

embroidery order and sort it by thread colors.

Embroidery screen

Embroidering settings screen

Embroidery screen

The embroidery color order is rearranged and

sorted by thread colors.

Touch to cancel the color sorting and

embroider with the embroidery color order.

Designing repeated patterns

Using the border function, you can create stitches

using repeated patterns.

Touch .

Note

• This function does not work on overlapping

designs.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

191

Select the direction in which the pattern

will be repeated.

1 Horizontal direction

2 Vertical direction

3 Repeating and deleting horizontal keys

4 Repeating and deleting vertical keys

5 Spacing keys

→ The pattern direction indicator will change

depending on the direction selected.

Use to repeat the pattern on left and

to repeat the pattern at the right.

• To delete the left pattern, touch .

• To delete the right pattern, touch .

Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.

• To widen spacing, touch .

• To tighten spacing, touch .

1 Touch to change a repeated pattern back

to one single pattern.

Complete repeated patterns by repeating

steps

b through d.

After making the desired changes, touch

The pattern editing screen appears again.

Memo

• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns

included in the red frame.

Memo

• When there are two or more patterns, all

patterns will be grouped together as one

pattern in the red frame.

• When changing the direction in which the

pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns

in the red frame will automatically be

grouped as one repeating unit. See the

following section on how to repeat one

element of a repeated pattern.

192

■ Repeating one element of a repeated

pattern

By using the Cut function, you can select one

element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that

single element. This function allows you to design

complex repeated patterns.

Choose the direction in which the repeated

pattern will be cut.

• Touch to cut horizontally.

• Touch to cut vertically.

→ The pattern direction indicator will change

depending on the direction selected.

Use and to select the cut line.

→ The cut line will move.

Touch .

→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate

elements.

Touch .

Use and to select the element to

repeat.

Repeat the selected element.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

193

After making the desired changes, touch

The pattern editing screen appears again.

■ Assigning thread marks

By sewing thread marks, you can easily align

patterns when sewing a series. When sewing is

finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape of

an arrow will be sewn using the final thread. When

sewing a series of patterns, use the point of this

arrow for positioning the following designs to be

sewn.

Touch .

Touch to select the thread mark to be

sewn.

1 Touch to cancel thread mark setting.

Touch .

■ Embroidering the pattern repeatedly

After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the

embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next

pattern.

Note

• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into

separate elements, you cannot return to the

original repeated pattern.

• Each element can be edited separately in

the edit screen. Refer to “Selecting the

pattern to be edited” on page 175.

Memo

• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,

thread marks can be sewn around the

perimeter of the pattern only.

Memo

• When there are two or more elements, use

and or and to select a

pattern that you want to assign a thread

mark(s) to.

Note

• If the combined border pattern is rotated in

the embroidering settings screen, the

thread mark will be removed.

Memo

• The optional border frame allows you to

easily rehoop the fabric without removing

the embroidery frame from the machine.

194

Create the repeated pattern with the thread

mark at the center of the end of the pattern.

Refer to “Assigning thread marks” on page 193.

Touch , then .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering.

→ When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is

sewn with the last thread color.

Remove the embroidery frame.

Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.

Attach the embroidery frame to the

machine, and then touch in the

embroidering settings screen.

Touch to set the starting point to the left

side of the pattern.

Touch .

• To adjust the embroidering position without using the

built-in-camera, refer to “Changing the Embroidering

Position” on page 98.

Touch to display the needle drop point.

Note

• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the

embroidering area for the next pattern is

within the embroidering area of the

embroidery sheet.

1 Pattern embroidered first

2 Position of pattern to be embroidered next

3 Embroidering area of embroidery sheet

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

195

Touch the positioning keys to move the

embroidery frame until the thread mark on

the fabric is aligned on the needle drop

point in the camera view window.

1 Thread mark on the fabric

2 Positioning keys

• Touch to check the embroidering position.

If the pattern position cannot be aligned

using the positioning keys, rehoop the

fabric, and then try again to align the

position with the positioning keys.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

Remove the thread mark.

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering.

Creating a custom thread table

You can create a custom thread table containing

the thread colors that you most often use. You can

select thread colors offered by the machine’s

extensive list of thread colors from nine different

thread brands. You can select any color and move

the color to your custom thread table.

Before creating a custom thread table, select a

pattern and display the pattern editing screen.

(Refer to page 45 and 73.)

Touch and then touch .

Memo

• Touch to enlarge the camera view. By

enlarging the camera view, you can make a

close adjustment for the needle drop

position moving the embroidery frame little

by little.

Note

• After you have aligned the position of the

combined border pattern, do not rotate the

pattern in the embroidering settings screen.

If the pattern is rotated in the embroidering

settings screen, you cannot sew the pattern

properly aligned even if the thread mark and

the starting point are aligned in the camera

view window.

Note

• Some machine models may already have an

additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors

contained in the custom thread table.

• You have the option to completely clear, or

to restore the Custom Thread Table to the

original factory setting. Visit our website at

“ http://support.brother.com ” for Custom

Thread Table Clear/Restore Program and

instructions.

196

Use to choose where to add

a color on the custom thread table.

• You can choose color box from the custom thread

from the custom thread table by directly touching the

screen.

• You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using

and on the custom thread table.

1 Custom thread table

Use to select one of the thread

brands in the machine.

Use

to enter a color’s 4-digit number.

• If you make a mistake, touch to erase the

entered number, and then enter the correct number.

1 Entered thread color number

2 Thread brand

Touch .

1 Selected thread color

→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread

table.

Note

• If is not touched, the thread color

number will not be changed.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

197

Repeat the previous steps until all desired

thread colors are specified.

• To delete a specified thread color from the palette,

touch .

• To delete all specified thread colors from the palette,

touch .

Touch to return to the original

screen.

■ Adding a color to the custom thread

table from the list

Repeat the previous step a on page 195.

Touch to display the thread list.

Use to select a thread color.

1 Thread list

2 Thread brand

Touch .

Repeat the previous steps until all desired

thread colors are specified.

• To delete a specified color from the palette, touch

Touch to return to the original

screen.

Choosing a color from the

custom thread table

You can select a color from the up to 300 thread

colors you have set in the custom thread table.

Touch .

→ The 64 embroidery threads table screen displays.

Touch .

1 Custom thread change key

→ The custom thread (300 embroidery threads) table

screen will appear.

Note

• When setting up custom thread table, touch

, , or or touch the next

square directly to set the next color after

each selection. Machine will not advance to

the next square automatically.

Note

• When setting up custom thread table, touch

, , or or touch the next

square directly to set the next color after

each selection. Machine will not advance to

the next square automatically.

198

Touch to choose a new color

from the custom thread table.

• Use and to scroll through the custom thread

table.

• Touch to return to the original color.

• You can choose colors from the custom thread (300

embroidery threads) table by directly touching the

screen.

1 Shows the number of thread color changes. The

top value shows the position in the sewing order

for the color selected in the thread color sequence

display, and the bottom value shows the total

number of thread color changes.

2 The part of the pattern in the thread color

surrounded with a blue box in the thread color

sequence display is the part whose color is being

changed.

3 Moves to the previous color in the thread color

sequence display.

4 Color thread table

Select a color from this table.

5 Use these arrows to navigate the color selection

within the color thread table.

6 Touch this key to return to the original color.

7 Moves to the next color in the thread color

sequence display.

→ The display shows the changed colors.

Touch .

Saving and recalling the custom

thread table using USB media

You can save a custom thread table data file to

USB media, and then you can recall the saved

data from USB media again.

■ Saving the custom thread table in

USB media

Insert the USB media into the USB port on

the right side of the machine.

For details on connecting USB media, refer to

“Using USB media” on page 82.

1 USB port

2 USB media

Touch and then touch .

Press .

Note

• Custom thread table data can only be saved

to USB media. You cannot save the data in

the machine’s memory or in the computer.

• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”

data file.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

199

Touch , and then select the port where

the data is to be saved.

→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the data

is saved, the display returns to the original screen

automatically.

■ Recalling the custom thread table in

USB media

Insert the USB media containing the custom

thread table data into the USB port for

media.

Touch and then touch .

Touch .

→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the data

is loaded to the machine, the display returns to the

original screen automatically.

Duplicating a pattern

Touch .

→ The duplicate appears, overlapping the original

pattern as well as offset downward and to the right.

1 Duplicated pattern

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will

lose some or all of the data you are saving.

Note

• You can only recall one custom thread table

data at a time. Do not store two or more

“.pcp” data file in USB media.

Note

• Do not insert or remove USB media while

“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will

lose some or all of the data you are saving.

• To delete all the specified colors from the

custom thread palette, touch .

200

Deleting a pattern

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

Touch .

→ The pattern is deleted.

• To quit deleting the pattern, touch .

Note

• If multiple patterns are displayed, only the

pattern selected will be deleted.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

201

In the embroidering settings screen, a single pattern can be edited if patterns were not combined or an

entire combined pattern can be edited as a single pattern.

In addition, the arrow keys can be used to move the pattern in the pattern editing screen or move the

embroidery frame in the embroidering settings screen. Touching these keys moves the embroidery frame.

Rotating the entire pattern

The entire pattern can be rotated.

Touch .

→ The screen shown below appears.

1 Enables the entire pattern to be rotated.

2 Enables the embroidery frame to be moved.

3 Select the speed to move the frame. (For more

details, refer to page 98.)

4 Touch this key to close this screen.

Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the

desired angle.

(For more details, refer to page 180.)

If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust

the position of the embroidery frame.

(For more details, refer to page 99.)

After making the desired changes, touch

→ The embroidering settings screen appears again.

Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings

Screen)

202

In this section, we will combine text with floral alphabet pattern, which we will then edit.

Example)

Touch .

Select .

→ This pattern will be positioned at the center of the

embroidery area.

To select the pattern, touch .

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Touch .

→ The pattern type selection screen appears again.

Editing a Combined Pattern

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

203

Touch .

Type “ood”.

Touch the tab for lowercase letters to display the

lowercase letters input screen, and then touch “o”,

“o”, then “d”.

→ The selected letters appear at the center of the

embroidery area.

• To change the size of the pattern, select “o”, and then

touch to select the desired size.

• To change the text arrangement, touch , and

then select the desired text arrangement.

Type to enter a line feed.

Type “Luck”.

Touch to align the text to the left.

After selecting the characters, touch .

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

204

Touch / / and adjust the position of

the letters so that they are well balanced.

Check the balance of the entire pattern,

and, if you wish to edit the pattern, touch

and to select the pattern to be

edited.

If a USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be

selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position the

pointer over the desired pattern, and then click the left

mouse button. In addition, patterns can be selected by

directly touching the screen with your finger or touch

pen.

Example: To reduce size.

Touch and to move the red frame

around .

Touch .

Touch to reduce the pattern

proportionately.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

205

After reducing the pattern, touch to

return to the pattern editing screen.

• To adjust other parts of the pattern, touch and

again, and then adjust the pattern as desired.

• If it is difficult to view the text and the pattern, touch

to enlarge the pattern and then touch ,

, or to preview.

After finishing all editing, touch and

then .

→ The embroidering settings screen appears.

• To return to the pattern editing screen and continue

editing the pattern, touch .

Memo

• Touch to group this combined pattern.

(Refer to “Grouping multiple selected

patterns” on page 176.)

206

Instead of using thread marks, the camera can be used to connect patterns.

An area of 17 cm × 33 cm (6-1/2 inches × 13 inches) can be embroidered when the camera is used to

connect patterns. Select the appropriate frame depending on the size of the embroidery. We recommend

using the large embroidery frame (200 mm × 360 mm (7-7/8 inches × 14 inches)) when using the camera

to connect patterns.

Connecting three patterns

Example:

1 Pattern A

2 Pattern B

3 Pattern C

Select the first pattern A, and then touch

Hoop fabric in the large embroidery frame

(13 cm × 18 cm (5-1/8 inches × 7-1/8

inches)), and then attach the frame to the

embroidery machine.

Press to display the embroidering

settings screen. Touch in the

embroidering settings screen.

• needs to be selected in order to continue

connecting patterns.

→ appears at the bottom left side of the screen,

and then changes to .

Using the Camera to Connect Patterns

Note

• When installing the embroidery frame

(small) (40 mm × 60 mm (1-1/2 inches ×

2-3/8 inches), cap frames, cylinder frame,

sleeve frame, clamp frames, name frame or

the round frames, you can not connect

patterns using this function.

• Split (Large-size) embroidery patterns

cannot be used with this function.

• You can not connect patterns using this

function while the machine is set to the Link

mode.

Memo

• A pattern cannot be saved in the machine’s memory

while patterns are being connected.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

207

Touch , then touch and then

press the start/stop button to embroider the

first pattern.

After embroidering of the first pattern is

finished, the following message appears.

Touch .

When the following message appears, touch

→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move

after pressing .

Select the second pattern B for practicing,

then touch .

Press , and then select how the

pattern will be connected.

→ The pattern connection setting screen appears.

Touch the position for the second pattern

will be connected on the screen, and then

touch . In this example, touch the right

side of the first pattern.

• You can adjust the position of the second pattern,

using the keys described below.

208

1 Touch the connecting area

2 Second pattern B

3 First pattern A

4 Touch to move the second pattern.

→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move

after pressing .

Prepare two embroidery positioning

stickers. We will follow the on-screen

instructions to affix these two stickers to the

fabric so that the positioning marks can be

detected by the camera.

Affix the first embroidery positioning

sticker onto the fabric within the red lines

by using both hands to press down on each

corner of the sticker. Affix the sticker with

the large circle to the top as shown on

machine. Then, touch .

→ The camera detects the first positioning sticker.

Press to rotate the second pattern in a

clockwise arc referring the first pattern as a

center.

Press to rotate the second pattern in a

counterclockwise arc referring the first

pattern as a center.

Press to rotate the second pattern 90

degrees in a clockwise arc.

Note

• The second pattern will be automatically

connected to the first pattern without

adjustment. Change the position of the

second pattern manually using .

• The position of the second pattern can be

moved using your finger or the included

touch pen.

• Use , or if you want to align

the pattern to the corner of the center of the

first pattern, when changing the pattern's

connecting position.

Note

• Use the positioning stickers included with

this product or purchase replacement

stickers (SAEPS2, EPS2: XF0763-001) from

your Brother dealer. If any other sticker is

used, the camera may not recognize it.

• The 182 mm × 257 mm (7 inches × 10

inches) embroidery positioning sticker sheet

with strong adhesive is most appropriate for

connecting patterns (SAEPS2, EPS2:

XF0763-001). If any other positioning sticker

is used, it may peel off. If the sticker peels

off, the patterns cannot be connected.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

209

Using both hands affix the second

embroidery positioning mark within the red

lines by pressing down on each corner of

the positioning mark onto the material and

then touch .

→ The camera detects the second positioning sticker.

Note

• Use new positioning stickers. If a sticker is

reused, it may easily peel off. If the sticker

peels off during this procedure, the patterns

cannot be connected. Start the project

again with new fabric and stabilizer.

• Using fingers apply pressure to the corners

of the positioning sticker to firmly affix it to

the fabric. If the sticker is not firmly

attached, the camera may incorrectly detect

the sticker.

• If any of the following messages appear,

reattach the positioning sticker in the

correct position. Make sure that the sticker

is affixed with the large circle at the top.

210

After the two positioning stickers have been

detected, the following message appears.

1 Embroidering area

While making sure that the two positioning stickers do

not peel off, remove the embroidery frame from the

machine, and then rehoop the fabric. Be sure to hoop

the fabric so the next pattern and both the positioning

stickers are within the embroidery sewing area.

Reattach the frame and press .

2 Pattern to be embroidered next

3 Centers of large circles for stickers

4 Embroidery sheet

→ The camera detects the two positioning stickers.

Note

• If the next pattern and the centers of the

large circles of the two positioning stickers

do not fit within the embroidering area, use

a larger embroidery frame. If a larger

embroidery frame cannot be used, continue

to step

n, and then refer to “Changing the

position of a sticker” on page 212 to

reposition the sticker.

• If the sticker peels off during this procedure,

the patterns cannot be connected. If this

occurs, restart the procedure from the

beginning.

• If either of the following messages appear,

rehoop the fabric so that the next pattern

and both the positioning stickers are within

the embroidery sewing area as indicated in

the screen.

Touch to detect the positioning

stickers.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

211

After the positioning stickers have been

detected, touch , and then remove the

stickers.

Touch , then touch and then

press the start/stop button to embroider the

second pattern.

→ After embroidering of the second pattern is finished,

the following message appears. touch .

When the following message appears, touch

→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move

after pressing .

Select the third pattern C, and touch .

Before embroidering, touch to

display the pattern connection setting

screen. In this example, we will select the

top point of the right edge for the second

pattern.

212

Touch the position for the third pattern will

be connected on the screen, and then touch

. In this example, touch the upper

right side of the second pattern.

• Pattern rotates automatically when corner position is

selected.

1 Touch the connecting area

2 Third pattern C

3 Second pattern B

4 Touch to move the third pattern.

Follow the on-screen instruction to perform

steps

j to n.

Press , then touch and then

press the start/stop button to embroider the

third pattern.

→ After embroidering of the third pattern is finished,

the following message appears. When finished

connecting patterns, touch .

→ After embroidering is finished, at the top left

side of the screen disappears.

The three patterns have been connected.

Touch to clear the pattern.

Changing the position of a sticker

If the selected pattern or positioning stickers for

connecting the next pattern do not easily fit in the

embroidering area, follow the on-screen

instructions that appear after step

l on page 209

in order to move the positioning stickers.

For an example, the on-screen instruction appears

when you use the embroidery frame with a size of

10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches) to connect

patterns as shown below.

1 Pattern A

2 Pattern B

Refer to steps a through l of Connecting

three patterns using the embroidery frame

with a size of 10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4

inches) to embroider the first pattern and to

connect the second pattern.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

213

Following message appears in step m if the

next pattern or affixed positioning stickers

are close to being out of the embroidering

area. Follow the instructions and then touch

1 Embroidering area

1 Pattern to be embroidered next

2 Embroidery sheet

→ The camera detects the two positioning stickers.

After the sticker position is detected, touch

, and then remove the stickers.

Affix the two positioning stickers again

according to the on-screen instructions so

that the next pattern or positioning marks

can fit in the embroidery area.

→ Touch so that the camera detects the first

positioning sticker.

Note

• When referring to steps a through l,

make sure you select the pattern position to

reflect this exercise.

Note

• If the following message appears, rehoop

the fabric as indicated in the screen, and

then touch .

214

Affix the second sticker and then touch

→ The camera detects the second positioning sticker.

After the two positioning stickers have been

detected, the following message appears.

While making sure that the positioning

stickers do not peel off, rehoop the fabric

according to the example displayed on the

on-screen instruction.

1 Embroidering area

1 Pattern to be embroidered next

2 Embroidery sheet

Continue the operation from step n on

page 211 after pressing .

Connecting rotated patterns

Greater design variations can be created by

rotating patterns. The following procedure

describes how to connect patterns that are rotated.

Select the pattern, and then touch .

→ The pattern editing screen appears.

Press in the pattern editing screen.

1 First pattern

2 Second pattern

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

215

Rotate the pattern, and then touch .

Press to display the embroidering

settings screen.

Press .

Refer to steps d through f of Connecting

three patterns to embroider the first

pattern.

Select the next pattern, and then touch

Press in the pattern editing screen.

Rotate the pattern to the same angle as the

first pattern, and then touch .

Press .

Touch the position for the second pattern

will be connected on the screen, and then

touch .

1 Touch the connecting area

→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move

after pressing .

Continue with step j of Connecting three

patterns to finish connecting the patterns.

Note

• Be sure to rotate the pattern from the

editing screen. The reference edge and

reference point are specified along the

smallest rectangle (not angled) that contains

all patterns selected.

Rectangles and angled patterns

1 Rectangle

Rectangles and patterns (not angled)

1 Rectangle

• Pressing in the embroidering settings

screen changes the angle at which patterns

are connected.

216

Connecting patterns to be joined

along an edge

Greater design variations can be created by sliding

the patterns being connected.

The following procedure describes how to use this

function to connect patterns so they are joined

along an edge. Before connecting the patterns, the

basting function will be used to measure the

distance that the pattern will be slid.

A: First pattern

B: Second pattern

■ Measuring the distance that the

pattern will be slid

Set “Basting Distance” in the settings screen

to “0.0”.

Select the pattern whose slide distance is to

be measured.

Continue to the embroidering settings

screen, and then touch to select the

basting function.

After the pattern is sewn, remove the fabric

from the frame, and then measure the

distance that the pattern is to be slid.

1 Horizontal: 42.8 mm

2 Vertical: 32.8 mm

Note

•Steps a through d are for measurement

placement only. Be sure to sew trial

embroidery using same fabric and threads

as project in order to check the

embroidering results.

SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS

217

■ Trial Sewing

Sew trial embroidery to check that the pattern will

be slid the correct distance.

Select the pattern, and then continue to the

embroidering settings screen.

Press in the embroidering settings

screen.

Embroider the first pattern.

Refer to steps e through h of Connecting

three patterns to select the next pattern.

Move the pattern according to the distance

measured in “Measuring the distance that

the pattern will be slid”, and then touch

Specify the distance that the pattern is to be

slid, and then touch .

→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move

after pressing .

Continue with step j of Connecting three

patterns to finish connecting the patterns.

Note

• After checking that the trial embroidery

results are satisfactory, sew the actual

embroidery. If you decide to change the

distance that the pattern is slid after

checking the trial embroidery, change the

settings selected in step

218

Resume feature

If the machine is turned off while the pattern

connecting function is being used, the machine

will return to the operation indicated below when

it is turned on again. The machine operation will

differ depending on when it is turned off.

Example: When connecting two patterns

Select the first pattern. Touch the pattern connection key .

Begin embroidering the first pattern.

Finish embroidering the first pattern. (A)

If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the

machine will return to (A) when it is turned on again.

Select the second pattern.

Touch .

Specify the reference point for connecting the pattern.

Start detecting positioning stickers (2 locations).

Finish detecting positioning stickers. (B)

If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the

machine will return to (B) when it is turned on again.

Rehoop the fabric.

Finish detecting positioning stickers (2 locations).

Begin embroidering the second pattern.

Finish embroidering the second pattern.

Chapter 6

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP

FEATURE

This chapter contains descriptions on the use of the settings key and the machine operations

guide key, introduced on page 40. Details on changing the basic embroidery machine settings

and viewing operations on the LCD will be provided.

Using the Settings Key........................................... 220

Understanding the settings screen ..........................................220

Changing the display guides....................................................223

Changing the thread color information ...................................225

Selecting the thread color information for “PES” format data

...226

Changing the background colors of the embroidery patterns

or thumbnails..........................................................................227

Specifying jumpstitch trimming /

“DST” jump codes for trimming..............................................227

Deleting short stitches ............................................................228

Specifying the remaining length of thread...............................228

Changing the embroidery basting distance .............................229

Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”............229

Changing the screen saver settings..........................................229

Setting the opening screen ......................................................231

Specifying the spool stand LED setting ....................................231

Adjusting the brightness of the sewing light ............................232

Changing the speaker volume .................................................232

Specifying thread sensor .........................................................233

Changing the pointer shape when a USB mouse is used .........233

Changing the units of measurements ......................................234

Adjusting the brightness of the screen display.........................234

Changing the language............................................................234

Using the Machine Operations Guide Key ............ 235

Viewing the operation guides..................................................235

Playing a tutorial video ...........................................................236

Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) videos.................................................237

220

Touch (settings key) to change many of the basic embroidery machine settings.

Understanding the settings screen

There are seven pages in the settings screen. Touch and in the lower-center of the screen until the

desired page is displayed. The key appears on all pages.

■ Page 1

1 An image of the current settings screen can be

saved on USB media.

2 The settings on the page containing this key will

be reverted to their defaults.

3 The guides (centerpoint marker and grid) for the

pattern display area can be specified. (Refer to

page 223.)

4 Changing the thread color display

The color information in the thread color sequence

display and the needle bar thread information can

be switched to the color name, the thread brand

and color number or the sewing time. (Refer to

page 225.)

5 PES Thread Code

You can display the thread color for “PES” format

data according to the machine setting, or setting

from the embroidery editing software. (Refer to

page 226.)

6 Embroidery Background Color/Thumbnail

Background Color

Depending on the color of the embroidery,

changing the background color of the pattern

display area and thumbnails may make them more

visible and easier to select. (Refer to page 227.)

■ Page 2

7 “DST” Setting

Specifies whether or not jumpstitches are cut. In

addition, when using Tajima embroidery data

(.dst), you can specify whether or not the thread is

cut according to the specified number of jump

codes. (Refer to page 227.)

8 Short Stitch Delete

Specifies the length of short stitches that are to be

deleted. (Refer to page 228.)

9 Thread Tail

Specifies the length of upper thread that remains

threaded through the needle after the thread is

trimmed (length of thread passed through the eye

of the needle). (Refer to page 228.)

0 Basting Distance

Specify the distance between the pattern and the

basting stitching. (Refer to page 128.)

Using the Settings Key

Note

• If the settings for ““DST” Setting” 7 or

“Short Stitch Delete” 8 are changed from

the previous setting, the new settings are

only applied to the next embroidery.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

221

■ Page 3

A Reserved Needle

A specific thread color can be set to a needle bar.

The specified color remains assigned to the

needle bar specified here until the setting is

cancelled. You can also specify the maximum

sewing speed for a needle bar as well as cancel

automatic needle threading. This feature is not

accessible through the embroidering screen.

(Refer to “Reserved Needle Bar and Sewing

Speed Settings” on page 143.)

■ Page 4

B Select settings for the “Eco Mode” and “Shutoff

Support Mode”. (Refer to “Selecting the “Eco

Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”” on page 229.)

C Screen Saver

Select the length of time until the screen saver

appears, and change the image of the screen

saver. (Refer to page 229.)

D Opening Screen

The machine can be set so that the opening

screen is either displayed (“ON”) or not displayed

(“OFF”) when the machine is turned on.

E Spool Stand LED

The spool stand LED setting can be changed. The

LEDs can be used to show the embroidery thread

color or to indicate error details and warnings to

replace the thread spool. (Refer to page 231.)

F Light

The brightness of the sewing light can be

adjusted. (Refer to page 18 or 232.)

G Speaker

The volume of operation sounds and alarm

sounds can be adjusted. (Refer to page 19 or 232.)

222

■ Page 5

H Link function

Set the Link function on or off. (Refer to “Sending

Embroidery Patterns From a Computer to the

Machine (Link Function)” on page 169)

I Manual Color Sequence

Set the “Manual Color Sequence” on or off. (Refer

to “Selecting/Managing Thread Colors for Each

Needle Bar (Manual Color Sequence)” on

page 132)

J Thread Sensor

Set “Thread Sensor” to either “ON” or “OFF”.

(Refer to page 233.)

K Mouse Pointer

Change the shape of the pointer when a USB

mouse is used. (Refer to page 233.)

L Units of Measure

Enables the units of measurements that appear in

the screens to be changed. (Refer to page 234.)

M Brightness of the Screen Display

Adjust the brightness of the screen display. (Refer

to page 234 )

N LANGUAGES

Enables the display language to be changed. The

keys and messages appear in the selected

language. (Refer to page 234.)

■ Page 6

O The Total Count counter shows the total number

of stitches sewn, and the Trip Count counter show

the number of stitches that have been sewn since

the machine’s last maintenance.

P The Total Time counter shows the total amount of

time that the machine has been used, and the Trip

Time counter shows the amount of time that the

machine has been used since its last

maintenance.

Use counters O and P as a standard for

performing periodic maintenance and for

receiving maintenance for the machine.

Q The “No. ##” is the number for the embroidery

machine.

R Version

Shows the version of the software installed on this

embroidery machine. (Refer to page 309.)

Note

• Check with your local authorized Brother

dealer or at “ http://support.brother.com ”

for details on available updates.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

223

■ Page 7

S Background Image Display

Select whether or not the fabric is displayed in the

background.

For details, refer to “Aligning the Embroidering

Position” on page 102.

T Fabric Thickness Check

When the fabric is scanned and displayed as a

background image, the thickness of thick fabric

can be checked to ensure that the camera

correctly detects the fabric.

For details, refer to “Positioning the pattern on

thick fabric” on page 104.

U A blue box can be displayed in the embroidering

settings screen to indicate the area detected by

the camera.

V Grid line can be displayed in the camera screen to

support setting the pattern at the desired angle.

Details of each of the settings are described in the

following sections. After specifying the desired

settings, touch to return to the screen that

was displayed before the settings screen was

displayed.

Changing the display guides

The guides in the pattern display area can be set.

The machine automatically detects the type of

embroidery frame holder and embroidery frame

that are installed and displays them.

The guide settings can be specified from page 1 of

the settings screen.

1 How the guides will appear with the specified

settings can be previewed here.

2 Type of embroidery frame holder

Displays the type of the embroidery frame holder.

3 Area

Displays the size of the embroidery frame that is

actually installed.

4 Centerpoint marker or grid lines

Select the type of the centerpoint marker and the

grid lines, and whether or not to display them.

■ Type of the embroidery frame holder

The machine automatically detects the type of

embroidery frame holder that is installed.

If no embroidery frame holder is specified, the

setting for “Cap frame/Cylinder frame” is displayed.

Refer to “Types of embroidery frames/frame holders

and their applications” on page 89 to 91.

Note

• Some settings cannot be changed while

sewing.

Embroidery frame holder A (included)

Embroidery frame holder B (included)

Embroidery frame holder C (Optional)

Embroidery frame holder D (Optional)

Embroidery frame holder E (Optional)

Cap frame/Cylinder frame (Optional)

224

■ Size of the embroidery frame

The machine automatically detects the type of

embroidery frame that is installed and displays it.

Extra-large embroidery

frame

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 14

inches (W))

Extra-large embroidery

frame (optional)

200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4

inches (W))

Large embroidery frame

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)

(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8

inches (W))

Medium embroidery frame

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) ×

4 inches (W))

Small embroidery frame

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W) (1-

1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8

inches (W))

Quilt frame (optional)

200 mm (H) × 200 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 7-7/8

inches (W))

Border frame (optional)

100 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)

(4 inches (H) ×

11-3/4 inches (W))

Sleeve frame (optional)

200 mm (H) × 70 mm (W)

(7-7/8 inches (H) × 2-3/4

mm (W))

Jumbo frame (optional)

360 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(14 inches (H) × 14 inches

(W))

Cap frame wide type

(optional)

60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 14

inches (W))

Advanced cap frame 2

(optional)

60 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 5-1/8

inches (W))

Cap frame (optional)

50 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)

(2 inches (H) ×

5-1/8 inches (W))

Cylinder frame (optional)

80 mm (H) × 90 mm (W) (3

inches (H) ×

3-1/2 inches (W))

Round frame (optional)

ø 160 mm

(ø 6 inches)

Round frame (optional)

ø 130 mm

(ø 5 inches)

Round frame (optional)

ø 100 mm

(ø 4 inches)

Clamp frame M

100mm (H) x 100mm (W)

(4 inches (H) x 4 inches (W))

Clamp frame S/SL/SR

24mm (H) x 45mm (W)

(7/8 inch (H) x 1-3/4 inches

(W))

Compact frame 70

41mm (H) x 70mm (W)

(1-5/8 inches (H) x 2-3/4

inches (W))

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

225

■ Centerpoint marker and grid lines

The centerpoint is indicated with a red plus sign (+).

When the embroidery machine is purchased, the

centerpoint marker and grid lines are not displayed.

Touch and to select the type of the

centerpoint marker and the grid lines, and

whether or not to display them.

The centerpoint marker is displayed as specified.

Changing the thread color

information

You can display the name of the thread colors,

embroidery thread number or the embroidery

time.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, the

thread color number (#123) is selected.

The thread color display setting can be specified

from page 1 of the settings screen.

Touch and to display the name of the

thread colors, the embroidery thread

number or the embroidering time.

Compact frame 50

50mm (H) x 50mm (W)

(2 inches (H) x 2 inches (W))

Compact frame 44

38mm (H) x 44mm (W)

(1-1/2 inches (H) x 1-3/4

inches (W))

Compact frame Portrait

orientation

33mm (H) x 75mm (W)

(1-5/16 inches (H) x 2-15/16

inches (W))

Grid lines

(10 mm spacing)

Grid lines

(25 mm spacing)

Cross grid lines

Centerpoint marker

Centerpoint marker and

grid lines

(10 mm spacing)

Centerpoint marker

andgrid lines

(25 mm spacing)

Centerpoint mark with

cross grid lines

No centerpoint marker

or grid lines

226

When the thread number [#123] is

displayed, touch and to select from

six embroidery thread brands pictured

below.

■ Sample displays

Selecting the thread color

information for “PES” format

data

You can display the thread color for “PES” format

data according to the machine setting, or setting

from the PE-DESIGN, PE-DESIGN Lite or PED-

BASIC (embroidery editing software).

(Refer to “Changing the thread color information”

on page 225 for the machine setting of thread

color.)

The “PES Thread Code” can be selected from page

1 of the settings screen.

ON: The thread color information displayed

according to the PE-DESIGN, PE-DESIGN Lite or

PED-BASIC (embroidery editing software)

OFF: The thread color information displayed

according to the machine setting.

When the machine is purchased, “ON” is selected.

Thread color number (#123)

Madeira Poly

(Polyester)

Madeira Rayon

(Rayon)

Sulky

(Rayon)

Robison-Anton

(Polyester)

Embroidery

(Polyester)

Country

(Cotton*)

* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like polyester

thread is sold.

Thread color name

Name of Color

Time

Memo

• The thread colors in the thread color

sequence display and in the patterns in the

pattern display area are displayed in the

original thread color (i.e. the thread colors

that have been built-in the machine). The

thread color numbers are displayed with the

number (or the nearest number) for the

brand specified here.

• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from

actual spool colors.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

227

Changing the background colors

of the embroidery patterns or

thumbnails

The background colors of the pattern display area

and pattern thumbnails. Depending on the pattern

color, select the desired background color from

the 66 settings available. Different background

colors can be selected for the pattern display area

and pattern thumbnails.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

white color is selected.

The background color settings can be specified

from page 1 of the settings screen.

Touch .

Select the background color from the 66

settings available.

1 Selected color

2 Touch to return to the settings screen.

Specifying jumpstitch trimming /

“DST” jump codes for trimming

You can specify whether or not jumpstitches are

cut. In addition, when using Tajima embroidery

data (.dst), you can specify whether or not the

thread is cut according to the specified number of

jump codes.

ON: The machine cuts the upper and bobbin

thread before the jumpstitch. When Tajima

embroidery data (.dst) is used, the machine

converts the “jump” code to a trim code, based on

the number specified on the next line.

OFF: The machine does not cut either a jumpstitch

or the “jump” code in Tajima embroidery data

(.dst).

When the machine is purchased, “ON” is selected

and the number of jumps is set to “3”.

The “DST” thread trim settings can be specified

from page 2 of the settings screen.

Touch or to select the desired

setting.

Memo

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

Note

• If the setting is changed from the previous

setting, the new setting is only applied to

the next embroidery.

Note

• This setting is not applied to the trimming of

threads between characters in alphabet

patterns. (Refer to “Trimming the threads

between characters” on page 183.)

Memo

• The number of jump codes cannot be

specified for data other than Tajima

embroidery data (.dst).

228

■ When using Tajima embroidery data

(.dst)

If “ON” is selected, touch and to

select the number of feed codes.

The desired setting is displayed.

• A value between 1 and 8 can be specified. For

example, if 3 is specified, sequential 3 jump codes

will be converted to the trim code. But sequential 2

jump codes will not be converted to the trim code, it

will be sewed as the feed (jump) stitch.

Deleting short stitches

If embroidery data other than our original patterns

are used, the stitch length may be too short,

possibly resulting in the thread or the needle

breaking. In order to prevent this problem from

occurring, the machine can be set to delete

stitches with a short stitch length. Stitches with a

length less than that specified in this function, can

be deleted.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

“0.3” was selected (delete stitches with a length of

0.3 mm or less).

Touch and to select the stitch length.

The desired size is displayed.

• A value between 0 and 1 millimeters if the units of

measurements is set to “mm” (or a value between 0

and 0.04 inch if the units of measurements is set to

“inch”) can be specified.

Specifying the remaining length

of thread

This setting specifies whether the length of upper

thread that remains threaded through the needle

after the thread is trimmed (length of thread passed

through the eye of the needle) has a standard tail

or long tail.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

“Standard Tail” is selected.

The setting for the remaining length of thread can

be specified from page 2 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the setting.

The desired length is displayed.

• If the machine misses stitches with a standard length

of thread after it is trimmed, select “Long Tail”.

• When using metallic thread, select “Long Tail”.

Note

• You need to set the jump number same as

the number that was used when the

particular Tajima data was created.

If the jump number is not matched, either

unexpected trim or no trimming at trim

expected point will happen.

Note

• If the setting is changed from the previous

setting, the new setting is only applied to

the next embroidery.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

229

Changing the embroidery basting

distance

The distance from the pattern to the basting

stitching can be set to 0.0 mm to 12.0 mm.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, “5.0

mm” is selected. Refer to “Basting Embroidery” on

page 128 when using this setting.

The distance setting can be specified from page 2

of the settings screen.

Use and to specify the distance from

the pattern to the basting stitching.

Selecting the “Eco Mode” or

“Shutoff Support Mode”

You can save the machine power by setting the

eco mode or the shutoff support mode.

If you leave the machine without using for a

specified period of time, the machine enters in one

of these modes.

“Eco Mode”;

Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the

screen or “Start/Stop” button to continue

embroidering.

“Shutoff Support Mode”;

Machine will turn off after set period of time. Turn

machine off and then back on to restart

embroidering.

Press the “Start/Stop” button or touch the screen

display to recover from these modes.

These settings can be specified from page 4 of the

settings screen.

Use or to select the time until

entering the mode.

Changing the screen saver

settings

■ Specifying the length of time until

the screen saver is displayed

The screen saver is displayed when no machine

operation is performed for the specified length of

time.

A setting between “OFF” (0) and “60” minutes can

be set in 1-minute increments.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, “5

min” is selected.

The screen saver settings can be specified from page

4 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the desired

setting.

Condition Eco Mode

Shutoff Support

Mode

Available time OFF, 10 - 120

(minute)

OFF, 1 - 12 (hour)

“Start/Stop” button

Green flashing Green slow

flashing

Suspended

function

Machine light,

Screen display

All functions

After recovering The machine starts

from the previous

operation.

You need to turn off

the machine.

Note

• If you turn off the machine while the

machine is in the “Eco Mode” or the

“Shutoff Support Mode”, wait for about 5

seconds before turning on the machine

again.

230

■ Changing the screen saver image

You can select your own personal images for the

screen saver of your machine.

Before changing the screen saver image, prepare the

image on your computer or USB media.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, the

default setting is selected.

The screen saver settings can be specified from page

4 of the settings screen.

Touch .

Connect the USB media or the computer

(using a USB cable) that contains your

personal image to the USB port of the

machine.

• Refer to page 81 about USB connectivity.

Touch to select the first image.

• The images will appear in a list in this screen. Select

the desired number to specify the image.

Select the device that is connected.

• Touch when connecting USB media to the top

USB port.

• Touch when connecting USB media to the

center USB port.

• Touch when connecting a computer using a

USB cable, and then copy your personal images into

“Removable Disk”, which appears on the desktop of

the computer.

→ A list of your personal images appear on the screen.

• Touch to delete the selected image.

• Touch to return to the previous screen.

Compatible image files

Format JPEG format (.jpg)

File size Max. 2 MB for each image

File dimension

800 × 1280 pixels or less, (If the width is

more than 800 pixels, the image

imported will be reduced to a width of

800 pixels.)

Number allowed 5 or less

Note

• When using USB media, make sure that it

contains only your own personal images to

be selected for the screen saver.

• Images saved on an SD card cannot be

selected for the screen saver. Use images

from the computer or USB media.

• Folders are recognized. Open the folder that

holds your personal images.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

231

Touch a file name to select image and then

touch .

→ The selected image is stored on your machine.

• Touch to return to the previous screen.

Following the same procedure from step d,

select the remaining images.

Setting the opening screen

You can select the initial screen of the machine. If

you set the “Opening Screen” to “ON”, the

opening movie screen starts when the machine is

turned on. The initial pattern type selection screen

appears after touching the screen.

If you set the “Opening Screen” to “OFF”, the

initial pattern type selection screen appears when

the machine is turned on.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

“ON” is selected.

The opening screen setting can be set from page 4

of the settings screen.

Touch or to select the desired

setting.

Specifying the spool stand LED

setting

The spool stand LED lights inform you when the

machine stops, when the thread need to be

changed or error has occurred. Set the spool stand

LED setting to “OFF”, “1” or “2”.

The spool stand LED setting can be specified from

page 4 of the settings screen.

Touch or to select the desired setting.

■ Spool stand LED indications

OFF Turns off the spool stand LED.

Spool stand LED turns on in the particular situa-

tions; when the machine starts sewing, thread

changed, a sewing error occurs, etc.

Spool stand LED is always turned on; indicating

the thread color and in the particular situation.

indicates the spool that needs

changing

(Appropriate thread color is indi-

cated. For black thread color, LED

light turns off.)

indicates the spool that activates

thread breakage error

OFF

sewing error

finished sewing

232

Adjusting the brightness of the

sewing light

You can adjust the brightness of the sewing light to

light up the embroidering area. The brightness of

the sewing light can be set to “OFF” or a setting

between “1” and “5”. When “OFF” is selected, the

sewing light does not turn on. When the machine

is purchased, “5” is selected.

The sewing light can be specified from page 4 of

the settings screen.

Touch or to select the desired

brightness.

→ Check that the desired sewing light brightness is

selected by checking the embroidering area.

Changing the speaker volume

The volume of operation sounds (which are

produced when a key is touched in a screen or a

button is pressed in the operation panel) and alarm

sounds (which indicate that an error has occurred)

can be changed.

The speaker volume can be set to “OFF” or a

setting between “1” and “5”. When “OFF” is

selected, no sound is produced from the speaker.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, “5”

is selected.

The speaker setting can be specified from page 4

of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the desired

speaker volume.

→ Check that the desired speaker volume is selected

with the operation sound produced when a key is

touched.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

233

Specifying thread sensor

If thread sensor is set to “OFF”, the machine does

not stop until embroidering is finished, even if the

thread breaks or there is no more thread in the

bobbin. Set thread sensor to “ON”, except when it

is necessary to set it to “OFF”.

When the machine is purchased, “ON” is selected.

The thread sensor can be specified from page 5 of

the settings screen.

Touch or to select the desired

setting.

Changing the pointer shape when

a USB mouse is used

The shape can be selected for the pointer that

appears when a USB mouse is connected.

Depending upon the background color, select the

desired shape from the three that are available.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

is selected.

The mouse pointer setting can be specified from

page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the pointer shape

from the three settings available ( ,

and ).

Note

• Normally, set thread sensor to “ON”.

When thread sensor is set to “OFF”, the

machine will not be able to detect if the

upper thread has become tangled.

Continuing to use the machine with tangled

thread may cause damage.

Memo

• The setting remains selected even if the

machine is turned off.

234

Changing the units of

measurements

The units of measurements can be set to

millimeters or inches.

When the embroidery machine is purchased,

“mm” is selected.

The measurement units setting can be specified

from page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the desired

measurement units.

The desired units are displayed.

Adjusting the brightness of the

screen display

The brightness of the screen display can be

adjusted.

The screen will appear dimmer if the number on

the settings screen decreases. The screen will

appear brighter as the number increases.

When the embroidery machine is purchased, “4”

is selected.

The screen display brightness can be specified

from page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the desired

brightnes.

Check that the desired brightness is selected by

checking the screen display.

Changing the language

The language setting can be specified from

page 5 of the settings screen.

Touch and to select the desired

language.

The desired language is displayed.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

235

This machine contains information based on the contents of the Operation Manual, such as basic

machine operations. Touch (machine operations guide key), and then select either to view the

operation guides or to play tutorial videos.

Viewing the operation guides

■ Contents of Categories

Principal Parts

Displays and explains principal parts of the machine

and their functions.

Basic Operation

Illustrates basic threading and hooping instruction.

Troubleshooting

Basic guide for problems solving.

Maintenance

Instruction for maintaining your machine.

Using the Machine Operations Guide Key

236

Example: To learn how to thread the upper thread

Touch .

→ The machine operations guide screen appears.

Touch .

→ The list of basic operations appears.

Touch .

→ The procedure for threading the upper thread

appears.

Read the instructions.

• Touch to display the next page.

• Touch to display the previous page.

Touch to return to the previous

screen.

Playing a tutorial video

This machine provides tutorial videos on how to

use the machine. Together with the help guides,

which offer descriptions through text and

illustrations, the tutorial videos assist with machine

operation.

Press .

Press the title of the desired tutorial video.

→ The selected tutorial video begins playing.

BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE

237

Play the tutorial video.

1 Number of seconds elapsed/Total number of

seconds

Operation keys

After you are finished playing the video,

touch .

Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) videos

Your MP4 videos can be played from USB media.

In addition, the MP4 video can be saved to the

machine so that a tutorial video on creating a

project, for example, can be viewed at any time.

Videos that can be played

Press .

Select the device where the video is saved.

: play a tutorial video

: Play a video saved on the machine

(favorites)

: Play a video from USB media plugged into

the USB port

: Play a video from USB media plugged into

the USB port for mouse

: Play a video from SD card inserted in the

machine

Play

Stop

Pause

Skip back 10 seconds

Skip forward 10 seconds

Return to beginning

Repeat

Delete video (when playing from the

machine’s memory)

Save to machine (when playing from USB

media)

Memo

• A frequently viewed tutorial video can be

saved to (favorites) of the machine,

from where it can be played.

MP4 file format: Video - H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio – AAC

Size: 450 (H) × 800 (W)

Memo

• MP4 file size will be changed to fit the

screen. If you view the large MP4 file, the

file will be reduced to fit the screen. If you

view the smaller MP4 file, the file will be

expanded to fit the screen.

• Some type of MP4 file cannot viewed with

the machine.

238

* To return to the previous screen, touch .

Select the video that you want to play.

* To return to the previous screen, touch .

Play the video.

* Use the operation keys as described in “Playing a

tutorial video” on page 236.

After you are finished playing the video,

touch .

Note

• Up to about 1 GB of MP4 videos can be

saved on the machine. When the maximum

capacity has been reached, delete

unnecessary videos.

Chapter 7

APPENDIX

This chapter provides descriptions of techniques for sewing applications, pointers for creating

beautiful embroidery, and details on maintenance procedures and corrective measures that

should be taken when a problem occurs.

Appliqué Sewing.................................................... 240

Sewing appliqué patterns ........................................................240

Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (1) .........................241

Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (2) .........................242

Sewing Large-size (Split) Embroidery Patterns....... 244

Helpful Tips for the Operation of the Machine ..... 247

Checking the thread tension of built-in patterns .....................247

Sewing a pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric ................248

Color thread table...................................................................250

Colors of Tajima (.dst) embroidery data..................................250

Creating Beautiful Embroidery .............................. 251

Threads ...................................................................................251

Stabilizers (backing)................................................................251

Hooping techniques ................................................................253

Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart .......................................254

Installing the Included Table ................................. 255

Removing the table .................................................................257

Embroidery Patterns for the Optional Jumbo Frame

.... 258

Using the Optional Cap Frame .............................. 262

Cap frame and its accessories .................................................262

Types of caps ..........................................................................263

Fabric precautions ..................................................................264

Preparing to use the cap frame ...............................................265

Attaching the cap frame..........................................................269

Installing the embroidery frame holder...................................276

Additional digitizing information ............................................277

Using the Optional Bobbin Winder....................... 279

Precautions .............................................................................279

Optional bobbin winder and its accessories............................279

Setting up the optional bobbin winder....................................280

Connecting the AC adapter.....................................................280

Winding the bobbin ................................................................281

Maintenance.......................................................... 284

Cleaning the LCD....................................................................284

Cleaning the machine surface .................................................284

Cleaning the hook ...................................................................284

Cleaning around the needle plate ...........................................285

Cleaning the bobbin case ........................................................286

Cleaning the thread paths of the upper threads ......................287

Oiling the machine .................................................................288

About the maintenance message.............................................289

Troubleshooting .................................................... 290

On-screen troubleshooting .....................................................290

Troubleshooting ......................................................................291

Error messages ........................................................................299

If the machine does not respond when a key is pressed ......... 307

Specifications .........................................................308

Embroidery machine specifications ........................................ 308

Upgrading Your Machine’s Software......................309

Upgrade procedure using USB media..................................... 309

Upgrade procedure using computer....................................... 310

Index......................................................................311

240

This section describes the procedure for sewing appliqués.

Sewing appliqué patterns

Some of the built-in embroidery patterns can be

used for sewing appliqués. Follow the procedures

described below to sew appliqués using the

patterns with “APPLIQUE MATERIAL”,

“APPLIQUE POSITION” or “APPLIQUE” in the

region display at the top of the thread color

sequence display.

“APPLIQUE MATERIAL”, “APPLIQUE POSITION”

and “APPLIQUE” are assigned to a specific needle

bar number.

*Depending on the thread color display setting,

the display may appear as (Appliqué

Material), (Appliqué Position) or

(Appliqué).

1 appears in the screen at places where the

machine is stopped.

■ Procedure for sewing appliqués

Place stabilizer on the back of the appliqué

fabric/material.

Frame the fabric for the appliqué (from step

a) in the embroidery frame, and then sew

an “APPLIQUE MATERIAL” pattern. The

line that indicates where the appliqué will

be cut out is sewn, and then the machine

stops.

Remove the appliqué fabric from the

embroidery frame, and then carefully cut

along the sewn cutline.

• If the appliqué is cut out along the inside of the sewn

cutline, the appliqué may not be correctly attached to

the fabric. Therefore, carefully cut out the appliqué

along the sewn cutline. If this step is not performed

carefully, the appliqué will not be cleanly finished. In

addition, carefully remove any excess threads.

Frame the base fabric or garment in the

embroidery frame, and then sew an

“APPLIQUE POSITION” pattern. The

appliqué position is sewn, and then the

machine stops.

Lightly apply fabric glue or spray adhesive

to the back of the appliqué piece that was

cut out, and then attach the appliqué piece

to the base fabric at the position sewn using

the “APPLIQUE POSITION” pattern in step

• If an iron-on stabilizer is used to attach the appliqué

piece to the base fabric, iron the pieces together

without removing the base fabric from the embroidery

frame.

Appliqué Sewing

APPENDIX

241

After attaching the appliqué piece, sew an

“APPLIQUE” pattern. The appliqué is

finished.

• Depending on the pattern, an “APPLIQUE” pattern

may not be available. In this case, sew the appliqué

using thread in the color of a part of the embroidery.

Finish sewing the embroidery.

Using a frame pattern to create

appliqués (1)

Appliqués can be created by sewing two frame

patterns of the same size and shape—one sewn

with straight stitches and the other sewn with satin

stitches.

Select a frame pattern sewn with straight

stitches to embroider onto the fabric for the

appliqué. Carefully cut outside of the

stitching.

Embroider the same pattern on the base

fabric.

Lightly apply fabric glue or spray adhesive

to the back of the appliqué piece that was

cut out in step

a, and then attach the

appliqué piece to the base fabric.

Select the satin-stitched frame pattern with

the same shape to embroider the appliqué

attached in step

1 Appliqué

Note

• If the size or sewing position of the straight-

stitched frame pattern is changed, be sure

to change the size or sewing position of the

satin-stitched frame pattern in the same

way.

242

Using a frame pattern to create

appliqués (2)

There is another way of sewing appliqués. With

this method, there is no need to change the fabric

in the embroidery frame. The appliqué can be

created by sewing two frame patterns of the same

size and shape—one sewn with straight stitches

and the other sewn with satin stitches.

Select a frame pattern sewn with straight

stitches to embroider onto the base fabric.

Place the appliqué fabric over the

embroidery sewn in step

a. Make sure that

the area surrounded by the stitching is not

larger than the area of the appliqué fabric.

Embroider over the appliqué fabric using

the same frame pattern.

• Be sure to stop the machine before the cross at the

center is sewn.

Remove the embroidery frame from the

machine, and then cut off the excess

appliqué fabric along the outside of the

stitching.

Select the satin-stitched frame pattern with

the same shape.

Note

• Leave the fabric in the embroidery frame

when cutting off the excess appliqué fabric.

In addition, do not apply extreme pressure

to the framed fabric, otherwise the fabric

could become loose.

Note

• If the size or sewing position of the straight-

stitched frame pattern is changed, be sure

to change the size or sewing position of the

satin-stitched frame pattern in the same

way.

APPENDIX

243

Attach the embroidery frame removed in

step

d, and then finish embroidering the

appliqué.

244

Large-size (split) embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN Ver.7 or later can be sewn. With large-size

embroidery patterns, embroidery designs larger than the embroidery hoop are divided into multiple

sections, which combine to create a single pattern after each section is sewn.

For details on creating large-size embroidery patterns and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to

the operation manual included with PE-DESIGN Ver.7 or later.

The following procedure describes how to read the large-size embroidery pattern shown below from USB

media and embroider it.

Connect to the machine the media

containing the created large-size

embroidery pattern, and then select the

large-size embroidery pattern to be

embroidered.

* For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Recalling

from USB media/SD card” on page 165 and

“Recalling from the computer” on page 166.

→ A screen appears so that a section of the large-size

embroidery pattern can be selected.

Select section to be embroidered, then

touch .

• Select the sections in alphabetical order.

• A maximum of 10 sections can be displayed in one

page with normal thumbnail size. If there are 11 or

more sections in the pattern, touch or to

display the previous or next page. With large

thumbnail size, a maximum of 4 sections can be

displayed in one page. With small thumbnail size, a

maximum of 21 sections can be displayed in one

page.

If necessary, edit the pattern. Then, touch

• For details, refer to “Editing the Embroidery Pattern

(Pattern Editing Screen)” on page 174.

Sewing Large-size (Split) Embroidery Patterns

APPENDIX

245

Confirm the pattern size, and then select

the appropriate fabric and the embroidery

frame.

• Be sure to select fabric of the size of combined

pattern.

Hoop the appropriate part of the fabric. In

this case, hoop upper-left part of the fabric.

1 Center of fabric

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to embroider the pattern section.

When embroidering is finished, the

following screen appears. Touch .

→ A screen appears so that a section of the large-size

embroidery pattern can be selected.

Touch to select the next section of the

pattern, and then touch .

Touch , and then .

Memo

• The pattern can be rotated to either the left

or right when is touched.

Note

• The last step of the stitching of the pattern

section will be an alignment stitching. Use

this stitching for placement of adjacent

pattern section.

246

Hoop the fabric for the next design section

aligning on the alignment stitching. In this

case, align the left side of the hoop on the

right side of the design section embroidered

in step

1 Alignment stitching

Repeat steps g to j to embroider and

combine the remaining sections of the

pattern.

Note

• Make sure that the alignment stitching is

completely within the embroidery field. Set

the embroidery sheet inside the embroidery

frame and align the grid with the alignment

stitching for easier placement.

APPENDIX

247

This section provides descriptions to operations useful in the operation of this machine.

Checking the thread tension of

built-in patterns

We will sew this pattern to check the thread

tension.

Touch .

→ The embroidery pattern categories appear.

Touch .

→ The list of embroidery patterns appears.

Touch .

Helpful Tips for the Operation of the Machine

248

Touch .

Touch (unlock key), and then press

the start/stop button to begin embroidering.

Correct thread tension. From the wrong

side of the fabric, the bobbin thread should

be about one third of the stitch width.

Sewing a pattern aligned with a

mark on the fabric

By specifying the beginning of stitching and the

end of stitching, the exact position of the pattern

can be checked.

For example, when sewing text along a line in the

fabric pattern, the beginning of the stitching can be

set in the lower-left corner so that the position can

be checked, and then the beginning of stitching

can be reset. Next, the beginning of stitching can

be set in the lower-right corner to check the

position. The straight line connecting the first point

and the second point is the baseline for the text. If

the baseline that the text follows leaves the fabric

pattern, the embroidering position can be

adjusted.

Touch in the embroidering settings

screen.

Set the beginning of stitching in the lower-

left corner.

→ The frame moves so that the needle drop point

aligns with the beginning of stitching.

Note

• If adjustment is necessary, refer to

instructions on page 124, 125.

APPENDIX

249

With a fabric marker, mark this point on the

fabric.

Set the beginning of stitching in the lower-

right corner.

→ The frame moves so that the needle drop point

aligns with the beginning of stitching.

With a fabric marker, mark this point on the

fabric.

Remove the embroidery frame from the

machine, and then connect these two points

to check the embroidering position.

• If the baseline is misaligned or intersects another line,

reframe the fabric in the embroidery frame or adjust

the position of the pattern.

250

Color thread table

Additional explanations of the machine’s built-in

color thread table and the custom thread table are

provided below.

Normally, the thread colors in the thread color

sequence display and in the pattern display area

are displayed in the colors of the machine’s built-

in color thread table. The thread color numbers

with these thread colors are displayed with the

thread color number (or the nearest number) for

the brand specified on the first page of the settings

screen. Therefore, the finished embroidery colors

may have a slightly different tinge.

However, since the custom thread table specified

on the change thread color screen in the pattern

editing screen is created by specifying thread

colors by the thread color numbers and color

names from individual brands in the machine’s

built-in color library, the thread table is displayed

with those original thread colors.

If pattern colors changed using the custom thread

table, pattern can be previewed with colors

nearest to the actual embroidered thread colors.

Create color thread tables from the colors of

threads that you have and use them to display the

patterns in your own thread colors.

(Refer to “Creating a custom thread table” on

page 195, and “Choosing a color from the custom

thread table” on page 197 for the change thread

color function.)

Normal thread color display

Thread color display using a custom thread

Colors of Tajima (.dst)

embroidery data

Tajima data (.dst) does not contain pattern color

information. The data is created by combining

only shapes.

For example, the following embroidery data

appears as shown below in the Tajima format (.dst)

In order for the parts of the pattern to be

differentiated when Tajima data is used with this

machine, the pattern is displayed with colors

automatically applied in the default thread color

sequence. Since the thread colors are applied

according to the sewing order of the parts,

regardless of the design of the pattern, colors may

be applied that seem unusual for the design, for

example, an orange-colored fruit may be

displayed in blue. LED lights, also indicate colors

according to the sewing order, which may be not

the same thread colors to be sewn.

When using Tajima data, be sure to preview the

sewn image on the screen and change the colors

from the change thread color screen.

It is recommended to try the Manual color

sequence if you use Tajima data very often. Using

the Manual color sequence, you can directly

change the color setting according to your thread

spool setting. Set “Manual Color Sequence” to

“ON” in the settings screen. (Refer to page 132)

APPENDIX

251

The various precautions concerning the thread, embroidery frames and stabilizers (backings) that must be

observed in order to create beautiful embroidery are described below.

Threads

Embroidery thread can be costly, therefore caring

for it should be a priority. No matter how well a

thread is manufactured, it must be appropriately

stored if it is to sew properly. This is especially true

when one considers the time that lapses between

delivery to the thread user and the moment the

thread is actually used on the embroidery

machine. It is important that embroidery threads

be stored in an environment that is free of

damaging agents such as excessive heat, light or

moisture.

Embroidery threads are best stored in an area that

is as clean and dust-free as possible. It is also

important that the storage area be free of smoke,

fumes and gases. Certain gases may cause the

thread to yellow. These fumes originate from such

appliances as gas heaters or from gas or diesel

engines.

Direct sunlight is also extremely destructive for

embroidery threads. Boxes of thread should not be

left open and exposed to direct sunlight. If

possible, skylights and windows should be

diffused. The best type of lighting for embroidery

thread is tungsten-filament or fluorescent tubes. It

is important to remember that prolonged exposure

to these harmful sources may also cause the colors

of cardboard boxes and other objects to fade.

Temperature and humidity also pose a threat to

embroidery threads. The ideal conditions are

between 59

°F and 77 °F (or 15 °C and 25 °C).

Humidity should be between 40% and 60%.

These conditions should be kept as constant as

possible in order to prevent mildew from forming.

Excessive temperatures can also cause lubrication

problems that ultimately result in thread breaks.

Damp conditions can affect paper bobbins as the

cardboard will swell and the thread can become

oversized. It is also important to realize that even if

the overall storage conditions are good, there may

be “spot problems” where a thread is exposed to a

heat source or bright lights. Ensuring that thread

does not become damaged requires that stock be

frequently rotated and that threads are not left in

the same place for an extremely long time.

Choice of thread is a major factor in improving

production time. The thread run ability, strength,

consistency and weight all affect output. These

qualities determine how well the machine will

sew and the number of thread breaks during

sewing.

Thread breaks have an important influence on

production. Each thread break reduces output by

at least 0.07% a day (7.5 hours), assuming that it

takes 20 seconds to rethread a needle. For every

reduction of 14 thread breaks per a day, output

can be improved by more than 1.0 %.

Stabilizers (backing)

Backing and topping serve to stabilize and support

the product being embroidered so the stitches can

be sewn with the least amount of interference or

instability. They serve as stabilizers for your

embroidery work. Without the proper type of

stabilizer, the fabric may move too much within

the embroidery frame causing poor alignment of

the embroidery. At times, topping will be required

in order to manage fabrics with a pile-like surface,

such as towels, corduroy and piqué knit. There are

many types of backing and toppings with various

weights for the various fabrics that you may be

sewing.

There are four types of stabilizers (backing) that

can be used in embroidery: cut-away, tear-away,

water soluble and self-adhesive. In these four

types, various weights, sizes and textures are

available. When selecting the stabilizer type for a

particular fabric, consider the design size in

addition to the stitch count and stitch type used in

the design.

Finally, make sure that the stabilizer is not

stretched. Some backings may not stretch

vertically or horizontally but may stretch

diagonally. DO NOT USE THESE TYPES. This type

of backing will stretch during sewing and may

cause the design to shift.

Creating Beautiful Embroidery

252

1. Polyester mesh cut-away stabilizer works

extremely well with light-colored fabrics since

it prevents a shadow from showing through on

the front after you have trimmed away the

excess. This type of backing is ideal whenever

you need stability with a light and soft touch in

your finished product, for example, with baby

garments.

2. Cut-away stabilizer is excellent for medium- to

heavyweight knits, however it can also be used

on woven material. It will hold a large number

of stitches and with two or three layers can hold

a tremendous amount of stitches. This type of

backing is also available in black for those who

want the inside of their garments to look as

good as the outside. Black stabilizer is very

useful on similarly colored garments of

lightweight fabrics. The black backing is less

likely to show through as compared to white

backing.

3. Tear-away stabilizer can be used on

mediumweight woven fabrics and sturdy

fabrics such as canvas, poplin and denim. This

stabilizer will hold many stitches especially

when used in two or more layers. This type of

stabilizer is made of a non-woven material that

enables it to easily be torn away from the edges

of your embroidery design when it is

completed. This stabilizer is also available in

black.

4. Water-soluble stabilizer is useful when you

need to keep the nap or pile, for example, on

towels, from interfering with the placement of

stitches. Fabrics such as terry cloth, corduroy,

velvet and faux fur are examples of materials

that have a nap or pile that can actually

penetrate embroidery stitches as your machine

sews. The result is an unfinished and often

sloppy appearance when fibers of the fabric

poke out between the finished stitches of an

embroidery design. In these situations, water-

soluble stabilizer is used as a topping to hold

the fibers of the fabric flat so the stitches can be

placed on top neatly and accurately. Water-

soluble stabilizer is also used as a backing

when stitching lace or other motifs where the

desired result is only the stitching. This is

accomplished with water-soluble stabilizer,

which can easily be pulled off of the fabric after

embroidering is completed and any remnants

can easily be dissolved with water. Water-

soluble stabilizer is also used as a backing on

towels, where you often need some

stabilization, but any remnants of a formal

backing must not be visible in the finished

product.

5. Self-adhesive (peel-and-stick) backing is used

on those difficult-to-hoop fabrics. This backing

is applied (with sticky side up) to the underside

of the frame, enabling your fabric to “stick on”

the exposed surface in the embroidery area.

When the embroidery is finished, the fabric can

be removed, the excess backing can be

disposed of and the process repeated.

APPENDIX

253

Hooping techniques

“Use the right tool for the right job” is a statement

many of us have heard throughout the years. This

statement holds true even in the embroidery

industry. The wrong size or type of embroidery

frame may result in poor design alignment during

sewing or damage the product altogether. You can

take a perfectly created design and ruin the final

results by simply not using the correct frame size,

type or technique designed for its application.

■ Frame Basics

Tubular frames: This type of frame allows tubular

fabric or pre-assembled garments to be placed

around the hook assembly. It allows embroidering of

the front of a garment without stitching through the

back of it.

Cap frames: These are specialized embroidery

frames (hoops) designed to hold caps for

embroidering. They are available in a variety of

styles for various machines, with two basic styles:

one that allows sewing a flattened cap (for use on a

flat machine) or one that allows sewing the cap in its

natural curved shape (for use on a tubular machine).

Hooping fabric: The framed fabric and backing

should be perfectly flat and free of wrinkles or

bubbles. If there are bubbles or wrinkles that must

be removed, be sure that you pull on the fabric and

backing together. Pull no more than is necessary to

make the fabric flat and smooth. Overstretching the

fabric during this process may cause puckers around

the finished design when the frame is removed.

Gaps may also be generated between design parts.

Inner/outer frame positioning: There should be a

slight ridge (3 mm (1/8 inch)) of fabric and backing

below the outer frame on the back side. Tighten the

screw only if the inner frame feels loose. Avoid

overtightening the screw as this will cause puckers

in the fabric and may “strip” the screw.

■ When embroidering thick fabric

If the fabric slips within the frame or cannot be

correctly hooped, wrap masking tape or bias tape

around the outer frame. The tape will provide

resistance so that the fabric does not easily slip.

254

Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart

Fabric/

Garment

No. of Backing

Pieces

No. of Topping

Pieces

Comments

Terry cloth 1 tear-away 1 water-soluble

Increase density and/or satin stitch width. Fine details and small

lettering tend to get caught in the terry loops.

Satin jacket

Heavy lining:

None

Light or no lining:

1 tear-away

None

If garment slips in frame, causing alignment problems, wrap

inner frame with masking tape or fabric bias tape. This provides

a rough surface to grip garment and also helps minimize frame

burn.

Cotton sheeting 1 tear-away None

High-density or highly detailed designs may require more

backing. If so, use two pieces of lightweight backing instead of

one piece of heavy backing.

Denim 1 tear-away None Reduce speed if needle begins to heat up and the thread breaks.

Headwear Optional Optional

Change needles more often than usual because the buckram

backing dulls needles faster. A lightweight tear-away backing

helps reduce thread breaks and regulates thread tension. Use a

topping on corduroy or foam cap fronts.

Dress shirt

(woven)

1 tear-away None

High-density or highly detailed designs may require more

backing. If so, use two pieces of lightweight backing instead of

one piece of heavy backing.

Golf shirt 1 cut-away Optional

Use topping for designs containing small lettering or a lot of

detail, and also for piqué knits.

Canton fleece 1 tear-away Optional

Use a topping if the garment has a textured surface, such as a

basketweave or pronounced twill.

Canvas 1 tear-away None Frame tightly.

Corduroy 1 tear-away 1 water-soluble

A higher stitch density or more understitches, as well as a

topping, may be necessary to prevent stitches from sinking into

the fabric.

Lingerie or silk

1 or 2 lightweight

tear-away

Optional

Reduce sewing speed. The thread tension should be low. Use

topping for designs with high detail or small lettering. For very

fine fabrics, use a thinner thread. Avoid extremely narrow satin

stitching on letters or details; instead increase satin stitch width

or use a bean stitch. Gently remove (don’t pull) backing and

topping from garment.

Sweater knit

1 cut-away or

adhesive tear-

away

1 water-soluble

Use tightly woven organza or curtain fabric in a matching color

as a backing for bulky or “holey” knits.

Sweatshirt

1 cut-away or

adhesive tear-

away

Optional

Highly detailed designs may require two layers of lightweight

cut-away stabilizer. Use a topping on extra-thick fabrics or with

fine-detail designs.

T-shirt

1 light-weight

cut-away or

adhesive tear-

away

Optional

Use a topping on designs with fine detail or small lettering.

Tensions should be light. Avoid stitch-heavy designs.

Note

• Due to the wide variety of fabrics and stabilizers available, the above information should be used as

guideline only. If unsure of a particular fabric/stabilizer combination, please sew test a sample prior to

the finished garment.

APPENDIX

255

When using the optional border, quilt, flat or jumbo frame, it is recommended that the table be used for

additional support.

Loosen the two thumb screws 5 to 6 turns.

Position the table so that the notch at the

center aligns with the machine bed, and

then place the table flat on the guide plates.

1 Machine bed

2 Guide plate

3 Notch in table

Installing the Included Table

CAUTION

• Be sure to install the table when using the optional jumbo frame, border frame, quilt frame or flat frame. If

these frames are used without the table installed, the weight of the frame and fabric may cause the frame

to slant and result in poor embroidering quality.

Note

• When carrying the table, be sure to hold it

with both hands.

• Attach the table to the machine before

installing the embroidery frame.

• Do not place heavy objects on top of the

installed table or press down on it.

• Remove the table from the machine while

using embroidery frame that do no need to

be used with the table or while

embroidering tubular items, bags or caps.

The embroidery frames for these types of

objects cannot be installed while the table is

attached to the machine.

256

Pull the table toward you until the pins on

the mounting brackets (attached on each

side to the bottom of the table) fit into the

notches in the guide plates.

1 Pin

2 Notch

Slide in the table while supporting it so that

it remains level. Push the table in until it

lightly touches the machine.

• If the table does not move smoothly, slightly lift it up,

and then slide it in.

While looking below the table, lightly lift it

up, and then lower it so that the screw fits

into the notch at the front of the guide

plate.

1 Notch at front

Tighten the two thumb screws so that the

table is secured.

1 Thumb screw

APPENDIX

257

Removing the table

Loosen the two thumb screws, lift up the

table, and then pull it off toward you.

1 Thumb screw

After the pins on each side reach the

notches in the guide plates, raise the table

to lift the pins up through the notches.

1 Pin

2 Notch

→ Remove the table from the machine.

Carefully pull out the table so that it does

not hit the machine.

Tighten the thumb screws on the table.

258

Patterns can be created in embroidery editing software version PE-DESIGN NEXT or later to be used with

the Jumbo frame (optional).

When a jumbo frame pattern is created in embroidery editing software, the pattern is automatically

divided into two sections that can be combined into a single embroidery design when it is sewn with the

jumbo frame. When the jumbo frame is used, embroidery with a maximum size of 350 mm × 350 mm

(14 inches × 14 inches) can be sewn without having to shift the fabric within the frame.

For details on creating jumbo frame patterns, refer to the Instruction Manual provided with the

embroidery editing software version PE-DESIGN NEXT or later.

After the jumbo frame pattern has been created, follow the procedure described below to transfer the

pattern to the machine using external connection and begin embroidering.

Jumbo frame patterns consist of a set of two patterns. To be able to use them as a jumbo frame pattern, do

not save them in the machine's memory.

Connect the device containing the jumbo

frame pattern to this machine, and then

select the jumbo frame pattern from the

pattern selection screen.

* For details on importing the pattern, refer to

“Recalling from USB media/SD card” on page 165.

Touch to select the first section of the

pattern to be embroidered, and then touch

Embroidery Patterns for the Optional Jumbo Frame

Note

• Before you start sewing the jumbo frame

pattern, prepare the optional jumbo frame.

• Contact your authorized Brother dealer for

purchasing the optional jumbo frame.

• After hooping fabric or a garment, make

sure that the inner frame is lower than the

outer frame so that the frame sits flat

against the extension table.

APPENDIX

259

Check the size of the pattern, and then

hoop fabric that is large enough in the

optional jumbo frame.

* For details on attaching the optional jumbo frame,

refer to “Hooping the Fabric” on page 93.

Attach the jumbo frame to the machine.

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering the first

section of the pattern.

After embroidering of the first section of

the pattern is finished, the following

message appears. Touch .

Note

• When hooping the fabric, position it within

the embroidery frame so there is at least 10

mm of space to the inside of the frame.

1 more than 10 mm (3/8 inch)

2 Location where the pattern is to be embroidered

Note

• When you change the embroidering

position using the jumbo frame, be sure to

be aware of the size of the combined

pattern. You cannot change the position

exceeding the embroidery area.

1 Embroidery area

260

An image of the needle location appears in

the screen with the positioning detection

area framed by a red line. Affix an

embroidery positioning sticker so that it fits

within the red line, and then touch .

1 Red line

• The positioning detection area is under the built-in

camera.

1 Built-in camera is in this box.

2 Affix the sticker in this area.

When the machine's built-in camera has

finished detecting the location of the

embroidery positioning sticker, the

following message appears.

Remove the jumbo frame from the

embroidery machine, turn the frame

around, and then attach it to the machine.

Note

• If the built-in camera cannot detect the

location of the embroidery positioning

sticker, the following error message

appears. Touch , and then perform

the procedure again starting from step

APPENDIX

261

Touch , then the machine starts to

detect the location of the embroidery

positioning sticker.

When the machine's built-in camera has

finished detecting the location of the

embroidery positioning sticker, the

following message appears. Touch .

Remove the embroidery positioning sticker

from the fabric.

Touch to select the next section of the

pattern to be embroidered, and then touch

Touch .

Touch , and then press the start/stop

button to start embroidering the next

section of the pattern.

Note

• If the built-in camera cannot detect the

location of the embroidery positioning

sticker, the following error message

appears. Touch , return the jumbo

frame to its previous orientation, and then

perform the procedure again starting from

step

262

By using the optional cap frame, patterns can be embroidered onto caps and hats. The procedures for

using the cap frame are described below.

Cap frame and its accessories

The cap frame driver and the mounting jig are required in order to use the cap frame.

Using the Optional Cap Frame

Cap frame

1 Embroidering area:

60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

2 The mark indicates the center of the

embroidering area.

3 Snap lock

Cap frame driver and 4 thumb screws

In order to attach the cap frame to the carriage, remove the embroidery frame

holder, and then attach this cap frame driver to the carriage of the machine.

1 Insert the thumb screws into these holes and tighten the screws to secure the

movable section. Use these holes when storing this cap frame driver.

2 Holding Spring

The cap frame is secured by the two holding Springs.

Mounting jig

Use when framing a cap in the cap frame.

1 Holders

The cap frame is secured by the three holders.

2 Mounting bracket

Tighten thumb screw to secure to mounting surface.

3 Screws

Adjust the size of the mounting jig according to the type of cap being

embroidered.

4 Lever

Rotate the cap frame to the location easier to frame the fabric, by pulling

the lever.

Pad Allen screwdriver (large) Allen screwdriver (medium)

• Use when adjusting the ring of the cap frame driver and the height of the L-shaped bracket. (Refer to page 266.)

APPENDIX

263

Types of caps

With the machine, we recommend that the

following types of caps be embroidered.

■ Standard (Pro Style)

1 Face: Pro style

2 6 sections

■ Low Profile (Low fitting)

1 Face: Low fitting

2 6 sections

Memo

• Before installing the cap frame, be sure to

adjust the ring of the cap frame driver and

the height of the L-shaped bracket. (If the

same machine is being used, this

adjustment is only required the first time

that it is used. In addition, this adjustment is

not necessary if the included cap frame is

installed.)

• After the ring of the cap frame driver and the

height of the L-shaped bracket have been

adjusted, they must be adjusted again if a

different machine is being used. The height

may differ depending on the machine that is

used. For details, contact your authorized

Brother dealer.

Note

• If the cap embroidery frame is attached, the

embroidery frame indicators, showing which

embroidery frames can be used, appear as

shown below.

50 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)

(2 inches (H) × 5-1/8

inches (W))

60 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 5-1/8

inches (W))

60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W)

(2-3/8 inches (H) × 14

inches (W))

Otto

International,

Inc. cap model

number

(Example)

OTTO27-007

Mesh backing on

the back of front

panels

(soft or hard)

Constructed firm

front

Unconstructed

soft crown

Ease of framing

(hooping)

Easy

(Recommended)

Fairly easy

Backing 1 to 2 ply 2 to 3 ply

Otto

International,

Inc. cap model

number

(Example)

OTTO23-225 OTTO18-203

Mesh backing on

the back of front

panels

(soft or hard)

Constructed firm

front

Unconstructed

soft crown

Ease of framing

(hooping)

Very difficult

(because the cap

material is very

hard.)

Fairly easy

Backing 1 to 2 ply 2 to 3 ply

264

■ Golf Style

1 Face: Not divided

2 5 sections

■ Cap fabric not recommended for

embroidering

• Caps with a front panel that is less than 50 mm (2

inches) high (such as a sun visor)

• Children’s caps

• Caps with a brim that is longer than 80 mm (3-1/16

inches)

Fabric precautions

■ Cap fabric recommended for

embroidering

• 35%Cotton / 65%Polyester

• 100%Cotton

• 80%Wool / 20%Nylon

• 15%Wool / 85%Acrylic

■ Cap fabric not recommended for

embroidering

If caps of the following types of fabric are used, they

will be very difficult to frame, easily wrinkled, or

easily shrink.

• Polyester Foam

• Stretch material

• Melton Wool

•100%Nylon

•Suede

Otto

International,

Inc. cap model

number

(Example)

OTTO37-024

Mesh backing on

the back of front

panels

(soft or hard)

Constructed firm

front

Ease of framing

(hooping)

Fairly easy

Backing 1 to 2 ply

Memo

• Check if this area 1 is covered with mesh.

Note

• There is no centerline that can be used as a

guide for placing the cap in the cap frame.

Before framing the cap, use a charcoal pen

to mark the centerline.

APPENDIX

265

Preparing to use the cap frame

■ Installing the cap frame driver

Remove the embroidery frame holder from the

carriage on the machine, and then install the cap

frame driver. Before removing the embroidery frame

holder, remove the embroidery frame. (Refer to

“Removing the embroidery frame” on page 68.)

Loosen and then remove the two thumb

screws and the embroidery frame holder.

1 Thumb screws

• The removed thumb screws remain attached to the

embroidery frame holder.

1 Put the two thumb screws back in the embroidery

frame holder.

Remove the two upper thumb screws of the

cap frame driver and set aside. Loosen the

two lower thumb screws (4 turns).

1 Upper thumb screws

2 Lower thumb screws

Pass the machine bed through the ring of

the cap frame driver.

1 Machine bed

Attach the cap frame driver to the carriage as

described below in steps

d through g.

Insert the two thumb screws at the bottom

of the cap frame driver into the v-cuts in the

carriage, and then place the mounting plate

of the cap frame driver on top of the frame-

mounting plate of the carriage.

1 Notch in the carriage

2 Thumb screw of the cap frame driver

3 Mounting plate of the cap frame driver

4 Frame-mounting plate of the carriage

CAUTION

• Before changing any embroidery frame holder,

make sure your machine is turned off.

Note

• Be careful that the cap frame driver does

not hit any nearby parts, such as the

presser foot.

266

Insert the pins on the frame-mounting plate

of the carriage into the holes in the

mounting plate of the cap frame driver.

1 Pins on the frame-mounting plate of the carriage

2 Holes in the mounting plate of the cap frame driver

Insert and tighten the two upper thumb

screws in outer holes of mounting plate of

cap frame driver.

While pushing in the cap frame driver

toward the machine so that it is fully

inserted, tighten the two lower thumb

screws to secure the cap frame driver.

→ This completes the installation of the cap frame

driver.

■ Adjusting the cap frame driver

1 L-shaped bracket

2 Ring

Turn on the machine. After the carriage

moves to its initial position, turn off the

machine.

Using the Allen screwdriver (medium),

loosen the two hexagonal screws. Loosen

the screws only by about one turn.

1 Hexagonal screws

2 Allen screwdriver (medium)

Memo

• If the same machine is being used, the

adjustment to the cap frame driver is only

required the first time that the machine is

used.

Note

• Be sure to adjust the cap frame driver with

the carriage at its initial position.

Note

• Do not loosen them too far.

APPENDIX

267

Lower the L-shaped bracket to make it

touch the machine bed and then tighten the

two hexagonal screws using the Allen

screwdriver (medium). Firmly tighten the

screws.

1 L-shaped bracket

Using the Allen screwdriver (large), loosen

the four hexagonal screws on the inside of

the ring. Loosen the screws only by about

one turn.

1 Hexagonal screws

2 Allen screwdriver (large)

→ When the screws are loosened, the ring can be

lowered.

Insert the pad between the machine bed

and the ring of the cap frame driver.

1 Pad

2 Machine bed

3 Ring of the cap frame driver

Lightly press down the ring, and then use

the Allen screwdriver (large) to tighten the

four hexagonal screws on the inside of the

ring.

Firmly tighten the screws.

1 Ring

Remove the pad inserted in step e.

Note

• Do not loosen them too far.

CAUTION

• Make sure that each hexagonal screw is firmly

tightened. If any screw remains loosen, injuries

may result.

268

■ Installing the needle plate spacer

Attach the needle plate spacer to the needle plate.

1 Needle plate spacer

■ Preparing the mounting jig

Attach the mounting jig to a stable surface, such as a

desk.

Loosen the thumb screw for the mounting

jig to open the mounting bracket so that it is

wider than the thickness of the mounting

surface.

• The mounting bracket can be mounted onto a

mounting surface with a thickness from 9 mm (3/8

inch) to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches).

Securely clamp the mounting bracket onto

the mounting surface by tightening the

thumb screw.

1 Mounting bracket

2 Mounting surface

3 Tighten thumb screw

Check that there is no looseness.

If there is looseness, mount the mounting jig onto the

mounting surface again.

Adjust the size of the mounting jig

according to the type (size) of cap being

embroidered.

1 Low Profile (shorter caps)

2 Standard type (taller caps)

Memo

• If there is a gap between the clamp of the

thumb screw and the mounting surface,

insert the included pad as shown below.

1 Mounting bracket

2 Mounting surface (worktable, desk, etc.)

3 Pad

4 Thumb screw

Note

• Be sure that the mounting bracket is

securely clamped onto the mounting

surface and that the thumb screw is firmly

tightened.

• Do not attach the mounting jig to an

unstable surface (flexible, bent or warped).

• Be careful that the mounting jig does not fall

when it is removed.

APPENDIX

269

■ For the standard type

Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the three screws

(one each at the top and on the left and right sides)

on the outside of the mounting jig two or three turns.

1 Screws

2 Phillips screwdriver

Pull the mounting jig toward you, and then use the

Phillips screwdriver to tighten the three screws (one

each at the top, left and right sides).

→ This completes the preparation of the mounting jig.

Attaching the cap frame

Put the cap into the cap frame attached to the

mounting jig, and then remove the cap frame from

the mounting jig with the cap clamped. Next,

attach the cap frame to the cap frame driver on the

machine.

■ Attaching the cap frame to the

mounting jig and putting a cap into

the frame

Attach the cap frame to the mounting jig.

Slide the cap frame onto the mounting jig, making sure

that the notch at the base of the brim holder on the cap

frame is aligned with the guide plate on the top of the

mounting jig.

1 Guide plate on mounting jig

2 Brim holder

3 Notch

Note

• Do not remove the three screws (one each

at the top, left and right), otherwise they

may be lost. Only turn the screws to slightly

loosen them.

270

With your fingers behind the handles on the

left and right sides of the mounting jig, push

the cap frame onto the mounting jig by

pushing the handles on the left and right

sides of the cap frame with your thumbs.

1 Handle on mounting jig

2 Handle on cap frame

→ The cap frame is secured when the two holders on

the cap frame snap into place.

Release the snap lock on the cap frame by

pressing down and then disengage the latch.

Open the clamping frame. Also, open brim

holder.

1 Snap lock released

2 Clamping frame opened

3 Brim holder

Align the center of the stabilizer with the

center of the brim holder.

We recommend a stabilizer size of 100 × 510 mm (4 ×

20 inches).

1 Teeth

• Make sure that the teeth go through the stabilizer to

firmly secure it.

Push both ends of the stabilizer into the

holes at the bottom of the cap frame to

firmly secure it.

APPENDIX

271

Lift out the sweat guard on the inside of the

cap, and then place the cap over the cap

frame.

Using both hands, hold both sides of the cap, and then

align the edge of the lower frame with the base of the

brim.

1 Edge of the lower frame

2 Sweat guard

3 Base of the brim

At the same time, align the center line of the cap with

the centerline of the sweat guard holder on the cap

frame, and then slide the sweat guard under the sweat

guard holder.

1 Sweat guard holder

2 Center line of sweat guard holder

3 Center line of cap

Align the center line of the cap with the

notch in the mounting jig.

1 Center line of cap

2 Notch in mounting jig

Before closing the clamping frame, push the

ends of the sweat guard into the cap to

move them away from the hinge and latch

of the clamping frame.

1 Hinge of clamping frame

2 Fold the sweat guard as shown.

• Neatly folding the sweat guard before closing the

clamping frame helps prevent wrinkles in the cap.

Close the clamping frame so that the brim

of the cap passes between the inside

clamping frame and the outside clamping

frame.

1 Brim of the cap

2 Inside clamping frame

3 Outside clamping frame

Neatly align the teeth of the clamping frame

with the base of the brim.

1 Teeth of outside clamping frame

2 Base of brim

272

Secure the clamping frame with the snap

lock. At this time, push the end of the sweat

guard into the cap so it does not interfere

with the snap lock.

1 Snap lock

2 Fold the sweat guard as shown.

Close the lever of the snap lock.

1 Lever of the snap lock

Pull the brim holder up as far as possible,

flipping the holder over the cap brim then

pushing down on the holder to secure the

brim.

1 Brim holder

2 Center line of brim holder

• Make sure the notch comes out.

Note

• Loosen the two screws for the outside

clamping frame, and then adjust the

position of the outside clamping frame so

that it conforms to the shape of the cap and

so that the teeth of the clamping frame

perfectly align with the base of the brim.

1 Teeth of outside clamping frame

2 Base of brim

3 Outside clamping frame

4 Screws for the outside clamping frame

Note

• Before closing the lever of the snap lock,

check that the cap has not moved out of

position and that there are no wrinkles.

Adjust the cap if necessary.

Note

• If the cap fabric is thick and the clamping

frame cannot be closed, or if the fabric is

thin and the cap is too loose within the

frame, loosen the screw for the inside

clamping frame, and then adjust the inside

clamping frame.

1 Inside clamping frame

2 Screw for the inside clamping frame

APPENDIX

273

Adjust the brim so that it maintains a

rounded shape.

While pulling the lever toward you that is

located behind the handle on the right side

of the mounting jig, rotate the cap frame to

the left. After the cap frame has been

rotated 90°, release the lever to lock the

cap frame in place.

1 Handle

2 Lever

Pull the ends of the cap out from the center

to remove any slack.

Use the clips to secure the cap.

Attach the clips with their handles folded inward. If the

handles are pointed outward, they may be hit by the

machine’s presser foot.

1 Clips

While pulling the lever toward you that is

located behind the handle on the right side

of the mounting jig, rotate the cap frame to

the right.

After the cap frame has been rotated 180° and the

brim points to the right, release the lever to lock the

cap frame in place.

1 Handle

2 Lever

Pull the ends of the cap out from the center

to remove any slack in the same way as the

other side.

274

Use the clips to secure the cap.

1 Clips

• Attach the clips with their handles folded inward. If

the handles are pointed outward, they may be hit by

the machine’s presser foot.

→ This completes the positioning of the cap in the cap

frame.

Return the cap frame to its original

position.

• While pulling the lever behind the handle on the right

side of the mounting jig toward you, rotate the cap

frame to the left. After the cap frame has been rotated

90° and the brim points up, release the lever to lock

the cap frame in place.

1 Handle

2 Lever

Remove the cap frame from the mounting

jig.

To remove the cap frame from the mounting jig, place

both thumbs on the holders on the mounting jig,

grasping the handles on both the right and left side of

the cap frame, gently pulling toward you. As shown in

the illustration.

1 Holder

2 Handle

■ Attaching the cap frame to the

embroidery machine

The cap frame driver is required in order to attach

the cap frame to the embroidery machine. Before

attaching the cap frame to the machine, attach the

cap frame driver to the carriage. (Refer to “Installing

the cap frame driver” on page 265.)

Before attaching the cap frame, adjust the position

of the cap supports to fit the type (size) of cap to be

embroidered. To adjust move the cap supports to

the front or back depending on the cap size.

Loosen the four screws on the cap supports

two or three turns, and then move the cap

supports to a position where tension in the

cap will be maintained.

• Do not remove any of the screws, otherwise they may

be lost. Only turn the screws to slightly loosen them.

1 Cap supports

2 Screws

3 Low profile (shorter caps)

4 Standard (taller caps)

• Be sure to adjust both the right and left cap supports

to the same position.

APPENDIX

275

Attach the cap frame to the cap frame

driver.

Turn the cap frame to the left so the brim of the cap

does not hit the embroidery machine. Do not insert the

cap frame with the brim pointing to the right,

otherwise parts of the cap frame may hit the

embroidery machine.

• Be careful that the cap frame does not hit any nearby

parts, such as the presser foot.

After turning the cap frame so that the front of the cap

faces upward, align the ring of the cap frame with the

ring of the cap frame driver. While sliding the cap

frame to the left and right, align the notch in the cap

frame with the guiding plate on the cap frame driver,

and then snap the frame into place.

1 Guiding plate on cap frame driver

2 Notch on cap frame

3 Holder

→ The cap frame is secured with holders. Make sure

that all of the holders on the driver are firmly

secured in the frame holes. This completes the

installation of the cap frame, and the cap is ready to

be embroidered.

■ Removing the cap frame

After embroidering is finished, remove the cap

frame, and then remove the cap.

Remove the cap frame from the cap frame

driver.

Place both thumbs on the cap frame holders, grasping

the handles on both the right and left side, gently

pulling toward you. As shown in the illustration.

1 Holder

2 Handle

Before removing the cap frame, turn it to the left so

that the brim of the cap does not hit the embroidery

machine.

• Be careful that the cap frame does not hit any nearby

parts, such as the presser foot.

After removing the brim holder, unlock the

snap lock of the clamping frame, remove

the clips, and then remove the cap.

1 Brim holder

2 Snap lock

3 Clips

276

Installing the embroidery frame

holder

After embroidering using the cap embroidery

frame is finished, remove the needle plate spacer

and cap frame driver, and then re-attach the

embroidery frame holder.

Remove the needle plate spacer.

1 Needle plate spacer

Loosen the two lower thumb screws.

1 Thumb screws

Remove the two upper thumb screws.

1 Thumb screws

Remove the cap frame driver.

With the hole on the sweat guard holder

aligned with the centerline of the guiding

plate, insert the two thumb screws removed

in step

c into the holes at the top, and then

tighten the thumb screws.

1 Hole on the sweat guard holder

2 Centerline of guiding plate

3 Holes on the top

• Insert the thumb screws into the holes where the cap

frame driver that was originally installed (holes that

the thumb screws were removed from in step

b on

page 265).

→ The movable section of the cap frame driver is

secured.

Note

• Be careful that the cap frame driver does

not hit any nearby parts, such as the

presser foot.

APPENDIX

277

Align the holes on the embroidery frame

holder with the pins in the frame-mounting

plate of the carriage.

1 Pins in the frame-mounting plate

2 Holes on the embroidery frame holder

Secure the embroidery frame holder with

the two thumb screws.

1 Use the thumb screws included with the machine

(thumb screws removed in step

a on page 265).

Additional digitizing information

When creating a pattern for embroidering with a

cap frame, pay attention to following points in

order to avoid registration problems (misalignment

of gaps in the pattern).

Sew underlay stitches.

Start the embroidery pattern from the

center, and sew toward the ends.

With the machine, the order in which patterns are

selected when they are combined is the order in which

they will be sewn. For the following example, select

the patterns in the order “E”

→“A”→“B”→“R” to

make the combined pattern “BEAR”.

CAUTION

• Using the disc-shaped screwdriver included,

firmly tighten the thumb screws.

Incorrect

sewing

order

Correct

sewing

order

Note

• Do NOT sew from one end to the other,

otherwise wrinkling or shrinking may occur.

278

When sewing outlines of patterns, make

sure that the stitch width of the satin

stitching is at least 2 mm, and that the

stitching over-laps the fabric by at least 1

mm. Also, make sure that there are no

jumps of long stitches in the outlining on

each region or letter.

1 At least 1 mm

2 At least 2 mm

CAUTION

• Don’t sew more than four overlapping layers.

1 Specify that overlapping areas not be sewn.

APPENDIX

279

When winding the bobbin thread onto a metal bobbin, use the optional bobbin winder. The procedures

for using the optional bobbin winder are described below.

Precautions

For precautions concerning the power supply, refer to page 32.

Optional bobbin winder and its accessories

Check that the following bobbin winder and accessories are included.

* Visit your authorized Brother dealer.

Using the Optional Bobbin Winder

CAUTION

• Be sure to place the bobbin winder on a level, stable surface.

• Only use the bobbins supplied with this bobbin winder.

1. 2. 3. 4.

1 Main power switch

2 Bobbin winder shaft

3 Hole for thread guide

4 Hole for spool pin

5 DC input connector

6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

No. Name Part Code No. Name Part Code

1 Bobbin winder PRBW1 6 Power supply cord* –

2 Spool pin XC5949-051 7 Metal bobbin × 5 100376-051

3 Spool cushion XA0679-050 8 Spool cap 130012-054

4 Thread guide XC6644-151 9 Weight (L) XC5974-151

5 AC adapter* – 10 Weight (S) XC6631-051

Memo

• The part code of the bobbin winder set may differ depending on the country/area where the machine

was purchased.

• Depending on the model you purchased, the bobbin winder may be included with the machine.

280

Setting up the optional bobbin

winder

Attach the spool pin, spool cushion and thread

guide to the bobbin winder.

Insert the spool pin and the spool cushion.

Lower the holder, and then insert the spool pin straight

into the hole. And insert the spool cushion.

1 Spool pin

2 Spool pin holder

3 Hole for spool pin

4 Spool cushion

Insert the thread guide.

Insert the thread guide straight into the hole with the

pins on the thread guide aligned with the notches on

the sides of the hole.

1 Pins on thread guide

2 Notches on hole for thread guide

3 Hole for thread guide

• Firmly insert the thread guide as far as possible and

make sure that it is secure.

Connecting the AC adapter

Insert the plug of the power supply cord

into the AC adapter.

Plug the cord on the AC adapter into the

DC input connector of the bobbin winder,

and then insert the plug of the power supply

cord into a household electrical outlet.

• Be sure to firmly insert the plug on the AC adapter

into the DC input connector of the bobbin winder.

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the included power cord. Using

any other power cord may result in damage.

• Be sure to use the included AC adapter. Using

any other AC adapter may result in damage.

• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC

adapter, be sure that the unit is not operating.

• After using the bobbin winder, disconnect it

from the electrical outlet.

APPENDIX

281

Winding the bobbin

Prepare the bobbin and the spool of bobbin

thread. Use cotton or spun polyester bobbin

thread (from 74 dtex/2 to 100 dtex/2).

Align the groove in the bobbin with the

spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set

the bobbin on the shaft.

1 Groove in the bobbin

2 Spring on the shaft

Set the thread spool on the spool pin.

1 Thread spool

2 Spool pin

Pass the thread through the hole in the left

of the thread guide toward the front of the

winder.

1 Hole in the thread guide

Pass the thread around the tension disc as

shown in the illustration. Make sure that the

thread is correctly fed into the tension disc.

1 Tension disc

Note

• When using a small spool, remove the spool

cushion and set the spool directly onto the

spool pin. Also use the included spool cap

to keep the small spool stable.

282

Pass the thread through the hole in the right

of the thread guide toward the back of the

machine.

1 Hole in the thread guide

Wind the thread clockwise around the

bobbin 4 or 5 times, as shown in the

illustration.

Pass the end of the thread through the guide

slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the

thread. The cutter will cut the thread.

1 Guide slit

2 Bobbin winder seat

Slide the bobbin holder, until it clicks into

place.

1 Bobbin holder

Press the main power switch to start

winding the bobbin.

→ Start winding the bobbin.

The bobbin will stop rotating automatically

when it is done winding, and the bobbin

holder will return to its original position.

Note

• Be sure to follow the procedure described.

If the bobbin is wound without the thread

being cut with the cutter, when the bobbin

thread runs low, the thread may become

tangled around the bobbin and cause the

needle to break.

APPENDIX

283

Remove the bobbin.

Pull the thread through the guide slit in the

bobbin winder seat to cut the thread with

the cutter.

■ If bobbin winding is stopped before

it is finished:

The bobbin winder stops automatically if the thread

does not feed, for example, if it becomes tangled on

the spool pin. If this occurs, correctly thread the

bobbin winder, and then wind the bobbin correctly.

Note

• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on

the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could

loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,

resulting in damage to the bobbin winder.

CAUTION

• Check that the bobbin

thread has been wound

correctly, otherwise the

needle may break or the

thread tension will be

incorrect.

• Be sure to clean the bobbin case each time

that the bobbin is changed. Thread wax and

dust easily collect around the hole in the

tension-adjusting spring on the bobbin case,

resulting in an incorrect thread tension. For

details, refer to “Cleaning the bobbin case” on

page 286.

• Be sure to check the tension of the bobbin

thread each time that the bobbin is changed.

• Depending on the bobbin thread type, the

tension of the bobbin thread may differ. Be

sure to check the tension of the bobbin thread

and adjust the tension if necessary.

For a metal bobbin, use both weights, large (L)

and small (S).

For detailed instructions on how to adjust the

bobbin tension, refer to page 124.

1 Weight (L) (Part Code: XC5974-151)

2 Weight (S) (Part Code: XC6631-051)

284

Simple embroidery machine maintenance operations are described below. Always keep the machine

clean, otherwise malfunctions may occur.

Cleaning the LCD

If the surface of the LCD is dirty, lightly wipe it

with a soft dry cloth. Do not use organic cleansers

or detergents.

Cleaning the machine surface

If the surface of the machine is slightly dirty, wipe

it with a soft dry cloth. If the machine is heavily

dirty, lightly soak a cloth in neutral detergent,

squeeze it out firmly, and then wipe the surface of

the machine. After cleaning it once with a wet

cloth, wipe it again with a dry cloth.

Cleaning the hook

Periodically remove lint and dust for better

performance from Hook race area.

Use the included cleaning brush.

Turn off the embroidery machine.

Open the hook cover, and remove the

bobbin case. (Refer to page 36.)

Use the included cleaning brush to remove

any lint and dust from the hook and its

surrounding area.

After cleaning is finished, insert the bobbin

case into the hook, and then close the hook

cover. (Refer to page 37.)

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Unplug the power supply cord before cleaning

the machine, otherwise injuries or an electric

shock may occur.

Note

• Do not use chemical products, such as

benzene or thinner.

CAUTION

• Unplug the power supply cord before cleaning

the machine, otherwise injuries or an electric

shock may occur.

CAUTION

• If the hook is scratched or damaged, consult

your authorized Brother dealer.

APPENDIX

285

Cleaning around the needle plate

If lint and dust collect around the moving knife,

the fixed knife or the thread retaining plate, the

thread may not be cut correctly and the error

message may appear, or various parts of the

machine may be damaged. Make sure to clean

around the needle plate once a month.

Use on offset screwdriver and the included

cleaning brush.

Turn off the embroidery machine.

Remove the needle plate.

With an offset screwdriver, loosen the screws, and

then remove the needle plate, and then open the hook

cover.

1 Needle plate

2 Hook cover

Remove the spacer.

1 Spacer

Use the included cleaning brush to remove

any lint and dust from the moving knife, the

fixed knife, the thread retaining plate, and

their surrounding areas.

1 Remove all lint in this area

After cleaning is finished, install the spacer

back.

First, position the spacer so that it hooks around the

elliptical notch, then position the spacer so that it

surrounds the screw head. Slide the spacer in the

direction of the arrow to secure it.

1 Elliptical notch

2 Screw head

CAUTION

• Unplug the power supply cord before cleaning

the machine, otherwise injuries or an electric

shock may occur.

286

Attach the needle plate in the opposite way

that it was removed in step

b , and then

close the hook cover.

1 Needle plate

Cleaning the bobbin case

Thread wax and dust easily collect around the

hole in the tension-adjusting spring on the bobbin

case, resulting in an incorrect thread tension.

Therefore, it should be cleaned each time when

the bobbin is changed.

Use a piece of paper with the thickness of a

business card.

Open the hook cover, remove the bobbin

case, and then remove the bobbin. (Refer to

page 36.)

Slide the paper under the tension-adjusting

spring to remove any dust.

Use a corner of the paper to remove any dust from

around the hole.

1 Tension-adjusting spring

2 Hole

3 Paper

Use the included cleaning brush to remove

any lint and dust from inside the bobbin

case.

After cleaning is finished, insert the bobbin

into the bobbin case and the bobbin case

into the hook, and then close the hook

cover. (Refer to page 36, 37.)

Note

• Do not bend the tension-adjusting spring. In

addition, do not use anything other than

thick paper or paper of the specified

thickness to clean the bobbin case.

APPENDIX

287

Cleaning the thread paths of the

upper threads

If dust or lint has accumulated in the thread guides

or tension unit in the paths of the upper threads,

the thread may break while embroidery is being

sewn. Periodically clean the thread paths.

■ Cleaning the thread guides

Use the included cleaning brush to remove

any lint and dust from below the thread

guide plates.

Clean the thread guide plates for both the upper thread

guides and the middle thread guides.

1 Upper thread guide

2 Middle thread guide

1 Thread guide plate

■ Disassembling and cleaning the

tension unit

To remove tension dial, turn dial

counterclockwise as shown on illustration.

1 Tension dial

Using the included cleaning brush, remove

any lint and dust from the two pieces of felt

washers (top, bottom) inside the tension

dial.

1 Tension dial

2 Nylon shoulder washer

3 Tension spring

4 Tension base spring

5 Felt washer (top)

6 Tension disc

7 Felt washer (bottom)

Reassembling the tension unit.

Note

• When reassembling the tension unit, be

sure not to install the tension disc upside-

down.

There is a magnet on the bottom.

Bottom

Top

1 Magnet

• When reassembling the tension unit, be

careful not to lose any parts or install any

parts in an incorrect order. The machine

may not operate correctly if the tension

units are incorrectly reassembled.

288

Oiling the machine

In order to extend the life of the embroidery

machine’s parts and keep the machine operating

correctly, be sure to oil the machine before the

first time that it is used. If too little oil was applied

to the race, an error message may appear.

Afterward, put a drop of oil onto the hook once a

day before use, and put a drop of oil to the lower

needle bar felt washer every 40 to 50 hours of

machine use.

■ Oiling the race

Touch .

→ Following message appears.

Open the hook cover, and remove the

bobbin case. (Refer to page 36, 37.)

Touch .

→ The race moves to the correct position for oiling.

Put a drop of oil onto the hook.

1 Punch a small hole in oil bottle.

2 Apply oil here.

• Use a pointed object to punch a small hole in the tip

of the included oiler before using it.

Touch appeared in the following

screen.

→ The race backs to its original position.

After oiling, insert the bobbin case into the

hook, and then close the hook cover. (Refer

to page 37.)

Front angle view Side view

APPENDIX

289

■ Oiling the needle bars

From embroidering screen, select one needle bar at

a time. (Refer to page 63 for needle bar screen). Turn

the handwheel counterclockwise bringing the

needle bar to its lowest position. Put one drop of oil,

as high as possible on the needle bar above the felt

washer.

1 Apply oil here.

• Too much oil may drip onto sewing project.

About the maintenance message

Once this message appears, it is recommended to

take your machine to your nearest authorized

Brother dealer for a regular maintenance check.

Although this message will disappear and the

machine will continue to function once you touch

, the message will display several more times

until the appropriate maintenance is performed.

Please take the time to arrange for the

maintenance that your machine requires once this

message appears. Such steps will help to ensure

you receive continued, uninterrupted hours of

machine operation for the future.

Note

• Put a drop of oil onto the hook once a day

before use.

• Apply one drop of oil on the lower needle

bar above the felt washer every 40 – 50

hours of sewing time.

• Apply only sewing machine oil. Use of any

other type of oil may result in damage to the

embroidery machine.

• Do not apply too much oil. Fabric or thread

may get contaminated. If too much oil is

applied, wipe off any excess with a rag.

• If the thread breaks while sewing or the

operating noise of the hook becomes loud,

apply oil onto the race hook.

290

On-screen troubleshooting

This embroidery machine is equipped with an

easy-to-use troubleshooting feature for problems

during sewing. Touch the key that shows the

problem, and then check for the causes that are

displayed.

Touch .

Touch , and then touch

Touch the key that contains a description of

the problem.

Check the items that are displayed.

After checking the desired information,

touch .

Touch .

→ The Operation Guide and the Video screen appear.

Troubleshooting

APPENDIX

291

Troubleshooting

If the machine does not operate correctly, check for the following points/issues before requesting service.

If the suggested remedy does not correct the problem, contact your authorized Brother dealer.

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

The embroidery

machine does not

operate.

The machine is not turned on. Turn on the embroidery machine. p.38

The machine has not been unlocked. Touch the unlock key. p.64

The start/stop button was not pressed.

With the machine unlocked, press the

start/stop button.

p.64

The embroidery frame

cannot be attached to

the machine.

The embroidery frame holder attached

to the machine is not appropriate for

the selected embroidery frame.

Select the appropriate embroidery

frame holder for the embroidery frame.

p.88

The embroidery frame

cannot be removed or

attached.

Depending on the position where the

machine’s carriage has stopped, it may

be difficult to remove or attach the

embroidery frame.

Touch the “Needle bar/Frame move

key” to position the carriage, so the

embroidery frame can easily be

removed or attached.

p.88

Embroidering is

interrupted while

embroidering a large

project using the flat,

quilt or jumbo frame.

Embroidering is interrupted by the

presser feet not in use catching on the

fabric outside of the design area.

Stitch the design as close to the center

of the embroidery frame using needle

bars 3 through 7, keeping the head of

the machine as centered as possible.

p.110, 132

The needle breaks.

The needle is not installed correctly. Correctly install the needle. p.86

The needle set screw is loose.

Use the Allen screw driver to securely

tighten the needle set screw.

p.86

The needle is bent or blunt. Replace the needle with a new one. p.33, 86

The area around the hole in the needle

plate is damaged.

1 Scratches/Burrs

Replace the needle plate.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The needle hits/touches the needle

plate.

1 Needle

2 Hole in needle plate

3 Needle hits hole

Replace or consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

p.86

292

The needle breaks.

The presser foot is set too high and not

correctly positioned.

The needle hits/touches the presser

foot.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The area around the embroidery foot

hole is damaged.

1 Scratches or Burrs

Replace the presser foot.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

Sliding surface on hook race is not

smooth. There are scratches or burrs on

it.

1 Hook race area

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The bobbin or bobbin case are not

correctly installed.

Remove and reinstall bobbin and

bobbin case.

p.36, 37

The hook is not correctly installed.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The hook stopper is not correctly

installed, the hook is making a

complete rotation.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The upper thread is not threaded

correctly.

The upper thread is catching

somewhere.

Pull the upper thread by hand from

below the presser foot, and check that

the thread moves smoothly. If the

thread does not move, it is not threaded

correctly. Thread the upper thread

correctly. Make sure the thread is

caught by the needle bar thread guide.

p.57-60

The upper thread tension is set too

high. It does not run.

Decrease the upper thread tension and

make sure tension disc rotates when

pulling on thread.

p.125

A bobbin designed specifically for this

machine is not used.

Use the correct bobbin. p.33

The needle and the hook are not

correctly passing each other.

Hook timing may be OFF. Consult your

nearest authorized Brother dealer.

There is backlash play (forward/

backward) in the needle bar case.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The thread density of the embroidery

data is too fine.

Three or more overlapping stitches are

being sewn.

Using a data design system, correct the

thread density and overstitching

settings in the embroidery data.

p.148

The thread is not cut

automatically.

Lint or dust has accumulated around

the needle plate (moving knife, fixed

knife or thread retaining plate).

Remove any lint or dust around the

needle plate.

p.285

A bobbin case designed specifically for

this machine is not used.

Use the correct bobbin case. –

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

APPENDIX

293

After the threads are

automatically cut, the

upper thread is too

short and comes out of

the needle.

Lint or dust has accumulated around

the needle plate (moving knife, fixed

knife or thread retaining plate).

Remove any lint or dust around the

needle plate.

p.285

The upper thread

breaks.

The needle is not correctly installed. Correctly install the needle. p.86

The needle set screw is loose.

Use the Allen screw driver to tighten

the needle set screw.

p.86

The needle is bent or blunt. Replace the needle with a new one. p.33, 86

The area around the hole in the needle

plate is damaged.

1 Scratches/Burrs

Replace the needle plate or consult

your nearest authorized Brother dealer.

The needle is touching the needle

plate.

1 Needle

2 Needle plate hole

3 Needle touching hole

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The presser foot is set too high and not

correctly positioned.

The needle hits/touches the presser

foot.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The area around the embroidery foot

hole is damaged.

1 Scratches/Burrs

Replace the presser foot.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

Using a specialty thread like a metallic

thread.

Slow down the machine sewing speed. p.139

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

294

The upper thread

breaks.

Sliding surface on hook is not smooth.

There are burns on it.

1 Hook race area

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The thread is loose in the hook area.

Remove the loose thread. If the thread

is tangled in the hook, clean the hook.

p.284

The play between the hook and the

race is too much.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The hook does not rotate smoothly. Remove lint, clean and apply oil. p.284, 288

The space between the hook stopper

and the hook cannot be adjusted.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The upper thread is not threaded

correctly.

Pull the upper thread by hand from

below the presser foot, and check that

the thread moves smoothly. If the

thread does not move smoothly, it is

not correctly threaded.

Un-thread the machine and

re-thread the machine.

Make sure the thread is correctly

positioned in the needle bar thread

guide.

p.57-60

Upper thread is not positioned in upper

or middle thread guide.

Make sure thread passes completely

under upper and middle thread guide.

p.57-60

There are knots or tangles in the thread. Remove any knots or tangles.

The upper thread tension is too high. Decrease the upper thread tension. p.125

The lower thread tension is incorrect.

The thread does not roll out of the

bobbin case smoothly.

Adjust the lower thread tension. p.124

The bobbin case is damaged.

Replace the bobbin case with a new

one.

p.33

The bobbin thread is not wound

correctly.

Check that the bobbin is wound so that

it is about 80% full and that the thread

is evenly wound. If the bobbin is not

correctly wound, replace the bobbin

with one that is correctly wound or

rewind the bobbin.

p.33

A bobbin designed specifically for this

machine is not used.

Use the correct bobbin. p.33

The automatic needle-threading

mechanism is broken.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

Adhesive is attached to the needle. Replace the needle. p.86

The fabric is not taut.

Firmly set the fabric in the embroidery

frame so that it is taut.

p.48, 93

The thread quality is poor.

The thread quality is too weak due to

age of thread. Replace thread.

The embroidery data contains stitches

with a pitch of zero.

Delete all stitches with a zero pitch. p.228

The embroidery data contains many

stitches with an extremely small pitch.

Delete all stitches with a small pitch. p.228

The thread density of the embroidery

data is too fine.

Three or more overlapping stitches are

being sewn.

Using a data design system, correct the

thread density and overstitching

settings in the embroidery data.

p.148

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

APPENDIX

295

The upper thread

breaks.

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

The bobbin thread

breaks.

The bobbin thread is not correctly

threaded.

Correctly thread the bobbin thread. p.36

The bobbin is scratched or does not

rotate smoothly.

Replace the bobbin. p.36

The bobbin case is damaged. Replace the bobbin case. p.36

The thread is tangled.

Remove the thread jammed and clean

the hook.

p.284

A bobbin designed specifically for this

machine is not used.

Use the correct bobbin. p.33

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

Stitches are skipped.

The upper thread is not threaded

correctly.

Thread the upper thread correctly. p.57

The needle is bent or blunt. Replace the needle with a new one. p.33, 86

The needle is not installed correctly. Correctly install the needle. p.86

Dust has accumulated under the needle

plate or in the hook.

Clean the hook and the needle plate. p.284, 285

The needle and the hook are not

correctly passing each other.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The thread twist is either too tight or too

loose.

Improper twisting results in irregular

loop formation. Try using a new spool.

The embroidery

pattern is misaligned.

The thread is tangled.

Use tweezers to remove any tangled

thread from the hook.

The fabric is not secured in the

embroidery frame (for example, the

fabric is not taut).

If the fabric is not taut, the pattern may

become misaligned or the stitching

may shrink. Be sure to correctly frame

the fabric in the embroidery frame.

p.48, 93

The embroidery frame is too large for

the size of the embroidery.

Use an embroidery frame that is close

to the size of the embroidery.

p.88

The thumbscrews on the embroidery

frame holder are loose.

Use the included disc-shaped

screwdriver to firmly tighten the

thumbscrews.

p.30

Stabilizer (backing) is not used.

Use stabilizer (backing) when

embroidering on thin or stretch fabrics,

fabrics with a coarse weave or fabrics

that easily allow the stitching to shrink.

Use hard stabilizer when embroidering

on a cap made of soft material.

p.92

The embroidery frame is not correctly

attached to the carriage.

Correctly attach the embroidery frame

to the carriage. Make sure that the pins

on the left and right arms of the

embroidery frame holder securely fit

into the holes in the handles on the

embroidery frame.

p.50

The carriage or the embroidery frame is

hitting objects.

The pattern may become misaligned if

the carriage or embroidery frame is

hitting objects. Make sure that there are

no objects within the operating field of

the embroidery frame.

The fabric is caught or pinched.

Stop the machine, and then correctly

position the fabric.

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

296

The embroidery

pattern is misaligned.

The carriage moved while removing

embroidery frame.

The pattern may become misaligned if

the presser foot was hit or the carriage

was moved while replacing bobbin

thread, changing needle, or working

near embroidery frame.

Be careful when removing and

reattaching the embroidery frame while

replacing bobbin thread, changing

needle, or working near embroidery

frame.

If the carriage is moved, turn the

machine off, then on again. The correct

frame position at the time that the

machine was stopped is stored in the

machine’s memory, and the

embroidery frame is returned to the

correct position.

The design was not digitized correctly.

The design may need more pull

compensation or underlay to

accommodate stretchy or high-napped

fabrics.

The size of the

installed embroidery

frame is not correctly

detected.

The thumbscrews on the embroidery

frame holder are loose.

Use the included disc-shaped

screwdriver to firmly tighten the

thumbscrews.

p.30

The starting position

for the embroidery

frame is horizontally

misaligned.

The thumbscrews on the embroidery

frame holder are loose.

Use the included disc-shaped

screwdriver to firmly tighten the

thumbscrews.

p.30

There are loops in the

upper thread.

The upper thread tension is low.

After passing the upper thread through

the hole in the presser foot, pull the

thread by hand to check the thread

tension. If it is difficult to determine,

compare it with other needle bars

where looping does not occur.

p.125

The thread tension does not correspond

to the amount that the thread tension

knob was tightened.

If the thread tension cannot be

adjusted, thread wax and dust may

have collected in the upper or middle

thread guide plates, causing the thread

tension guide plates to rise. Clean the

thread tension guide plates.

p.287

Thread is not correctly threaded around

upper thread tension discs.

Clean upper thread tension disc.

Rethread and make sure tension disc

rotates when pulling on thread.

p.287

The thread quality is poor.

Try sewing with different thread. If the

problem no longer occurs after the

thread is changed, the thread quality is

the problem. Replace the thread with

one of good quality.

The machine is noisy.

Lint may be wound in the hook. Clean the hook. p.284

The upper thread is not threaded

correctly.

Check the thread path, and then thread

the upper thread again.

p.57

The hook is damaged.

Replace the hook.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

Not enough oil was applied. Oil recommended parts. p.288

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

APPENDIX

297

The needle threader

cannot be used.

The needle is not at the correct

position.

Touch the key to move the desired

needle bar to be threaded into

embroidering position.

p.63

Recommended needles are not used on

this machine.

Replace and use recommended needle. p.33, 86

The needle is not installed correctly. Correctly install the needle. p.33, 86

The hook on the automatic needle-

threading mechanism is bent.

Consult your nearest authorized

Brother dealer.

The thread tension is

incorrect.

The upper thread is not threaded

correctly.

Check the thread path, and then thread

the upper thread again.

p.57

The bobbin thread is not correctly

threaded.

Correctly thread the bobbin thread. p.36

The lower thread tension is incorrect. Adjust the tension of the bobbin thread. p.124

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

The upper thread

comes out of the

needle when

embroidering begins.

If a short length of thread remains after

the thread is trimmed, the needle may

become unthreaded when

embroidering begins again.

Set the remaining length of thread to

“Long Tail” on the second page of the

settings screen.

p.228

The upper thread does

not reach the bobbin

thread when

embroidering begins.

There is no more thread in the bobbin,

the thread does not feed from the

bobbin, or the thread that is fed from

the bobbin is too short.

Correctly thread the lower thread. p.36

Although the thread is

not broken, a broken

thread error occurs

and the machine stops.

If the thread breakage sensor in the

thread tension disc of the thread

tension knobs cannot detect that the

thread is being fed, even if the machine

is running, a broken thread error occurs

and the machine is stopped. If the

thread came out of the thread tension

disc, even though the thread is not

broken, the machine detects that the

thread is not being fed and stops.

Clean the tension unit. Correctly pass

the thread through the thread tension

disc. If the broken thread error occurs

after the machine is cleaned and

rethreaded, the sensor may be

damaged. Consult your nearest

authorized Brother dealer.

p.59, 287

The thread is worn.

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

Jumpstitches are long.

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers.

p.287

There are needle cuts

or holes in the

garment.

The needle is dull.

Replace the needle. Dull needles have

a difficult time passing through the

garment, causing fabrics to tear.

p.33, 86

The fabric is too delicate.

The simple penetration of the needle

could damage delicate fabrics. Use

stabilizer on top of fabric.

p.254

There is puckering in

the fabric.

The thread tension is too tight.

Adjust the tension according to the type

of fabric and thread being used.

Polyester thread will stretch during

sewing especially if the tensions are set

too high. After the stitching is complete,

the thread returns to its original

strength, causing puckers in the fabric.

p.125

The framing tension of the fabric is

incorrect.

Tightly frame non-stretchable, woven

fabrics. Loose framing will cause the

fabric to bunch up under the stitching.

Tautly frame soft knits using a stable

backing. Overstretching the garment

will cause it to look puckered when the

frame is removed.

p.253

The column stitches are too long.

Re-digitize the design with fill stitching

or with multiple rows of column

stitching.

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

298

There is puckering in

the fabric.

The needle is dull.

Dull needles push fabric down and

damage material. Replace the needle.

p.33, 86

The design density is too heavy.

Too many stitches in an area pull

fabric, causing it to pucker. Slightly

decrease the design density by 5% to

10%.

The LCD cannot be

read.

The LDC screen is too bright or too

dark.

Adjust the brightness of the screen

display.

p. 234

There is no color

indicated on LED light

after the lights flashing,

when the thread color

needs to be changed.

Black is assigned as the next thread

color.

When black is assigned as the next

thread color, LED light does not

indicate the next thread color. The light

turns off after flashing.

p.114

When embroidering

thick fabric, the fabric

cannot be correctly

hooped.

Fabric slips within the frame because of

its thickness.

Wrap masking tape or bias tape around

the outer frame. The tape will provide

resistance so that the fabric does not

easily slip.

p. 253

There is flickering in

built-in camera image

displayed in the LCD

screen.

If the machine is being used in a very

cold environment, there may be

flickering in the built-in camera image

displayed in the LCD screen.

This is not a malfunction. Leave the

machine turned on, and then wait a

while before using the built-in camera.

–

CAUTION

• This machine is equipped with a thread detecting mechanism. If the machine is not threaded with the

upper thread, the machine will not operate correctly, even if the start/stop button is pressed after

unlocking the machine.

• If the machine suddenly stops:

• Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord.

• Restart the machine with the correct operating procedure. Refer to page 38.

Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference Page

APPENDIX

299

Error messages

If the start/stop button is pressed while the machine is not correctly set up or if an incorrect operation is

performed, the machine stops and informs you of the error with a buzzer and an error message. If an error

message appears, correct the problem according to the instructions in the message.

To close the message, touch or perform the correct operation, then touch . If the message

appears again, consult your nearest authorized Brother dealer.

Some malfunction occurred. There are too many characters in the

curved text arrangement for the

selected embroidery frame.

Change the text arrangement or the

embroidery frame.

Machine cannot receive any data from

the PC in the Link mode.

Turn off the machine, and check the

USB connection. After connect the USB

cord securely, turn on the machine

again. (Refer to page 169)

When embroidering the pattern for the

optional jumbo frame, the machine

failed to find the positioning mark.

Follow the procedure from step

h on

page 260, again.

Machine failed to recognize the

embroidery positioning mark.

Confirm that the embroidery positioning

mark is in the selected area. If problem

persists, reposition the mark.

When in camera mode by touching

, some keys are unavailable.

Touch to cancel the camera mode

to activate the key.

300

The installed embroidery frame is too

small.

Check which embroidery frames can be

used, and then install a larger

embroidery frame. (Refer to page 48.)

The upper thread broke, the thread

came out of the thread tension disc or a

thread guide, or the machine is not

threaded correctly.

Check that the thread passes under the

upper and middle thread guides, and

correctly thread the upper thread. (Refer

to page 57.) If the thread is not broken,

clean the thread guides and the tension

unit. (Refer to page 287.)

The bobbin thread broke or ran out.

Check that there is thread on the bobbin

and that approximately 50 mm (2

inches) of thread has been pulled out,

and then re-install the bobbin. (Refer to

page 36.)

Lint or dust has accumulated in the

thread tension disc.

Remove the tension dials, and then

remove any lint or dust accumulated

between the felt washers. (Refer to

page 287.)

The thread tension is too tight.

Check the tensions of the upper thread

and bobbin thread, and then adjust

them. (Refer to page 124.)

* Since there may be many other causes, refer to the Troubleshooting table.

The upper thread breaks. (Refer to page 293.)

The bobbin thread breaks. (Refer to page 295.)

* Touch to move the needle back or forward. (Refer to page 116.)

The patterns you are editing take up

too much memory, or you are editing

too many patterns for the memory.

Sewing cannot begin from the specified

starting position.

Change the starting position or rehoop

the fabric and change the embroidering

position. (Refer to 93, 135.)

The needle has stopped at an incorrect

position.

Turn the handwheel so that the mark on

the handwheel is at the top.

The needle bar case could not be

moved to its initial position.

Touch to automatically reset the

needle bar case.

APPENDIX

301

The needle bar case has stopped at an

incorrect position.

Touch to automatically reset the

needle bar case.

The needle bar case motor has locked

up.

Touch to automatically reset the

needle bar case.

The automatic needle-threading

mechanism did not operate correctly.

Remove the thread entangled in the

automatic needle-threading

mechanism, and then touch .

Another operation was performed

while the automatic needle-threading

mechanism was threading the needle.

Press the automatic needle threading

button, and then perform the other

operation after the needle is threaded.

(Refer to page 61.)

Too many patterns are being combined

for the amount of memory available.

Delete some patterns from the

combined pattern.

The pattern could not be saved because

the memory is full.

Delete some patterns.

The memory capacity of the USB media

has been exceeded.

There is too much data in either the

machine or the USB media.

was touched in the

embroidering screen.

Touch to return to the

embroidering settings screen. The

previous embroidery in the

embroidering screen will be canceled.

The selected pattern is going to be

deleted because was touched.

302

The image is going to be deleted. The machine was turned off while

sewing, then turned on again.

Touch to return the machine to

the condition (pattern position and

number of stitches) when it was turned

off. Follow the procedure described in

“Resume Embroidering After Turning

Off the Machine” on page 122 to align

the needle position and sew the

remainder of the pattern.

was touched while thread

colors were being changed.

A saved combined pattern is being

rotated in the embroidering settings

screen.

Color sorting for the combined border

pattern will be canceled when

is touched. In addition, the thread marks

will be removed even if they have been

set.

The thread picker did not operate

correctly.

Remove the thread entangled on the

thread picker.

The thread trimming button was

pressed while a screen other than the

embroidering screen or embroidering

settings screen was displayed.

Display either the embroidering screen

or embroidering settings screen before

using the thread trimming function.

Thread guide assembly support is not

prepared.

Prepare the thread guide assembly.

(Refer to “Preparing the thread guide

assembly” on page 28.)

Machine failed to communicate with

the PC in the Link mode.

Turn off the machine, and on again.

The thread trimming button was

pressed before the machine was

unlocked.

Touch to use the thread

trimming function.

APPENDIX

303

The machine needs maintenance.

(Refer to page 289.)

Machine has recognized the

embroidery position mark.

Remove the embroidery positioning

sticker and touch to continue.

The machine is retrieving a previously

saved pattern.

The machine was stopped while the

needle bar case was moving.

Touch to automatically reset the

needle bar case.

The combined character pattern is too

large for the embroidery frame.

Rotate the pattern 90 degrees and then

continue combining characters.

The built-in camera is being used to

align the embroidery position, but the

embroidery positioning sticker is too

near an edge or the pattern extends

from the embroidery frame.

Change the position of the embroidery

positioning sticker, and then try aligning

the position again.

The combined character pattern is too

large to fit in the extra-large

embroidery frame.

Change the character pattern

combination.

The motor has locked up due to tangled

thread or for other reasons related to

thread delivery.

If the thread is entangled in the bobbin

case, clean the race, and then oil it.

(Refer to page 286 and 289.)

The USB media is write-protected.

Cancel the write protection.

304

The USB media is write-protected.

Touch , and cancel the write

protection.

You tried to select a pattern after the

USB media in which the pattern is

saved has been changed.

You tried to save a copyright-protected

pattern to USB media or a computer.

According to copyright laws, patterns

that are illegal to reproduce or edit

cannot be saved to USB media or a

computer. Save the pattern in the

machine’s memory.

You tried to use an editing function

while the pattern is not completely

within the red outline.

Move the pattern so it is completely

within the outline.

An unusable embroidery card is

inserted.

Remove the embroidery card.

The file format is incompatible with

this machine.

Check the list of compatible file formats.

(Refer to page 230.)

The file size exceeds the data capacity

of the machine.

Confirm the file size and format. (Refer

to page 230.)

A large-size (split) embroidery pattern

was selected to be combined with

another embroidery pattern.

This pattern can not be combined.

The pattern has too many stitches and

cannot be used.

Data with stitches that exceed

specifications (500,000 stitches) cannot

be displayed. Use data design software

to reduce the number of stitches.

APPENDIX

305

You tried to retrieve a pattern that was

downloaded for a different machine.

You tried to use incompatible media. The USB media is transmitting.

Dust may have accumulated within the

moving cutter.

Clean the moving cutter. (Refer to

page 285.)

An error has occurred with the USB

media.

You tried to recall or save a pattern

while no USB media is loaded.

Load USB media.

306

If any of the following messages appear, consult your nearest authorized Brother dealer.

APPENDIX

307

If the machine does not respond

when a key is pressed

If nothing happens when a key on the screen is

touched (no key can be selected or the keys are

misaligned), adjust the touch panel as described

below.

Touch anywhere inside the touch panel,

and turn the machine off, then on again.

• Continue touching the touch panel until the screen

shown below appears.

• The start/stop button is red.

→ The adjustments screen appears.

Use the included touch pen to touch the

center of the numbered crosses on the

screen, from 1 to 13.

→ AD Value X and AD Value Y numbers change with

the touch of each numbered cross to show variables.

• If the buzzer sounds when cross number 13 is

touched, an error occurred during setting, and

“ERROR” appears on the screen. Touch the crosses

again, starting with the number indicated on the

screen.

After making the necessary touch panel

adjustment, “SUCCESS” will show on the

screen.

Turn the machine off, and on again.

CAUTION

• Be sure to use the included touch pen to adjust

the touch panel. Do not use a mechanical

pencil, screwdriver or any other hard or sharp

object. Do not apply pressure to the LCD

screen display, otherwise damage to the

display may result.

Note

• If the keys still do not respond, even after

the touch panel is adjusted, or if the touch

panel cannot be adjusted, contact your

nearest authorized Brother dealer.

+5 +8

+11 +13

+2 +3

+10

12+

308

Embroidery machine specifications

Specifications

Item Specification

Weight 42.5 kg (94 lb)

Machine size

560 (W) × 589 (D) × 785 (H) mm

(22 (W) × 23-1/4 (D) × 31 (H) inches)

Sewing speed

Maximum / Tubular: 1,000 spm, Cap: 600 spm

Speed range / Max.: 1,000 spm, Min.: 400 spm

Hook Type Vertical rotary hook

Hook size Normal size (Type L)

Needle HA130EBBR / #11

Number of needle 10 needles

Thread tension Manual

Cap sewing (Option) 60 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (2-3/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W))

Tubular sewing

(4 frames available)

200 mm (H) × 360 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H) × 14 inches (W)),

130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) (5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W)),

100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W) (4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W)),

40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W) (1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))

Thread trimming Upper and lower thread

Thread breakage

sensor

Yes / Upper thread and bobbin thread

Automatic needle

threader

Yes

Communication

with PC

USB port

Data storage USB media/SD card

APPENDIX

309

You can use USB media or a computer to download software upgrades for your embroidering machine.

When an upgrade program is available on “ http://support.brother.com ”, please download the files

following the instructions on the website and steps below.

You can use USB to download software upgrades/updates (**********.upf) for your sewing machine.

Upgrade procedure using USB

media

While pressing the automatic threading

button, turn the main power to on.

→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.

Touch .

Insert the USB media into the USB port on

the machine. The media device should only

contain the upgrade file.

1 USB port

2 USB media

Touch .

→ The upgrade file is downloaded.

Remove the USB media, and turn the

machine off and on again.

Upgrading Your Machine’s Software

Note

• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is

saved on the USB media being used for this upgrade.

Note

• The access lamp will begin blinking after

inserting USB media, and it will take about 5

to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time

will differ depending on the USB media).

Note

• If an error occurs, a red text error message

will appear. When the download is

performed successfully, following message

will appear.

310

Upgrade procedure using

computer

For computers and operating systems, see

“Connecting your machine to the PC” on

page 148.

While pressing the automatic threading

button, turn the main power to on.

→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.

Touch .

Plug the USB cable connector into the

corresponding USB ports for the computer

and for the machine.

→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My

computer)”.

Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.

Touch .

→ The upgrade file is downloaded.

Unplug the USB cable, and turn the

machine off and on again.

Note

• Do not connect any additional USB media

devices to your computer when using the

USB cable.

Note

• If an error occurs, a red text error message

will appear. When the download is

performed successfully, following message

will appear.

APPENDIX

311

Symbols

“DST” Setting .................................................................. 220, 227

Accessories .................................................................................. 20

Adjusting

angle

....................................................................................... 99

cap frame driver

.................................................................... 266

edited patterns

....................................................................... 176

legs

.......................................................................................... 26

operation panel

....................................................................... 27

sewing speed

......................................................................... 139

thread tension

........................................................................ 124

touch panel

........................................................................... 307

Alphabet patterns

...................................................................... 155

Appliqué alphabet

........................................................... 159, 240

Appliqué sewing

.............................................................. 129, 240

Array key

.................................................................. 74, 158, 181

Arrow key

.......................................................................... 98, 176

Automatic lock stitch

................................................................. 134

Automatic needle-threading button

..................................... 19, 61

Automatic needle-threading mechanism

...................................... 61

Background colors ..................................................................... 227

Backing

..................................................................................... 251

Basic procedures

......................................................................... 35

Basting

...................................................................................... 128

Bobbin

........................................................................................ 33

installing

.................................................................................. 36

Bobbin case

...................................................... 36, 37, 124, 286

reinstalling

............................................................................... 37

removing

................................................................................. 36

Bobbin winder

........................................................................... 279

Border frame

............................................................................. 193

Border function

......................................................................... 190

Built-in camera

.................................................................. 18, 105

Canton fleece ............................................................................ 254

Canvas

...................................................................................... 254

Cap frame

.................................................................................. 262

attaching

................................................................................ 269

preparing to use

..................................................................... 265

removing

............................................................................... 275

Cap frame driver

........................................................................ 265

adjusting

................................................................................ 266

installing

................................................................................ 265

Cap frame mounting jig

............................................................. 265

Caps

golf style

................................................................................ 264

low profile (low fitting)

.......................................................... 263

standard (pro style)

................................................................ 263

Carriage

....................................................................................... 18

Centerpoint

............................................................................... 225

Change thread color key

........................................... 74, 185, 187

Changing

Basting distance

..................................................................... 229

character spacing

................................................................... 181

colors of the pattern

............................................................... 185

display guides

........................................................................ 223

embroidering position

.............................................................. 98

font

........................................................................................ 184

language

................................................................................ 234

position of a sticker

................................................................ 212

size

.................................................................... 178, 179, 184

text arrangement of a character

.............................................. 181

thread color display

............................................................... 225

thread density

........................................................................ 185

thread spools

.......................................................................... 114

units of measurements

............................................................ 234

Checking

needle bars and thread colors

.................................................. 55

preview image

......................................................................... 46

thread spool changes

............................................................. 113

Cleaning

around the needle plate

......................................................... 285

bobbin case

........................................................................... 286

hook

...................................................................................... 284

LCD

....................................................................................... 284

machine surface

..................................................................... 284

maintenance message

............................................................ 289

oiling machine

....................................................................... 288

thread paths

........................................................................... 287

Clock set

.............................................................................. 39, 40

Color information

...................................................................... 225

Color shuffling

........................................................................... 187

Color thread table

...................................................................... 250

Combining patterns

.......................................................... 174, 183

Computer

connecting

............................................................................. 148

port

.......................................................................................... 82

Connecting patterns

................................................................... 206

Connecting rotated patterns

....................................................... 214

Corduroy

................................................................................... 254

Cotton sheeting

.......................................................................... 254

Custom thread table

......................................................... 195, 197

Decorative Alphabet Patterns ..................................................... 158

Delete key

......................................................................... 73, 157

Deleting

pattern

................................................................................... 200

short stitches

.......................................................................... 228

Denim

....................................................................................... 254

Density key

........................................................................ 74, 185

Digitizing information

................................................................ 277

Display

................................................................................ 34, 70

Display guides

........................................................................... 223

Distance from center (horizontal)

................................................. 73

Distance from center (vertical)

..................................................... 73

Dress shirt (woven)

.................................................................... 254

DST

................................................................ 80, 149, 227, 250

Duplicating a pattern

................................................................. 199

Eco mode ................................................................................... 229

Edit end key

................................................................................. 73

Edit key

........................................................................................ 76

Editing

..................................................................... 45, 174, 201

combined pattern

................................................................... 202

restart from beginning or middle

.................................. 116, 119

Editing patterns as a group

......................................................... 176

Embroidering

corner of fabric

........................................................................ 95

small fabric

.............................................................................. 95

tape or ribbon

.......................................................................... 95

Embroidering position

.................................................................. 98

align

....................................................................................... 102

Index

312

Embroidering screen ............................................................ 55, 78

Embroidering settings screen

...................................... 53, 75, 201

Embroidery

basic method

........................................................................... 64

repeatedly sewing

.................................................................. 136

Embroidery data

......................................................................... 148

Embroidery frame

attaching to the machine

.......................................................... 50

hooping

................................................................................... 48

removing

.................................................................................. 68

types

........................................................................................ 89

Embroidery frame holder

attaching

.................................................................................. 30

installing

................................................................................ 276

removing

................................................................................ 265

Embroidery frame holders

............................................................ 88

Embroidery frame indicators

........................................ 48, 73, 75

Embroidery key

............................................................................ 76

Embroidery patterns

................................................................... 151

editing

............................................................................ 45, 174

selecting

................................................................................... 43

Embroidery positioning sticker

................................................... 108

Embroidery thread

....................................................................... 57

Enlarge the pattern image

........................................................... 174

Error messages

........................................................................... 299

Fabric .................................................................................. 34, 95

precautions for caps

............................................................... 264

recommendations

.................................................................... 34

removing

.................................................................................. 68

Fabric Thickness Check

............................................................. 104

Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart

........................................... 254

Features

......................................................................................... 7

Feet

.............................................................................................. 18

Flipping a pattern

....................................................................... 177

Forward/Backward stitch key

................................... 79, 116, 119

Frame patterns

........................................................................... 152

Front view

.................................................................................... 18

Golf shirt .................................................................................... 254

Golf Style cap

............................................................................ 264

Grouping

................................................................................... 176

Handwheel .................................................................................. 19

Headwear

.................................................................................. 254

Hook

......................................................................................... 284

Hook cover/Hook

........................................................................ 18

Hooping

.................................................................... 48, 93, 253

Horizontal mirror image key

...................................................... 177

Jumbo frame .............................................................................. 258

Jump code

................................................................................. 227

Jumpstitch trimming

................................................................... 227

Language ......................................................................... 222, 234

LCD

............................................................................. 19, 34, 70

Lingerie

...................................................................................... 254

Link function

.............................................................................. 169

Linked characters

....................................................................... 137

Lock stitching key

.............................................................. 76, 134

Locking mechanism

..................................................................... 64

Locking the needle bar

................................................................. 99

Low Profile (Low fitting)

............................................................. 263

Lower thread guide

...................................................................... 18

Machine operations guide key ................................................... 235

Main power switch

....................................................... 19, 38, 69

Maintenance

.................................................................... 235, 284

Manual color sequence

............................................................. 132

Manual needle bar settings

........................................................ 143

Maximum sewing speed key

.............................................. 79, 139

Memory key

..................................................................... 160, 161

Monogram and frame designs

................................................... 153

Mounting jig cap frame

............................................................. 268

Mouse pointer shape

................................................................. 233

Moving a pattern

....................................................................... 176

Moving needle

............................................................................ 63

MPEG-4 (MP4) videos

............................................................... 237

Multi color key

................................................................... 74, 184

Names of machine parts .............................................................. 18

Needle

........................................................................................ 33

changing

................................................................................. 86

threading

................................................................................. 61

Needle bar case

.......................................................................... 18

Needle bar key

..................................................................... 56, 79

Needle bar/Frame move key

........................................................ 40

Needle plate

.............................................................................. 285

Next page key

............................................................................. 72

Number of thread color changes

.................................. 72, 73, 75

Oiling ........................................................................................ 288

Opening screen

......................................................................... 231

Operation panel

........................................................... 18, 19, 27

Optional accessories

................................................................... 22

Pattern display area ..................................................................... 40

Pattern editing screen

................................................. 45, 73, 174

Pattern list screen

................................................................. 43, 72

Pattern selection

........................................................................ 150

Pattern selection key

................................................................. 175

Pattern size

........................................................................... 73, 75

Pattern type selection screen

................................................ 43, 71

Pointer shape

............................................................................ 233

Positioning key

................................................... 73, 76, 98, 176

Power supply cord

............................................................... 38, 69

Power supply plug

....................................................................... 19

Preview key

.................................................................. 72, 73, 76

Previewing the Image

.................................................................. 46

Previous page key

....................................................................... 72

Principal parts

.................................................................... 18, 235

Region display ............................................................................. 78

Remaining length

...................................................................... 228

Reserve stop key

....................................................... 79, 140, 142

Reserved needle

............................................................... 143, 221

Resume embroidering

............................................................... 122

Retrieving

from computer

....................................................................... 166

from the machine’s memory

.................................................. 164

from USB media/SD card

....................................................... 165

Return key

............................................................................ 72, 79

Right-side/rear view

..................................................................... 19

Rotate all key

............................................................. 76, 99, 201

Rotate key

.......................................................................... 74, 180

Rotation angle

...................................................................... 73, 75

APPENDIX

313

Satin jacket ................................................................................ 254

Saving

to computer

........................................................................... 161

to the machine’s memory

...................................................... 160

to USB media/SD card

........................................................... 161

Screen

.................................................................. 34, 40, 41, 70

brightness

.............................................................................. 234

Screen saver settings

.................................................................. 229

SD card

.................................................................... 81, 161, 165

Selecting

edited pattern

........................................................................ 175

embroidery pattern

........................................................ 43, 150

Selecting the thread color

.......................................................... 226

Separating combined character patterns

.................................... 182

Set key

......................................................................................... 72

Setting up

.................................................................................... 24

Sewing

appliqué

................................................................................ 240

pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric

............................... 248

Sewing light

....................................................................... 18, 232

Sewing order

............................................................................... 78

Sewing speed

............................................................................ 139

Sewing the embroidery

................................................................ 64

Sewing time

................................................................................. 78

Short stitch delete

............................................................ 220, 228

Shutoff support mode

................................................................ 229

Silk

............................................................................................ 254

Size

.............................................................................. 72, 73, 75

Size key

...................................................................... 72, 74, 178

Spacing key

....................................................................... 74, 181

Speaker

....................................................................................... 19

speaker volume

..................................................................... 232

Specifications

............................................................................ 308

Split (large-size) embroidery patterns

......................................... 244

Spool

........................................................................................... 57

Spool change indicator

...................................................... 78, 113

Spool stand

.......................................................................... 18, 29

Spool stand LED

.............................................................. 114, 231

Stabilizer

.................................................................. 92, 251, 254

Standard (Pro Style) caps

........................................................... 263

Standard Tail

................................................................... 220, 228

Start/stop button

.................................................................. 19, 65

Starting/ending position key

...................................... 76, 135, 136

Stitch count

................................................................................. 78

Stitch recalculator

...................................................................... 179

Stitch simulator screen

................................................................. 47

Stopping embroidering

................................................................ 66

at color changes

.................................................................... 140

pause

..................................................................................... 140

Sweater knit

............................................................................... 254

Sweatshirt

.................................................................................. 254

Table ......................................................................................... 255

Tajima data

..................................................................... 227, 250

Temporary needle bar setting key

...................................... 79, 142

Ten-needle machine

...................................................................... 7

Tension dial

............................................................................... 125

Terry cloth

................................................................................. 254

Thread

................................................................ 33, 34, 57, 251

Thread color

.............................................................................. 250

Thread color display

.................................................................. 225

Thread color set up display

.......................................................... 79

Thread color sorting

.................................................................. 190

Thread density

........................................................................... 185

Thread guide

....................................................................... 18, 58

Thread guide assembly

................................................................ 28

Thread mark

.............................................................................. 193

Thread recommendations

............................................................ 34

Thread sensor

............................................................................ 233

Thread spools

............................................................................ 114

changing

................................................................................ 114

easily changing

...................................................................... 115

Thread tail length

....................................................................... 228

Thread tension

................................................................. 124, 283

Thread tension disc

...................................................................... 59

Thread tension knobs

......................................................... 18, 125

Thread trimming button

....................................................... 19, 67

Thread trimming key

.................................................................. 183

Threading

needle

...................................................................................... 61

upper thread

.................................................................... 55, 57

Tips for machine operation

........................................................ 247

Touch panel

................................................................................. 19

Trial sewing key

................................................................... 54, 76

Troubleshooting

............................................................... 235, 290

T-shirt

........................................................................................ 254

Tutorial video

............................................................................ 236

Uninterrupted embroidering (one color) ..................................... 142

Units of measurements

..................................................... 222, 234

Unlock key

.......................................................................... 64, 79

Upgrading machine’s software

................................................... 309

computer

............................................................................... 310

USB media

............................................................................. 309

Upper thread guide pretension knob

.......................................... 125

Upper threading

........................................................................... 55

USB connectivity

......................................................................... 81

computer

................................................................................. 82

mouse

...................................................................................... 82

USB media

............................................................................... 82

Ventilation slots ........................................................................... 19

Version

...................................................................................... 222

Volume of speaker

..................................................................... 232

Please visit us at http://support.brother.com/ where you can get

product support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).

English

884-T13

Printed in Taiwan

XG5965-001

Brother PR1050X Embroidery Machine

Product's Documents

Operation Manual

Specifications

Brother PR1050X Questions and Answers

Related Products

Brother PE800 Embroidery Machine, 138 Built-in Designs, 5" x 7" Hoop Area, Large 3.2" LCD Touchscreen, USB Port, 11 Font Styles

Brother PR680W 6‑Needle Embroidery Machine

Brother PE525 Computerized Embroidery Machine

Brother SB7900E Embroidery Only Machine

Brother PE500 Computerized Embroidery Machine